R999000396 TS2plus 7.0 2017-08 EN Media PDF

TS 2plus transfer system
7.0
0-2 TS 2plus 7.0 | Symbols
Symbols
Product features Conveyor medium
Permissible load, single load Belt
30
Permissible load, sum of loads Toothed belt
60 kg
Conveying level Plastic flat top chain
Unit with energy-efficient drive available Plastic accumulation roller chain
St Steel accumulation roller chain
Lateral separation Vplus Vplus accumulation roller chain
Central separation Duplex chain
EPA ESD-protected area Rounded belt
XX Specific section load/cm

kg
= total workpiece pallet weight/support surface length
1 cm
Potential applications
Suitable for use in clean rooms
%rH Suitable for use in dry rooms

%
Additional information
±XXmm Positioning accuracy
XXX N Vertical process force

F
Ordering information
Explanation
Packing unit = minimum order quantity (here: 10 items)

Example: Packing unit contains 10 items, material number 3 842 523 258
Order 1x 3 842 523 258 = delivery of 1x minimum order quantity 3 842 523 258 = 10 items
Order 15x 3 842 523 258 = delivery of 2x minimum order quantity 3 842 523 258 = 20 items
Delivery unit = delivery quantity (here: 16 items)

Example: Delivery unit contains 16 items, material number 3 842 532 695
Order 1x 3 842 532 695 – delivery of 1x delivery quantity 3 842 532 695, SP 2/B, l = 6070 mm = 16 items
Order 15x 3 842 532 695 – delivery of 15x delivery quantity 3 842 532 695 SP 2/B, l = 6070 mm = 240 items
Bosch Rexroth AG, R999000396 (2017-08)

0-3 TS 2plus 7.0 | TS 2plus system overview
TS 2plus system overview

Workpiece pallet
See page 2-6 See page 2-8 See page 2-12 See page 2-34 See page 2-47 See page 2-50
Longitudinal
conveyor
See page 3-6 See page 3-18 See page 3-24 See page 3-28
Curves
Transverse conveyor
See page 5-4 See page 5-26 See page 5-80 See page 5-82 See page 5-88
Leg sets
See page 6-6 See page 6-8 See page 6-10 See page 6-16 See page 6-24
Positioning and
orientation
Transportation
control

0-4 TS 2plus 7.0

Table of contents | TS 2plus 7.0 0-5
TS 2plus transfer system 1
Workpiece pallet 2
Longitudinal conveyor 3
Curves 4
Transverse conveyor 5
Leg sets 6
Positioning and orientation 7
Transportation control 8
Identification systems 9
MTpro planning software 10
Technical data 11
Material number overview 12
Index 13
R999000396 (2017-08), Bosch Rexroth AG

0-6 TS 2plus 7.0 | Table of contents

TS 2plus transfer system | TS 2plus 7.0 1-1

TS 2plus transfer
1
system
Features 1-2
Operating principle 1-3
Design ideas 1-16
Identification and data tag systems 1-18
Energy efficiency – Rexroth 4EE 1-19

1-2 TS 2plus 7.0 | TS 2plus transfer system
TS 2plus features
TS 2plus features
The Rexroth TS 2plus transfer system is designed for the TS 2plus features standardized modular units, that can be
transportation of workpiece pallets weighing up to 240 kg combined in many ways to create a single system. This
and is a good all-rounder in economical production. It is a permits a wide range of variants to be constructed and
diverse modular system that meets the requirements of a tailor made for individual requirements. The modular design
wide range of different products. permits the cost-effective use of ratio potentials in
production. All components are of robust design and can
therefore be reused for mounting future product
generations.

Operating principle
Diverse, sturdy, adaptable Special TS 2plus units
Due to the large number of modular components Apart from the different types of conveyor media, the
incorporated in the system, it can be adapted to suit TS 2plus also provides an abundance of specific
specific production conditions and individual layouts components for curves, transverse conveyors, positioning
without requiring any extra parts: units and drive units. The time and effort spent on planning
and designing can be reduced to a minimum using
▶▶ Four types of conveyor media (polyamide belts, toothed
predefined macro modules.
belts, flat top chains and accumulation roller chains)
Material combinations that can be ordered from the catalog
which can be combined together to meet the needs of
have been optimized for standard operation with TS 2plus.
the assembly process
For special applications, additional material combinations
▶▶ Workpiece pallets dimensions (from 160 x 160 mm up to
are available. Your Rexroth representative will be pleased to
1200 x 1200 mm) specifically designed for the
support you in choosing an appropriate solution
product sizes
where required.
▶▶ A high maximum load of up to 240 kg per
workpiece pallet
Operating principle
On an assembly line, a transfer system transports manual work or automatic stations), while the conveyor
workpieces from one station to another. Two constantly medium continues moving. Several workpiece pallets
moving belts, toothed belts, flat top chains, can build up in front of individual stations to form small
accumulation roller chains or round belts convey the buffers. Once a processing stage is completed at the
workpiece pallets (WT) by means of friction. The station, the workpiece pallet is released to travel on to
workpiece pallets hold the workpieces. All workpiece the next work station. The pneumatic stop gate is
finishing takes place on the workpiece pallets. opened, either manually or with a station control. At the
Information about destination and processing stage are end of the assembly process the workpiece is removed
carried in the workpiece pallet memory. The stop gate from the workpiece pallet.
(VE) stops the workpiece pallet at the stations (areas for
In a few steps for the best solution
1 2 3 4 5 6
Choice of Transported Layout planning Conveyor media Workpiece pallet Ambient
system product and module conditions
combination

Operating principle
Operating principle
1. Choice of system
To ensure the most economical operation possible, an The flexible modular TS 2plus transfer system from Rexroth
assembly line requires precise forward planning. Later covers a very wide range of requirements: With the wide
conversions must be as simple and cost-effective to execute range of mutually compatible units and macro modules
as possible in order to be able to respond to future market permit a large variety of layouts with manual and automatic
requirements. The key factors when selecting a suitable processing stations to be created. Solutions for maximum
transfer system are the weight and quality of the positioning accuracy or for especially heavy workpieces can
workpieces to be conveyed as well as the particular be implemented easily using standard components. The
production environment. future-proof TS 2plus transfer systems are designed for
high availability, even under the harshest conditions.
mm
1200
1040
TS 2plus TS 5
0 ‒ 240 kg 0 ‒ 400 kg
160
TS 1
0 ‒ 3 kg
0 kg 3 kg 70 kg 100 kg 200 kg 240 kg 400 kg
WT 1
WT 2
WT 2/H
WT 5

Operating principle
TS 1
TS 1 0 – 3 kg
The TS 1 transfer system is

specifically tailored to
small, lightweight products
and assemblies, which
require high positioning
accuracy and repeatability.
TS 2plus
TS 2plus 0 – 240 kg
In the automotive industry

and the electronics
industry, household
appliances and electronics
manufacturing: With their
diverse system components,
TS 2plus assembly lines are
suitable for use in a wide
range of industries.
TS 5
TS 5 0 – 400 kg
The roller conveyor of the

TS 5 transfer system
conveys loads of up to
400 kg, over long distances
where necessary, while its
robust construction make it
especially suitable for harsh
environments.

Operating principle
Operating principle
2. Transported product
Workpiece pallet (WT)
The workpiece pallet (WT) transports the workpiece from The WT 2 series workpiece pallets can be configured from
one processing station to the next on the transfer system. components for the individual workpieces. A selection of
Rexroth workpiece pallets are available in several versions various frame modules and carrying plates is available for
for different applications: The complete plastic WT 2/E this purpose.
handles the transportation and positioning of lighter
Because the workpiece pallets must be loaded as centrally
workpieces. The more robust WT 2 and WT 2/H models,
as possible for optimal transportation, it is advisable to
with their steel or aluminum carrying plates, are also
choose larger sized carrying plates for heavier workpieces
suitable for medium and heavy loads.
or for those with uneven weight distribution.
Permitted weights
The WT total weight is limited for each WT size so that the

permitted surface pressure is not exceeded.
The WT total weight results from the following:
WT 2 WT 2/H
▶ Workpiece pallet mass
▶ Workpiece pallet load (workpiece, pick-up, etc.)
▶ Weight of the special equipment (data storage, etc.)
For workpiece pallets that are not square, please note that
the permissible WT total weight (mG) may be different for
longitudinal conveyors and transverse conveyors and the
shorter side is the determining factor for the maximum 0 kg 70 kg 100 kg 240 kg
WT load. WT 2
WT 2/H
Permissible gravity center position
When separating pallets or changing directions, it is

lWT bWT
important to observe the position of the gravity center load
1/3 1/3
on the workpiece pallet to ensure that the acceleration
forces can be absorbed without any interferences.
Generally we recommend that:
▶ the load should be positioned in the center of the hS
workpiece pallet
▶ the center of gravity should not exceed a height hs of
1/2 bWT (with bWT ≤ lWT).
The specified performance data relate to the illustrated
gravity center position.

Operating principle
Available workpiece pallet (WT) dimensions

1200
Workpiece pallets with a surface from 160 x 160 mm
WT 2 up to 1200 x 1200 mm (WT 2) or with a surface from
WT 2/H 0 ‒ 100 kg 400 x 400 mm up to 1200 x 1200 mm (WT 2/H) allow for
400 x 400 mm to correct adaptation to the particular workpiece geometry. If
1200 x 1200 mm necessary, a number of workpieces can be accommodated
WT 2/H
on a single workpiece pallet (WT).
0 ‒ 240 kg
400 WT 2
160 x 160 mm to
1200 x 1200 mm
160
160 400 1200 mm
240
224
1 kg/cm
208
1.5 kg/cm
192 2 kg/cm
176 WT 2
WT 2/H
160
Max. total weight of WT (kg)
144
128
112
96
80
64
48
32
16
0
160 240 320 400 480 640 800 1040 1200
WT standard sizes (mm)

Operating principle
Operating principle
3. Layout planning
When planning the system layout, it is very important to
take into account the individual requirements, targets and System layouts
priorities of the company. A very flexible system is often
required for complex assembly procedures. This may be
Main circuit
due to:
▶ frequent product alterations

▶ cycle problems due to different models
▶ differences in the work involved at each station
▶ frequent product alterations
▶ great fluctuation in number of workpieces
In cases like this, it is practical to transfer the workpiece

pallet off the main conveyor (main circuit) into a shunt
system which is independent of the main cycle. The term
main circuit is used to describe workplaces or stations
arranged in series.
A shunt is when workpiece pallets are directed out of the
main circuit for processing independently of the main cycle,
and then reintegrated in the main circuit.
Alt. A
Alt. B

Operating principle
◀◀ Rectangular circuit ◀◀ U-shape
Shunt
◀◀ Production line ◀◀ Parallel workplaces

construction
(with lift*)
* Our partners can

advise you about lifts.
Mixed systems
◀◀ U-shape ◀◀ Rectangular circuits with
(with lift) parallel workplaces
*Our partners can advise

you about lifts.

Operating principle
Operating principle
4. Conveyor media
The load carrying capacity of a workpiece pallet results
from the
▶ combination of conveyor medium, glide profiles, and
workpiece pallet wear pad as well as
▶ the surface length on the conveyor medium.
Toothed belts, belts, plastic flat top chains, roller chains,

duplex chains (from left to right)
Standard wear pad Special wear pad
PA PE
Conveyor medium Vplus St
Steel glide profile 1,5 1,5 1,5 2,0

kg kg kg kg
1 cm 1 cm 1 cm 1 cm
Plastic glide profile 1,0 1,0 1,0 1,0 1,0 1,5 1,5 2,0
kg kg kg kg kg kg kg kg
1 cm 1 cm 1 cm 1 cm 1 cm 1 cm 1 cm 1 cm
XX Specific section load/cm = overall workpiece pallet mass /support surface length

kg
1 cm
Permitted section loading

Σ mG = section loading
When designing the conveyor sections, it is important to
ensure that the sum of the total weights of all workpiece
pallets, which re on the conveyor section in accumulation
operation at one time, is less than the permitted load for
the conveyor section.
The permitted section loading in accumulation is specified
on individual drive modules and belt sections. If the
permitted section loading for the conveyor section is
exceeded, the section must be divided into several
individual sections.

Operating principle
Operating principle 1
5. Combination of conveyor media, glide profiles

and components
Assignment of weight classes – products
Workpiece pallet WT 2 ≤ 400 mm WT 2 WT 2-H WT 2-H

Typical total weights of the Load Load Load Load
WT in the application 0 ‒ 30 kg 30 ‒ 100 kg 30 ‒ 100 kg 100 ‒ 240 kg
Lift positioning unit (HP)/
PE 2 (F ≤ 30 kg)
positioning unit (PE)
PE 2/X (F ≤ 100 kg) PE 2/H (F ≤ 240 kg) PE 2/H (F ≤ 240 kg)
HP 2/L (F ≤ 40 kg) HP 2/L (F ≤ 40 kg)
HP 2 (F ≤ 110 kg) HP 2 (F ≤ 110 kg)
PE 2/XX (F ≤ bel) PE 2/XX (F ≤ bel) PE 2/XX (F ≤ bel) PE 2/XX (F ≤ bel)
PE 2/XP (F ≤ 100 kN)
Stop gate (VE) VE 2 (F ≤ 200 kg) VE 2 (F ≤ 200 kg) VE 2/D100-H VE 2/D100-H

VE 2/L (F ≤ 200 kg) VE 2/L (F ≤ 200 kg) VE 2/D250-H VE 2/D250-H
VE 2/M (F ≤ 200 kg) VE 2/M (F ≤ 200 kg)
VE 2/S (F ≤ 140 kg) VE 2/S (F ≤ 140 kg)
VE 2/X (F ≤ 450 kg) VE 2/X (F ≤ 450 kg)
VE 2/D-60 (F ≤ 60 kg) VE 2/D-60 (F ≤ 60 kg)
VE 2/D-175 (F ≤ 100 kg) VE 2/D-175 (F ≤ 100 kg)
VE 2/D-200 (F ≤ 200 kg) VE 2/D-200 (F ≤ 200 kg)
Damper (DA) DA 2/10 (F ≤ 20 kg)

DA 2/30 (F ≤ 60 kg)
DA 2/100 (F ≤ 100 kg) DA 2/100 (F ≤ 100 kg)
DA 2/100-H (F ≤ 100 kg) DA 2/100-H (F ≤ 100 kg)
DA 2/250-H (F ≤ 240 kg) DA 2/250-H (F ≤ 240 kg)
DA 2/150-E DA 2/150-E
Switch bracket (SH) SH 2/S SH 2/S

SH 2/ST SH 2/ST
SH 2/S-H SH 2/S-H SH 2/S-H SH 2/S-H
SH 2/U SH 2/U
SH 2/UV SH 2/UV
SH 2/U-H SH 2/U-H
SH 2/SF SH 2/SF
Rocker (WI) WI 2 WI 2

Operating principle
Operating principle
6. Ambient conditions
Materials used, resistance to media
Rexroth transfer systems are manufactured with high-quality

materials to ensure continuous use. They are resistant to
lubricating and cleansing agents that are common in an
industrial environment.
However, we cannot guarantee that the products contained
in this catalog are resistant to all combinations of testing
liquids, gases, or solvents. Please contact your Rexroth
representative if you have any doubts.

Operating principle
Environmental conditions – climatic
The transfer systems have been designed for stationary use

in a location that is protected from the elements.
Operating temperature
+5 … +40 °C
-5 … +60 °C with 20%
less load
Storage temperature
-25 °C … +70 °C
Relative humidity
5 … 85%, non-condensing
1 … 2% (dry room) on request
Air pressure
> 84 kPa as appropriate
Installation altitude < 1400 m above mean sea level.
Load values are reduced by 15% when the system is set up
at a location that is over 1400 m above sea level.
Environmental conditions – biological
Avoid molds, fungi, rodents, and other vermin.
Environmental conditions – chemical
Do not set up near industrial systems with chemical

emissions.
Environmental conditions – physical
Do not set up near sources of shavings, sand or dust.

Do not set up in areas that are regularly jarred by high
forces caused by, e.g., presses, heavy machinery, etc.

Operating principle
Suitability for electrostatically

sensitive areas
Almost all of the components and parts in Rexroth

transfer systems are ESD-compatible or available in
ESD-compatible design. They can thus principally be
used in EPA (ESD-protected areas). We do, however,
recommend that you contact your Rexroth
representative.
Oil
Use in oily environments
For applications where process-related oil can enter the

transfer system, we recommend using chains as the
conveyor medium (accumulation roller chains, Vplus chains
or flat top chains). We do, however, recommend that you
contact your Rexroth representative.

Operating principle
%rH
Use in dry rooms
TS 2plus has been tested and approved with all conveyor

media for use in dry rooms with a relative humidity of
1 ... 2%, e.g., for the production of Li-Ion battery cells.
Your Rexroth representative will be pleased to advise you
about this.
Use in cleanrooms
Almost all the components have been approved by the IPA*)

for use in clean rooms and for clean room class 7 according
to DIN EN ISO 14644-1. Please note that some clean room-
compatible components have been specially modified.
Please contact your Rexroth representative if you require
clean room components.
*
Fraunhofer Institute for Manufacturing Engineering and
Automation, Stuttgart, Germany

Design ideas
Design ideas
Systems
Layout example with

240 x 240 mm workpiece
pallets, conveyor
medium: belts,
toothed belts

Design ideas
Layout example with

640 x 640 mm workpiece
pallets, conveyor
medium: accumulation
roller chain, flat
top chain

Identification and data tag systems
Identification and data tag systems

Identification and data storage systems store all product
and process-related data directly on the workpiece pallet
and enable local or central data processing. Identification
and data tag systems are used to control numerous
production and transport systems in assembly
technology applications.
Data related to objects is the basis for

▶▶ for targeted control of processes and processing steps
▶▶ infeeding or outfeeding workpiece pallets according to
type or variant when manufacturing product variants on
flexible assembly systems.
ID 15
ID 40
You can find the Electric Drives
and Controls Hydraulics
Linear Motion and
Assembly Technologies Pneumatics Service
current range of
Rexroth identification
RFID-Systeme 4.0
and data tag systems
Ausgabe
in the RFID systems ID 200 / ID 40 / ID 15 / ID 10
catalog.
Identification systems
catalog
DE no. 3 842 541 003
www.boschrexroth.com/RFID
ID 200
Energy efficiency – Rexroth 4EE
Energy efficiency – Rexroth 4EE 1
Energy efficiency – a key factor for corporate success
From an economic point of view, energy efficiency and All potentials for optimization are used effectively when not
reduced emissions lower operating costs and offer a only the details of a system but the system as a whole is
competitive edge in the fiercely competitive global market. optimized. The 4EE system features four levers:
In addition, they help support compliance with
environmental standards.
Energy System Design Efficient Components Energy Recovery Energy on Demand
Systematic overall view, Products and systems with Recovery and storage of Energy usage on demand,
planning, simulation, optimized efficiency excess energy standby mode
and consulting
Application in the entire machine life cycle
Production/
Concept Design Engineering Start-up Modernization
operation
Efficient system layout Energy-efficient modules
To achieve high energy efficiency, the system must The TS 2plus modules are equipped with
be examined as a whole as early as in the particularly energy-efficient drives. The efficiency
planning phase. The TS 2plus modular system of most of the motors already exceed future
offers numerous modules, all of which enable you requirements. The interplay of friction-optimized
to implement a transfer system tailored precisely materials, e.g., on slide rails, friction-minimizing
to the particular application. This effectively gear oils and numerous further design details
prevents over-dimensioning and high energy ensures perfect coordination in the
losses from the outset. overall system.
Energy use on demand Worldwide approval
Minimal energy consumption requires the ability For international use, most of the motors feature
to be able to switch off system components on CE, cURus and CCC approvals.
demand. The majority of motors in the TS 2plus
system are designed for start-stop operation and
frequency converter operation.

Energy efficiency – Rexroth 4EE

Workpiece pallets | TS 2plus 7.02-1

Workpiece pallets
1
Workpiece pallet selection 2-2 6
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

2-2 TS 2plus 7.0 | Workpiece pallets

Workpiece pallet selection

The workpiece pallet (WT) is used in the transfer system to convey the
workpiece through the processing stations.
To guarantee an optimal transport, it should be loaded in the center.
Workpiece pallet applications The surface length on the conveyor medium may vary in
longitudinal and transverse conveying with non-square
▶▶ Integrated positioning bushings enable defined pallets. The shorter side of the workpiece pallet determines
positioning of the incoming workpiece in the the maximum permitted total weight.
processing station
▶▶ Optionally available data tags can provide work-related mGL
information during processing. This information can be
mGQ
evaluated on-site and also updated
Various WT workpiece pallets are available:

▶▶ The WT 2/E is an especially inexpensive, light-weight
T
W
l
workpiece pallet with an all-plastic design that can be
T
W
b
used for simple conveying and positioning tasks
(see p. 2-6) 29425
▶▶ The WT 2 is a sturdy and universally applicable

workpiece pallet with a steel or aluminum carrying plate The following estimated parameters can be used:
(see p. 2-8) ▶▶ Conveyor media belt and toothed belt: A surface load
▶▶ The WT-2 components enable individual configuration of of up to 1 kg/cm is permissible on workpiece pallets
the WT using various frame modules and carrying plates, with PA wear pads.
including those provided by the customer (see p 2-12) ▶▶ Conveyor medium flat top chain: PA wear pads on the
Total weight of workpiece pallets up to 100 kg workpiece pallets are recommended in the combination
▶▶ The WT 2/H with aluminum carrying plate for with a plastic flat top chain. This permits surface loads
applications with total weights up to 240 kg of up to 1 kg/cm in the standard design with plastic
(see p 2-34) glide profiles in the section profile. Bearing loads of
▶▶ WT 2/F with an aluminum frame profile design can be 1.5 kg/cm are possible with the optionally available
used for large workpieces. Grooves throughout the version with steel glide profiles.
frame profile make it easier to install parts holders (see ▶▶ Conveyor medium accumulation roller chain: In
p. 2-47). Total weight of workpiece pallets up to 100 kg conjunction with PE wear pads on the workpiece
▶▶ WT 2/F-H with the same aluminum carrying plate, but in pallets, the standard design with plastic glide profiles in
the heavy duty version up to 240 kg (see p 2-50) the section profile permits surface loads of up to 1.5 kg/
cm. The optionally available version with steel glide
Size, combination with conveyor medium profiles and the accumulation roller chain with steel
rollers can tolerate surface loads of 2 kg/cm
The permitted total weight mG of a workpiece pallet results
from the
▶▶ combination of conveyor medium, glide profiles, and
workpiece pallet wear pad as well as
▶▶ the surface length on the conveyor medium
(see p. 1-10)


When WT 2/E, WT 2 and WT 2/F workpiece pallets are All VE 2/... (without VE 2/...-H) can be used for lateral
1
used, the VE 2/... stop gates are mounted directly on the separation.
section for lateral separation. All VE 2/D...-H can be used for central separation.
2
The WT 2/E, WT 2 and WT 2/F are used up to 100 kg.
3
When WT 2/H and WT 2/F-H are used, the VE 2/D...-H stop
gates are mounted by a cross strut for central separation.
4
WT 2/H or WT 2/F-H are used for heavy duty versions up to
workpiece pallet total weights of 240 kg.
5
Mounting in rear right position in the direction of transport, Mounting in front left position in the direction of transport, 7
on the inside of the workpiece pallet surface on the outside of the workpiece pallet surface
8
WT 2 WT 2
9
10
VE 2/...
11
VE 2/... 12
00126811.eps 00126810.eps
Mounting inside the workpiece pallet surface Mounting outside the workpiece pallet surface 13
14
VE 2/D...-H
VE 2/D...-H 15
WT 2/H WT 2/H
16
17
00112520.eps 00112521.eps
18
The size and position of the positioning bushings is
different for the workpiece pallets for lateral separation
19
compared to the types for central separation. This must be
considered when selecting the positioning units. For more
20
information, see also the table on p. 1-11
21
22
23
24




WT 2/E workpiece pallet 2-6 1

12
2
WT 2 workpiece pallet 2-8 4

100
5
Components for WT 2 workpiece pallets 2-12

7
100
WT 2/H workpiece pallets 2-34

10
240
11
12
Components for WT 2/H workpiece pallets 2-40
13
240
14
15
WT 2/F workpiece pallets 2-47
100 16
17
18
WT 2/F-H workpiece pallet 2-50
240 19
20
21
22
23
24

WT 2/E workpiece pallet

12
▶▶ Integrated positioning bushings for a positioning

accuracy of ± 0.3 mm
▶▶ Prepared for the installation of mobile data tags from
the ID 10, ID 40 and ID 200 identification systems
▶▶ Not suitable for accumulation roller chains
▶▶ A standard size with the dimensions
bWT x lWT = 240 x 240 mm
▶▶ Material: All-plastic polyamide version (PA 6)
WT 2/E is a cost-effective workpiece pallet with an all- above and on the joints of up to 0.5 kg/cm.
plastic design, suitable for applications with low loads from
Accessories
Recommended accessories
▶▶ ID 40 attachment kit 3842532630 (see RFID systems
catalog)
Delivery notes
Scope of delivery Condition on delivery
▶▶ Workpiece pallet, complete ▶▶ Fully assembled
Product designation Material number
WT 2/E workpiece pallet 3842352171

Technical data
1
Material number 3842352171
Features 2
Plate thickness dPl mm 10
Flatness mm 1 3
Workpiece pallet mass mWT kg 1.6
4
Dimensions
5
30 lWT + 10
0
81 10 lWT – 0,5 6
7
39
Ø12,2 +0,1 8
39,5
bWT + 10
bWT – 0,5
9
c
10
39,5
11
18
12
20 18 39,5 c 57,5
13
3 1 2
00013239
00013239
14
No production drawing
1 Exciter plate
2 Guide groove 15
3 Stop gate aperture
16
Width of workpiece pallet Length of workpiece pallet Workpiece pallet mass Dimension
bWT lWT mWT c 17
(mm) (mm) (kg) (mm)
240 240 1.6 125 18
19
20
21
22
23
24

WT 2 workpiece pallet, fully assembled
WT 2 workpiece pallet, fully assembled 100
▶▶ Suitable for belt, toothed belt, and flat top chain

▶▶ Robust workpiece pallet with high rigidity
▶▶ Integrated positioning bushings
▶▶ Prepared for installation of mobile data tags from the
ID 15, ID 40 and ID 200 identification systems
▶▶ Not suitable for accumulation roller chains
▶▶ Plastic frame modules with universal steel carrying plate
▶▶ 15 standard sizes
▶▶ Suitable for use in an EPA
▶▶ Material:
–– Frame module with polyamide (PA) wear pad
–– Steel carrying plate (4.8 mm)
WT 2 is a sturdy workpiece pallet with high rigidity in a executed as standard with two or four additional threaded
composite plastic-steel construction used to pick up and holes for reinforcing bolts. Number given in carrying plate
convey workpieces in the TS 2plus transfer system. table on page 2-27.
From size 400 x 400 mm, the workpiece pallet plates are
Delivery notes
▶▶ Carrying plate ▶▶ Fully assembled
▶▶ Frame modules
▶▶ Connection elements
▶▶ Positioning bushings

1
Product designation Workpiece pallet Material number
bWT x lWT
2
WT 2 workpiece pallet 160 x 160 0842090030
WT 2 workpiece pallet 160 x 240 0842090032 3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Dimensions 10
bWT + 10
11
bWT 16,5
5,4
1 12
2
13
bWT – 75
3
14
lWT – 75
lWT – 10
lWT + 10
15
lWT
lWT
5 4
d
f
16
Ø12H7
17
18
20
5
18
17
57,5 57,5
18
3 5 52,5 c
7
10 e
28 bWT – 10 19
00012901
20
1 Exciter plate
2 Guide groove 21
00012901
4 Top clearance
5 Bottom clearance 22
23
24

Width of Length of Plate Flatness Plate Workpiece pallet Dimension Dimension Dimension Dimension
workpiece pallet workpiece pallet thickness mass mass c d e f
bWT lWT dPl mPl mWT
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg) (kg) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
160 160 4.8 0.3 0.9 1.2 45 124 124 45

160 240 4.8 0.3 1.3 1.8 45 204 124 125
160 320 4.8 0.3 1.8 2.3 45 284 124 205
240 240 4.8 0.3 2.0 2.5 125 204 204 125
240 320 4.8 0.5 2.7 3.3 125 284 204 205
240 400 4.8 0.5 3.4 4.1 125 364 204 285
320 320 4.8 0.5 3.6 4.4 205 284 284 205
320 400 4.8 0.6 4.6 5.4 205 364 284 285
320 480 4.8 0.6 5.5 6.4 205 444 284 365
400 400 4.8 0.6 5.9 6.6 285 364 364 285
400 480 4.8 0.6 7.0 8.0 285 444 364 365
400 640 4.8 0.8 9.3 11.0 285 604 364 525
480 480 4.8 0.8 8.3 9.7 365 444 444 365
480 640 4.8 1.0 11.4 12.4 365 604 444 525
640 640 4.8 1.0 15.3 16.3 525 604 604 525

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Components for WT 2 workpiece pallets
100
To fulfill special needs, the workpiece pallets can also be Carrying plates
individually configured in a design where the carrying plate
is assembled by the customer. In addition to frame modules ▶▶ Steel carrying plates with a thickness of 4.8 mm for
with different wear pads, various carrying plates, workpiece pallets up to medium size High stability
positioning bushings and all the necessary fastening allows for easy integration of your own workpiece
elements are available. supports
▶▶ Aluminum carrying plates with a thickness of 8 mm or
12.7 mm are a light and rigid alternative for medium and
large workpiece pallets
Positioning bushings
▶▶ For defined pick-up of the workpiece pallet in the

positioning units
Accessories
▶▶ Dowel pins to connect the extension modules to the

carrying plate
▶▶ Bolts in combination with reinforced frame modules for
large workpiece pallets (from 400 x 400 mm) and
weights over 50 kg to max. 100 kg.
Frame modules
▶▶ PA frame modules are the basic solution for use on

belts, toothed belts, and plastic flat top chains
▶▶ PA wear pads are required for use on conveyor medium
accumulation roller chains and duplex chains
▶▶ Reinforced (PA or PE) for workpiece pallet total
weights > 50 kg and conveyor speeds > 12 m/min

Frame modules, standard/reinforced 2-47 1

50 100
2
Positioning bushings 2-22

4
Bolts 2-25
7
Carrying plates 2-26

10
100
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Standard frame module

50
▶▶ Corner modules with standard side lengths of 160 to

400 mm
▶▶ Frame extension module, 320 mm
▶▶ Material:
–– Corner/extension module (PA) with PA
(= polyamide) wear pad
or
–– Corner/extension module (PA) with PE
(= polyethylene) wear pad
▶▶ Reinforced frame modules are required for total
weights mG > 50 kg and for conveyor speeds
vN >12 m/min
▶▶ Can be combined with WT 2 carrying plates
Frame modules are used for self-assembly of workpiece Frame modules with PE wear pads are required for use on
pallets. The PA basic solution is suitable for use on the the duplex chain and accumulation roller chain conveyor
belt/toothed belt and flat top chain conveyor media. media. The PE pad is not suitable for accumulation
operation on ESD flat top chains.

1
A Corner module
B Extension module
2
A
3
B
4
3
bW
2
0
T
,
lW
T
5
00012888a
6
Product designation bWT, lWT (mm) Material number
Standard frame module, corner module (PA) 160 3842174301
7
8
Standard frame module, corner module (PA+PE)1 160 3842526760
9
Standard frame module, corner module (PA+PE) 240 3842526761
10
1
No exciter plate for position sensing from below with inductive sensors is included. Only lateral position sensing is possible with this design.
11
Product designation l (mm) Material number

Standard frame module, extension module (PA) 320 3842513458 12
Standard frame module, extension module (PA+PE) 320 3842526764
13
Dimensions
bWT + 10
14
bWT 16,5
5,4 15
1
16
2
bWT – 75 17
3
18
lWT – 75
lWT – 10
lWT + 10
lWT
lWT
5 4
d
f
19
Ø12H7
20
18
20
21
18
17
57,5 57,5 3 5 52,5 c

7
0012901 10 e 22
28 bWT – 10
23
00012901
1 Exciter plate 4 Top clearance

2 Guide groove 5 Bottom clearance 24
00012901

Width of Length of Plate mass Plate mass Plate mass Dimension Dimension Dimension Dimension
workpiece pallet workpiece pallet mPl1 mPl2 mPl3 c d e f
bWT lWT
(mm) (mm) (kg) (kg) (kg) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
160 160 0.9 45 124 124 45

160 240 1.4 45 204 124 125
240 240 2.1 125 204 204 125
160 320 1.8 45 284 124 205
240 320 2.8 125 284 204 205
320 320 4.3 2.1 205 284 284 205
240 400 4.1 2.0 125 364 204 285
320 400 5.3 3.7 205 364 284 285
400 400 6.6 3.4 5.3 285 364 364 285
320 480 6.4 3.2 5.1 205 444 284 365
400 480 7.0 4.0 6.4 285 444 364 365
480 480 9.3 4.9 7.7 365 444 444 365
400 640 10.4 5.4 8.6 285 604 364 525
480 640 12.3 6.5 10.3 365 604 444 525
640 640 16.3 8.7 13.8 525 604 604 525
400 800 10.8 285 764 364 685
480 800 12.9 365 764 444 685
640 800 17.3 525 764 604 685
800 800 21.7 685 764 764 685
640 1040 22.5 525 1004 604 925
800 1040 28.2 685 1004 764 925
800 1200 36.0 685 1164 764 1085
1040 1040 40.6 925 1004 1004 925
1040 1200 46.9 925 1164 1004 1085
1200 1200 54.1 1085 1164 1164 1085
1
4.8 mm steel
2
8.0 mm aluminum
3
12.7 mm aluminum

Reinforced frame module
Reinforced frame module 1

100
3
▶▶ For self-assembly of workpiece pallets from
400 x 400 mm. Required for workpiece pallet total
4
weights mG > 50 kg and for conveyor speeds
vN > 12 m/min
5
▶▶ Corner module, 400 mm
▶▶ Frame extension module, 320 mm
6
▶▶ Wide variety of workpiece pallet sizes possible through
combinations of standard modules
▶▶ Material: 7
–– Corner/extension module (PA) with PA (= polyamide)
wear pad 8
or
–– Corner/extension module (PA) with PE 9
(= polyethylene) wear pad
▶▶ Can be combined with WT 2 carrying plates 10
11
12
Reinforced frame modules are used for self-assembly of toothed belts is suitable for use on the belt/toothed belt 13
workpiece pallets with dimensions from 400 x 400 mm. and plastic flat top chain conveyor media.
Required for workpiece pallet total weights > 50 kg or for Frame modules with PE wear pads are required for use on 14
conveyor speeds vN > 12 m/min. the duplex chain and accumulation roller chain
The PA basic solution for use on conveyor media belts/ conveyor media. 15
Accessories 16
Required accessories
▶▶ Bolt, see p. 2-25 17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

A Corner module
B Extension module
B
3
bW
2
0
T
,
lW
T
00012888a
Product designation bWT, lWT Material number

(mm)
Reinforced frame module, corner module (PA) 400 3842525998

Reinforced frame module, corner module (PA+PE) 400 3842528292
Product designation l Material number

(mm)
Reinforced frame module, extension module (PA) 320 3842525999

Reinforced frame module, extension module (PA+PE) 320 3842528293
Dimensions
bWT + 10
bWT 16,5
5,4
1
bWT – 75
3
lWT – 75
lWT – 10
lWT + 10
lWT
lWT
5 4
d
f
Ø12H7
18
20
5
18
17
57,5 57,5 3 5 52,5 c

7
10 e
28 bWT – 10
00012901
1 Exciter plate
2 Guide groove
4 Top clearance
00012901
5 Bottom clearance

Width of Length of Plate mass Plate mass Plate mass Dimension Dimension Dimension Dimension 1
workpiece pallet workpiece pallet mPl1 mPl2 mPl3 c d e f
bWT lWT
(mm) (mm) (kg) (kg) (kg) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) 2
160 160 0.9 45 124 124 45

3
160 240 1.4 45 204 124 125
240 240 2.1 125 204 204 125
4
160 320 1.8 45 284 124 205
240 320 2.8 125 284 204 205
5
320 320 4.3 2.1 205 284 284 205
240 400 4.1 2.0 125 364 204 285
6
320 400 5.3 3.7 205 364 284 285
400 400 6.6 3.4 5.3 285 364 364 285
7
320 480 6.4 3.2 5.1 205 444 284 365
400 480 7.0 4.0 6.4 285 444 364 365
8
480 480 9.3 4.9 7.7 365 444 444 365
400 640 10.4 5.4 8.6 285 604 364 525
9
480 640 12.3 6.5 10.3 365 604 444 525
640 640 16.3 8.7 13.8 525 604 604 525
400 800 10.8 285 764 364 685
10
480 800 12.9 365 764 444 685

640 800 17.3 525 764 604 685 11
800 800 21.7 685 764 764 685
640 1040 22.5 525 1004 604 925 12
800 1040 28.2 685 1004 764 925
800 1200 36.0 685 1164 764 1085 13
1040 1040 40.6 925 1004 1004 925
1040 1200 46.9 925 1164 1004 1085 14
1200 1200 54.1 1085 1164 1164 1085
1
4.8 mm steel
15
2
8.0 mm aluminum
3
12.7 mm aluminum 16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

WT 2: Components
WT 2: Components
WT 2: Frame modules with PA wear pad – parts list

For mG ≤ 50 kg or vN ≤ 12 m/min workpiece pallets For mG > 50 kg and vN > 12 m/min workpiece pallets
3842525998*)
3842525999*)
3842174301
3842174302
3842174303
3842174304
3842513458
3842174301
3842174302
3842174303
3842174304
3842513458
bWT lWT bWT lWT
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
160 160 4
160 240 2 2
160 320 2 2
240 240 4
240 320 2 2
240 400 2 2
320 320 4
320 400 2 2
320 480 2 2 2 320 480 2 2 2
400 400 4 400 400 4
400 480 2 2 2 400 480 2 2 2
400 640 2 2 2 400 640 2 2 2
400 800 2 2 4 400 800 2 2 2 2
480 480 4 4 480 480 4 4
480 640 2 2 4 480 640 2 2 4
480 800 4 6 480 800 4 2 4
640 640 4 4 640 640 4 4
640 800 2 2 6 640 800 2 2 2 4
640 1040 2 2 6 640 1040 2 2 2 4
800 800 4 8 800 800 4 4 4
800 1040 2 2 8 800 1040 2 2 4 4
800 1200 2 2 10 800 1200 2 2 6 4
1040 1040 4 8 1040 1040 4 4 4
1040 1200 2 2 10 1040 1200 2 2 6 4
1200 1200 4 12 1200 1200 4 8 4
*
Reinforced module
1
With the 160 mm frame module with PE wear pad (3842526760),
no exciter plate is included for sensing with inductive sensors from
below. Only lateral position sensing is possible with this design.

WT 2: Components
3
WT 2: Frame modules with PE wear pad – parts list
For mG ≤ 50 kg or vN ≤ 12 m/min workpiece pallets For mG > 50 kg and vN > 12 m/min workpiece pallets
4
38425267601
38425267601
3842528292*
3842528293*
3842526761
3842526762
3842526763
3842526764
3842526761
3842526762
3842526763
3842526764
5
bWT lWT bWT lWT

6
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
160 160 4
7
160 240 2 2
160 320 2 2
8
240 240 4
240 320 2 2
240 400 2 2
9
320 320 4
320 400 2 2 10
320 480 2 2 2 320 480 2 2 2
400 400 4 400 400 4 11
400 480 2 2 2 400 480 2 2 2
400 640 2 2 2 400 640 2 2 2 12
400 800 2 2 4 400 800 2 2 2 2
480 480 4 4 480 480 4 4 13
480 640 2 2 4 480 640 2 2 4
480 800 4 6 480 800 4 2 4 14
640 640 4 4 640 640 4 4
640 800 2 2 6 640 800 2 2 2 4 15
640 1040 2 2 6 640 1040 2 2 2 4
800 800 4 8 800 800 4 4 4 16
800 1040 2 2 8 800 1040 2 2 4 4
800 1200 2 2 10 800 1200 2 2 6 4 17
1040 1040 4 8 1040 1040 4 4 4
1040 1200 2 2 10 1040 1200 2 2 6 4 18
1200 1200 4 12 1200 1200 4 8 4
*
Reinforced module 19
1
With the 160 mm frame module with PE wear pad (3842526760),
no exciter plate is included for sensing with inductive sensors from
below. Only lateral position sensing is possible with this design.
20
21
22
23
24

Positioning bushing
Positioning bushing
▶▶ For supporting the workpiece pallet in positioning units

▶▶ Used to mount frame modules and carrying plates
▶▶ Positioning bushings increase the empty weight of the
workpiece pallet
▶▶ Material: Steel, hardened
▶▶ Can be combined with frame modules of the WT 2
workpiece pallet
Accessories
Required mounting accessories
▶▶ Press-fit mandrel, see p. 2-23
Product designation Delivery unit Material number
D20 x 4.8 positioning bushing 1 3842174341
D20 x 8 positioning bushing 1 3842524614
D20 x 12.7 positioning bushing 1 3842524615
Technical data
30054

positioning bushing, Press-fit mandrel
Dimensions
1
Dimension must to correspond to the WT plate thickness.
ød
Note: The dimension 12H7 refers to the state before press-fitting. After
press-fitting with the mandrel the dimension 12H7 is guaranteed to be in 2
a
the "b" range.
b = 4,5
10
ø12H7
ø20 5
00012891
00012891
6
Material number Dimension Lower dimension Dimension Upper dimension Lower dimension
a for a d for d for d
AU AO AU 7
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
8
3842174341 4.8 -0.1 16 +0.034 +0.024
3842524614 8 -0.1 16 +0.05 +0.04
9
3842524615 12.7 -0.1 16 +0.05 +0.04
10
Press-fit mandrel 11
12
13
▶▶ Material: Steel, hardened
▶▶ Can be combined with positioning bushings of the WT 2 14
workpiece pallet
15
16
17
18
The press-fit mandrel is used when mounting the pallet for
pressing the positioning bushings into the carrying plate.
19
20
Accessories
21
▶▶ Positioning bushing, see p. 2-22
22
23
Press-fit mandrel 3842525846
24

Dowel pin
Dowel pin
▶▶ To connect the carrying plate and the standard frame

extension module, two dowel pins are required
▶▶ To connect the carrying plate and the reinforced frame
extension module, one dowel pin is required
▶▶ Material: Steel
workpiece pallet
The dowel pin is used to connect the carrying plate and the
frame extension module.
Product designation Packaging unit Material number
Dowel pin 100 3842532812
Technical data
30052

Bolts
Bolts 1
3
▶▶ For absorbing the stop forces on the stop gate
▶▶ Material: steel; galvanized
4
▶▶ Can be combined with reinforced frame modules of the
WT 2 workpiece pallet
5
All WT plates from bWT x lWT = 400 x 400 mm are equipped which is executed with only two threaded bores. 8
with four threaded bores for reinforcement bolts as
standard. An exception is the 480 x 320 mm WT plate, 9
Ordering information 10
Product designation Dimension Lower dimension for a Delivery unit Material number
a* AU 11
(mm) (mm)
Bolt, D16 a = 4.8 4.8 -0.2 1 3842525803 12

Bolt, D16 a = 8 8 -0.2 1 3842525804
Bolt, D16 a = 12.7 12.7 -0.2 1 3842525805 13
* The dimension must correspond to the plate thickness.
14
Technical data
15
16
17
18
30053
19
Dimensions
20
Dimension
Ø19,5 a
a (mm)
21
4.8
33017
22
M12x1
8
Ø16
SW6
23
33018
12.7
24
00012892 33019

Carrying plate
Carrying plate
100
▶▶ For self-assembly of workpiece pallets for product

pick-up
▶▶ Completely drilled and ready for assembly
▶▶ 15 standard sizes in steel, 4.8 mm thick,
with KTL (cataphoretic primer) coating
▶▶ 10 standard sizes in aluminum, 8 mm thick
▶▶ 13 standard sizes in aluminum, 12.7 mm thick
▶▶ You will find drilling plans for identification and data
storage systems in the RFID systems catalog
workpiece pallet
Carrying plates are used for self-assembly of WT 2

workpiece pallets using frame modules and mounting
elements.

Carrying plate
1
Width Length Plate Flat- Plate Material Plate Flat- Plate Material Plate Flat- Plate Material
of of thickness mass number, thickness mass number, thickness mass number,
work- work- ness mPl steel ness mPl aluminum ness mPl aluminum 2
piece piece dPl dPl dPl
pallet pallet
3
bWT lWT
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg) (mm) (mm) (kg) (mm) (mm) (kg)
4
160 160 4.8 0.3 0.9 3842174311
160 240 4.8 0.3 1.4 3842174313
5
240 240 4.8 0.3 2.1 3842174321
160 320 4.8 0.3 1.8 3842174315
6
240 320 4.8 0.5 2.8 3842174323
320 320 4.8 0.5 4.3 3842174331 8.0 0.5 2.1 3842524595
7
240 400 4.8 0.5 4.1 3842174325 8.0 0.5 2.0 3842524594
320 400 4.8 0.6 5.3 3842174333 8.0 0.6 3.7 3842524596
8
400 400 4.8 0.6 6.6 38421743752 8.0 0.6 3.4 38425245982 12.7 0.6 5.3 38425383072
320 480 4.8 0.6 6.4 3842174334 8.0 0.6 3.7 38425245971 12.7 0.6 5.1 38425383461
400 480 4.8 0.6 7.0 3842174376 2
8.0 0.6 4.0 38425245992
12.7 0.6 6.4 38425383082
9
480 480 4.8 0.8 9.3 38421743812 8.0 0.8 4.9 38425246022 12.7 0.8 7.7 38425383092
400 640 4.8 0.8 10.4 3842174378 )
8.0 0.8 5.4 38425246002
12.7 0.8 8.6 38425383102 10
480 640 4.8 1.0 12.3 3842174383 2
8.0 1.0 6.5 38425246032
12.7 1.0 10.3 3842538311 2
640 640 4.8 1.0 16.3 3842523381 2

8.0 1.0 8.7 38425246052
12.7 1.0 13.8 38425383122 11
400 800 12.7 1.0 10.8 3842524601 2
480 800 12.7 1.0 12.9 38425246042 12

640 800 12.7 1.0 17.3 3842524606 2
800 800 12.7 1.0 21.7 38425246082 13

640 1040 12.7 1.2 22.5 3842524607 2
800 1040 12.7 1.2 28.2 38425246092 14

800 1200 12.7 1.2 36.0 3842548684
1040 1040 12.7 1.2 40.6 3842548685 15
1040 1200 12.7 1.2 46.9 3842548686
1200 1200 12.7 1.2 54.1 3842548687 16
1
With two threaded bores for reinforcing bolts
2
With four threaded bores for reinforcing bolts 17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Carrying plate
Dimensions
Steel carrying plate (4.8 mm)
b = bWT – 5,2
2x45˚(4x) 0 rr o p r s q
4,8+0,1
e ii
M12x1
d
j
I = lWT – 5,2
Ø8
i
c
h
b
g
a
Ø16
cc 39,5
15,4±0,3 0 0
39,5 k m t u tt n
54,9±0,3
00012902
00012902

Carrying plate
Width of Length of Flat- a b c cc d e f g h i ii j k 1

workpiece workpiece ness
pallet pallet
bWT lWT 2
(mm) (mm) (mm)
160 160 0.3 84.5 124 3
160 240 0.3 164.5 204
160 320 0.3 244.5 284
4
240 240 0.3 164.5 204
240 320 0.5 244.5 284
5
240 400 0.5 324.5 364
320 320 0.5 244.5 284
6
320 400 0.6 324.5 364
320 480 0.6 108.5 323.5 404.5 444 120.5 335.5
7
400 400 0.6 59.5 324.5 364 304.5
400 480 0.6 108.5 323.5 59.5 404.5 444 120.5 335.5 384.5
8
400 640 0.8 108.5 323.5 59.5 564.5 604 280.5 495.5 544.5
480 480 0.8 108.5 323.5 59.5 404.5 444 120.5 335.5 384.5 81
9
480 640 1.0 108.5 323.5 59.5 564.5 604 280.5 495.5 544.5 81
640 640 1.0 108.5 323.5 59.5 564.5 604 280.5 495.5 544.5 241
10
Width of Length of m n o p q r rr s t tt u Material

workpiece workpiece number 11
pallet pallet
bWT lWT
(mm) (mm) 12
160 160 84.5 45 3842174311
160 240 84.5 45 3842174313 13
160 320 84.5 45 3842174315
240 240 164.5 125 3842174321 14
240 320 164.5 125 3842174323
240 400 164.5 125 3842174325 15
320 320 244.5 205 3842174331
320 400 244.5 205 3842174333 16
320 480 244.5 205 3842174334
400 400 324.5 285 20 265 3842174375 17
400 480 324.5 285 20 265 3842174376
400 640 324.5 285 20 265 3842174378 18
480 480 296 404.5 69 284 365 20 345 3842174381
480 640 296 404.5 69 284 365 20 345 3842174383 19
640 640 456 564.5 69 284 525 20 505 3842523381
20
21
22
23
24

Carrying plate
Dimensions
Aluminum carrying plate (8 mm)
b= bWT – 5,2
2x45˚(4) 0 rr o p r s q 2x45˚(4) dPL±0,13
f
e
ii
M12x1
d j
I = IWT – 5,2
Ø8
c i
b h
a g
Ø16
cc 39,5
3,5
15,4±0,3 0 0
4,8
39,5 k m t u tt n
54,9±0,3
00012903

Carrying plate
Width of Length of Flat- a b c cc d e f g h i ii j k 1

workpiece workpiece ness
pallet pallet
bWT lWT 2
(mm) (mm) (mm)
240 400 0.5 324.5 364 3
320 320 0.5 244.5 284
320 400 0.6 324.5 364
4
320 480 0.6 108.5 323.5 59.5 404.5 444 120.5 335.5 384.5
400 400 0.6 59.5 324.5 364 304.5
5
400 480 0.6 108.5 323.5 59.5 404.5 444 120.5 335.5 384.5
400 640 0.8 108.5 323.5 59.5 564.5 604 280.5 495.5 544.5
6
480 480 0.8 108.5 323.5 59.5 404.5 444 120.5 335.5 384.5 81
480 640 1.0 108.5 323.5 59.5 564.5 604 280.5 495.5 544.5 81
7
640 640 1.0 108.5 323.5 59.5 564.5 604 280.5 495.5 544.5 241
8
bWT lWT m n o p q r rr s t tt u dPl Material
(mm) (mm) number
9
240 400 164.5 125 8.0 3842524594
320 320 244.5 205 8.0 3842524595
10
320 400 244.5 205 8.0 3842524596
320 480 244.5 205 8.0 3842524597
400 400 324.5 285 20 265 8.0 3842524598
11
400 480 324.5 285 20 265 8.0 3842524599

400 640 324.5 285 20 265 8.0 3842524600 12
480 480 296 404.5 69 284 365 20 345 8.0 3842524602
480 640 296 404.5 69 284 365 20 345 8.0 3842524603 13
640 640 296 404.5 69 284 525 20 505 8.0 3842524605
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Carrying plate
Aluminum carrying plate (12.7 mm) dimensions
b= bWT – 5,2
rr
2x45˚(4) 0 o p r s oo pp q 2x45˚(4) dPL±0,13
f
e
ii
hh
M12x1
bb
gg
aa j
d
I = IWT – 5,2
Ø8
c
h
Ø16
cc
39,5
3,5
15,4±0,3 0 0
4,8
39,5 k m t u kk mm tt n
54,9±0,3
30297

Carrying plate
Width of Length of Flatness a b c cc d aa bb e f g h 1

workpiece workpiece
pallet bWT (mm) pallet lWT (mm) (mm)
320 480 0.6 108.5 323.5 59.5 404.5 444 120.5 335.5 2
400 400 0.6 59.5 324.5 364
400 480 0.6 108.5 323.5 59.5 404.5 444 120.5 335.5 3
400 640 0.8 108.5 323.5 59.5 564.5 604 280.5 495.5
400 800 1.0 108.5 323.5 428.5 59.5 643.5 724.5 764 120.5 335.5
4
480 480 0.8 108.5 323.5 59.5 404.5 444 120.5 335.5
480 640 1.0 108.5 323.5 59.5 564.5 604 280.5 495.5
480 800 1.0 108.5 323.5 428.5 59.5 643.5 724.5 764 120.5 335.5 5
640 640 1.0 108.5 323.5 59.5 564.5 604 280.5 495.5
640 800 1.0 108.5 323.5 428.5 59.5 643.5 724.5 764 120.5 335.5 6
640 1040 1.2 108.5 323.5 428.5 59.5 643.5 964.5 1004 360.5 575.5
800 800 1.0 108.5 323.5 428.5 59.5 643.5 724.5 764 120.5 335.5
800 1040 1.2 108.5 323.5 428.5 59.5 643.5 964.5 1004 360.5 575.5 7
800 1200 1.2 108.5 323.5 428.5 59.5 643.5 748.5 963.5 1124.5 1164 200.5 415.5
1040 1040 1.2 108.5 323.5 428.5 59.5 643.5 964.5 1004 360.5 575.5 8
1040 1200 1.2 108.5 323.5 428.5 59.5 643.5 748.5 963.5 1124.5 1164 200.5 415.5
1200 1200 1.2 108.5 323.5 428.5 59.5 643.5 748.5 963.5 1124.5 1164 200.5 415.5
9
bWT (mm) lWT (mm) i ii j k gg hh m n o p q r

320 480 384.5 244.5 205 10
400 400 304.5 324.5 285
400 480 384.5 324.5 285 11
400 640 544.5 324.5 285
400 800 440.5 704.5 655.5 324.5 285
12
480 480 384.5 81 296 404.5 69 284 365
480 640 544.5 81 296 404.5 69 284 365
480 800 440.5 704.5 655.5 81 296 404.5 69 284 365 13
640 640 544.5 241 296 404.5 69 284 525
640 800 440.5 704.5 655.5 241 456 564.5 69 284 525 14
640 1040 680.5 944.5 895.5 241 456 564.5 69 284 525
800 800 440.5 704.5 655.5 81 296 724.5 69 284 685 389
15
800 1040 680.5 944.5 895.5 81 296 724.5 69 284 685 389
800 1200 520.5 1104.5 735.5 81 840.5 1055.5 296 724.5 69 284 685 389
1040 1040 680.5 944.5 895.5 321 536 964.5 69 284 925 389 16
1040 1200 520.5 1104.5 735.5 321 840.5 1055.5 536 964.5 69 284 925 389
1200 1200 520.5 1104.5 735.5 161 840.5 1055.5 376 1124.5 69 284 1085 389
17
bWT (mm) lWT (mm) rr s t tt u kk mm oo pp dPl Material number

320 480 12.7 3842538346 18
400 400 20 265 12.7 3842538307
400 480 20 265 12.7 3842538308 19
400 640 20 265 12.7 3842538310
400 800 20 265 12.7 3842524601
20
480 480 20 345 12.7 3842538309
480 640 20 345 12.7 3842538311
480 800 20 345 12.7 3842524604 21
640 640 20 505 12.7 3842538312
640 800 20 505 12.7 3842524606 22
640 1040 20 505 12.7 3842524607
800 800 20 604 401 665 616 12.7 3842524608
23
800 1040 20 604 401 665 616 12.7 3842524609
800 1200 20 604 401 665 616 12.7 3842548684
1040 1040 20 604 641 905 856 12.7 3842548685 24
1040 1200 20 604 641 905 856 12.7 3842548686
1200 1200 20 604 481 1065 696 801 1016 709 924 12.7 3842548687

WT 2/H workpiece pallet

240
▶▶ Workpiece pallet for especially high maximum permitted

total weight up to 240 kg (2 kg/cm length) in
combination with accumulation roller chain conveyor
medium
▶▶ Fully assembled or as a kit for self-assembly
▶▶ PE wear pads for quiet operation and low wear
▶▶ Integrated stop damper, ensures quiet running onto
other workpiece pallets
▶▶ For workpiece pallet dimensions lWT x bWT = 400 x 400
mm up to 1200 x 1200 mm
▶▶ Special dimensions on request
▶▶ Universal aluminum carrying plate with two carrying
plate thicknesses:
d = 12.70 mm
d = 19.05 mm
▶▶ Material:
–– Aluminum carrying plate
–– Corner module and slider with PE (= polyethylene)
Pick-up and transportation of workpieces in the TS 2plus wear pad
transfer system.
Accessories
▶▶ 2x WT 2/H (LE 2) positioning bushing kit, see p. 2-46
Positioning bushings are required when using a PE 2/H
positioning unit
Delivery notes
▶▶ Carrying plate ▶▶ Assembled (MT = 1)
▶▶ Corner module ▶▶ Kit, not assembled (MT = 0)
▶▶ Wear pads
▶▶ Damping elements

1
Material number 38429987511 38429987552
bWT (mm) Width of workpiece 400; 480; 640; 800; 1040; 2
T
pallet 1200
W
b
lWT (mm) Length of 400; 480; 640; 800; 1040; 3
d
workpiece pallet 1200
bWT x lWT Combination 400 x 400; 480; 640; 800;

lW
4
T
(mm x mm) options 480 x 480; 640; 800

640 x 640; 800; 1040; 1200;
800 x 800; 1040; 1200 5
1040 x 1040; 1200
1200 x 1200
lWT ≥ bWT
6
MT Kit 0; 1
0 = not assembled
1 = assembled 7
T
lW
1)
Plate thickness 12.7 mm
d
2)
Plate thickness 19.05 mm 8
9
bW
T
WT 2/H
10
00012966
Technical data 11
Material number 3842998751 3842998755
Load 12
Max. total weight of workpiece pallet mG kg 240 240
Plate thickness dPl mm 12.7 19.05 13
Width of workpiece Length of workpiece Workpiece pallet mass Flatness Workpiece pallet mass Flatness 14
pallet pallet 38429987511 38429987511 38429987552 38429987552
bWT lWT mWT mWT
15
(mm) (mm) (kg) (mm) (kg) (mm)
400 400 6.9 0.4 9.6 0.4 16

400 480 8.2 0.6 11.5 0.6
400 640 10.9 0.8 15.2 0.8 17
400 800 13.5 1.0 18.9 1.0
480 480 9.8 0.6 13.7 0.6
18
480 640 12.9 0.8 18.1 0.8
480 800 16.0 1.0 22.5 1.0
19
640 640 16.8 0.8 23.7 0.8
640 800 20.7 1.0 29.4 1.0
20
640 1040 26.6 1.2 37.9 1.2
640 1200 30.6 1.2 43.6 1.2
21
800 800 25.6 1.0 36.5 1.0
800 1040 32.8 1.2 46.9 1.2
800 1200 37.6 1.2 53.9 1.2
22
1040 1040 41.9 1.2 60.3 1.2
1040 1200 48.1 1.2 69.3 1.2 23
1200 1200 55.1 1.2 79.6 1.2
1
Plate thickness 12.7 mm 24
2)
Plate thickness 19.05 mm

Dimensions
3842998751 3842998755
bWT + 12
A–A A–A
bWT
(bWT – 124) 32,7 39,05
bWT – 205 (12,7) (19,05)
A
LWT/2
LWT – (124)
(M12)
LWT – 205
LWT + 12
LWT
(60)
10
70
A 7,5 (12) (12)

(60) bWT/2
28915 28915


10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Components for WT 2/H workpiece pallets
240
To fulfill special needs, the workpiece pallets can also be WT 2/H workpiece pallet mounting kit
individually configured in a design where the carrying plate
is assembled by the customer. In addition to frame ▶▶ Suitable for WT 2/H aluminum carrying plates and high
modules, various carrying plates, positioning bushings, and WT bearing loads
all the necessary fastening elements are available. ▶▶ PE wear pads for quiet operation and low wear
▶▶ Suitable for accumulation roller chains
Carrying plates
▶▶ Aluminum carrying plates with a thickness of 12.70 mm

or 19.05 mm are a light and rigid alternative for large
workpiece pallets
Positioning bushings
▶▶ For defined pick-up of the workpiece pallet in the

positioning units

WT 2/H workpiece pallet mounting kit 2-40 1

240
2
Carrying plate 2-42

4
240
5
WT 2/H positioning bushing kit 2-46

7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

WT 2/H workpiece pallet kit

240
▶▶ Workpiece pallet kit without carrying plate for self-

assembly or for adaptation to specific customer
requirements
▶▶ For workpiece pallet dimensions
bWT x lWT = 400 x 400 mm up to 1200 x 1200 mm
▶▶ Material: PE (= polyethylene) wear pad
Accessories
▶▶ 2x WT 2/H (LE 2) positioning bushing kit, see p. 2-46
Positioning bushings are required when using a PE 2/H
positioning unit
Delivery notes
▶▶ Corner module ▶▶ Parts kit without carrying plate
▶▶ Glider with PE wear pads ▶▶ Not assembled

1
bWT (mm) Width of workpiece pallet 400; 480; 640; 800; 2
T
W
b
1040; 1200
d
lWT (mm) Length of workpiece pallet 400; 480; 640; 800;
3
1040; 1200
bWT x lWT Combination options 400 x 400; 480; 640;

IW
4
T
(mm x mm) 800;

480 x 480; 640; 800
640 x 640; 800; 1040; 5
1200;
800 x 800; 1040; 1200
lWT ≥ bWT 1040 x 1040; 1200 6
1200 x 1200
7
T
W
l
9
bW
T
WT 2/H
10
00012968
Technical data 11
Load 12
Max. total weight of workpiece pallet mG kg 240
13
Dimensions
Width of workpiece pallet Length of workpiece pallet Frame module weight 14
bWT lWT m
(mm) (mm) (kg)
15
400 400 1.7
400 480 1.9 16
400 640 2.4
400 800 2.8 17
480 480 2.2
480 640 2.6 18
480 800 3.1
640 640 3.0 19
640 800 3.5
640 1040 4.1 20
640 1200 4.6
800 800 4.0 21
800 1040 4.6
800 1200 5.0
22
1040 1040 5.2
1040 1200 5.7
23
1200 1200 6.1
24

Carrying plate
Carrying plate
240
▶▶ Aluminum carrying plates for high loads with large

workpiece pallets
▶▶ For workpiece pallet self-assembly for product support
or for adaptation to specific customer requirements
▶▶ Completely drilled and ready for assembly
▶▶ Universal aluminum carrying plate with two carrying
plate thicknesses:
d = 12.70 mm
d = 19.05 mm
▶▶ Can be combined with WT 2/H workpiece pallet kit

Carrying plate
1
Width of Length of Plate Flatness Plate Material Plate Flatness Plate Material
workpiece workpiece thickness mass number thickness mass number
pallet pallet dPl mPl dPl mPl 2
bWT lWT
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg) (mm) (mm) (kg)
3
400 400 12.7 0.4 5.2 3842548420
400 480 12.7 0.6 6.3 3842548421
4
400 640 12.7 0.8 8.5 3842548422
400 800 12.7 1.0 10.7 3842548440
5
480 480 12.7 0.6 7.6 3842548688
480 640 12.7 0.8 10.3 3842548689
6
480 800 12.7 1.0 12.9 3842548691
640 640 12.7 0.8 13.8 3842548690
7
640 800 12.7 1.0 17.3 3842548692
640 1040 12.7 1.2 22.5 3842548694
8
640 1200 12.7 1.2 26.0 3842548697
800 800 12.7 1.0 21.6 3842548693
800 1040 12.7 1.2 28.2 3842548695
9
800 1200 12.7 1.2 32.6 3842548698
1040 1040 12.7 1.2 36.7 3842548696 10
1040 1200 12.7 1.2 42.2 3842548699
1200 1200 12.7 1.2 49.0 3842548405 11
400 400 19.05 0.4 7.9 3842548424
400 480 19.05 0.6 9.5 3842548425 12
400 640 19.05 0.8 12.8 3842548426
400 800 19.05 1.0 16.1 3842548439 13
480 480 19.05 0.6 11.5 3842548407
480 640 19.05 0.8 15.4 3842548408 14
480 800 19.05 1.0 19.4 3842548410
640 640 19.05 0.8 20.7 3842548409 15
640 800 19.05 1.0 25.9 3842548411
640 1040 19.05 1.2 33.8 3842548413 16
640 1200 19.05 1.2 39.1 3842548416
800 800 19.05 1.0 32.5 3842548412 17
800 1040 19.05 1.2 42.3 3842548414
800 1200 19.05 1.2 48.9 3842548417 18
1040 1040 19.05 1.2 55.2 3842548415
1040 1200 19.05 1.2 63.7 3842548418 19
1200 1200 19.05 1.2 73.5 3842548419
20
21
22
23
24

Carrying plate
Dimensions
Aluminum carrying plate
x)
(4
b = bWT – 5,2
°
45
2x
a17
a16
a15
a14
M8 (26x – 40x)
a13
a12 M12
c
a9
b = bWT – 5,2
8,5
a7
a6
a5
M8 (4x)
d
Ø24 (4x)
a4
a3
a2
a1
0
0 12,7±0,15 19,05±0,15
b1 b3 b5 b7 b11 b13 b15 b17
b2 b4 b6 b14 b16
26848

Carrying plate
Width of Length of Di- Di- Di- Di- Di- Di- Di- Di- Di- Di- Di- Di- Di- Di- Di- 1
workpiece workpiece men- men- men- men- men- men- men- men- men- men- men- men- men- men- men-
pallet pallet sion sion sion sion sion sion sion sion sion sion sion sion sion sion sion
bWT lWT a1 a2 a3 a4 a5 a6 a7 a9 a12 a13 a14 a15 a16 a17 c 2
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
400 400 32.5 40.0 109.0 101.5 169.0 289.0 358.0 365.5 195.0 3
400 480 32.5 40.0 99.0 101.5 159.0 209.0 319.0 379.0 438.0 445.5 295.0
400 640 32.5 40.0 99.0 101.5 239.0 289.0 399.0 539.0 598.0 605.5 435.0
4
400 800 32.5 40.0 99.0 101.5 209.0 319.0 369.0 479.0 589.0 699.0 758.0 765.5 595.0
480 480 32.5 40.0 99.0 101.5 159.0 209.0 319.0 379.0 438.0 445.5 275.0
5
480 640 32.5 40.0 99.0 101.5 239.0 289.0 399.0 539.0 598.0 605.5 435.0
480 800 32.5 40.0 99.0 101.5 209.0 319.0 369.0 479.0 589.0 699.0 758.0 765.5 595.0
6
640 640 32.5 40.0 99.0 101.5 239.0 289.0 399.0 539.0 598.0 605.5 435.0
640 800 32.5 40.0 99.0 101.5 209.0 319.0 369.0 479.0 589.0 699.0 758.0 765.5 595.0
7
640 1040 32.5 40.0 99.0 101.5 269.0 439.0 489.0 599.0 769.0 939.0 998.0 1005.5 835.0
640 1200 32.5 40.0 99.0 101.5 239.0 379.0 519.0 569.0 679.0 819.0 959.0 1099.0 1158.0 1165.5 995.0
8
800 800 32.5 40.0 99.0 101.5 209.0 319.0 369.0 479.0 589.0 699.0 758.0 765.5 595.0
800 1040 32.5 40.0 99.0 101.5 269.0 439.0 489.0 599.0 769.0 939.0 998.0 1005.5 835.0
9
800 1200 32.5 40.0 99.0 101.5 239.0 379.0 519.0 569.0 679.0 819.0 859.0 1099.0 1158.0 1165.5 995.0
1040 1040 32.5 40.0 99.0 101.5 269.0 439.0 489.0 599.0 769.0 939.0 998.0 1005.5 835.0
10
1040 1200 32.5 40.0 99.0 101.5 239.0 379.0 519.0 569.0 679.0 819.0 859.0 1099.0 1158.0 1165.5 995.0
1200 1200 32.5 40.0 99.0 101.5 239.0 379.0 519.0 569.0 679.0 819.0 859.0 1099.0 1158.0 1165.5 995.0
11
Width of Length of Dimen- Dimen- Dimen- Dimen- Dimen- Dimen- Dimen- Dimen- Dimen- Dimen- Dimen- Dimen- Dimen- Dimen-
workpiece workpiece sion sion sion sion sion sion sion sion sion sion sion sion sion sion 12
pallet pallet b1 b2 b3 b4 b5 b6 b7 b11 b13 b14 b15 b16 b17 d
bWT lWT
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) 13
400 400 32.5 40.0 109.0 101.5 229.0 289.0 358.0 365.5 195.0
400 480 32.5 40.0 109.0 101.5 229.0 289.0 358.0 365.5 195.0 14
400 640 32.5 40.0 109.0 101.5 229.0 289.0 358.0 365.5 195.0
400 800 32.5 40.0 109.0 101.5 229.0 289.0 358.0 365.5 195.0 15
480 480 32.5 40.0 99.0 101.5 159.0 269.0 379.0 438.0 445.5 275.0
480 640 32.5 40.0 99.0 101.5 159.0 269.0 379.0 438.0 445.5 275.0 16
480 800 32.5 40.0 99.0 101.5 159.0 269.0 379.0 438.0 445.5 275.0
640 640 32.5 40.0 99.0 101.5 239.0 349.0 539.0 598.0 605.5 435.0 17
640 800 32.5 40.0 99.0 101.5 239.0 349.0 539.0 598.0 605.5 435.0
640 1040 32.5 40.0 99.0 101.5 239.0 349.0 539.0 598.0 605.5 435.0 18
640 1200 32.5 40.0 99.0 101.5 239.0 349.0 539.0 598.0 605.5 435.0
800 800 32.5 40.0 99.0 101.5 209.0 319.0 429.0 589.0 699.0 758.0 765.5 595.0 19
800 1040 32.5 40.0 99.0 101.5 209.0 319.0 429.0 589.0 699.0 758.0 765.5 595.0
800 1200 32.5 40.0 99.0 101.5 209.0 319.0 429.0 589.0 699.0 758.0 765.5 595.0 20
1040 1040 32.5 40.0 99.0 101.5 269.0 439.0 549.0 769.0 939.0 998.0 1005.5 835.0
1040 1200 32.5 40.0 99.0 101.5 269.0 439.0 549.0 769.0 939.0 998.0 1005.5 835.0 21
1200 1200 32.5 40.0 99.0 101.5 239.0 379.0 519.0 629.0 819.0 959.0 1099.0 1158.0 1165.5 995.0
22
23
24

WT 2/H positioning bushing kit
WT 2/H positioning bushing kit
▶▶ For defined pick-up of the workpiece pallet in

positioning units
▶▶ Can be combined with WT 2/H workpiece pallet
carrying plates
Accessories
▶▶ Positioning bushings are required when using a PE 2/H
positioning unit
WT 2/H positioning bushing kit 2 3842531354
Technical data
Features
Mass kg 0.6
29451

WT 2/F frame workpiece pallet
WT 2/F frame workpiece pallet 1

100
3
▶▶ Frame workpiece pallet, fully assembled or as a kit for
self-assembly
4
▶▶ Low weight and high stability thanks to aluminum frame
construction
5
▶▶ Especially suitable for low-cost transportation of large
products
6
▶▶ Continuous standard grooves to easily fasten cross
struts and workpiece supports
▶▶ Integrated positioning bushings 7
▶▶ Various wear pads for use on all conveyor media
▶▶ PA wear pads (LS = 0) for use on belts, toothed belts, 8
or flat top chains
▶▶ PE wear pads (LS = 1) for use on accumulation 9
roller chains
10
11
12
Delivery notes 13
▶▶ Frame modules ▶▶ Assembled (MT = 1) 14
▶▶ Connection elements ▶▶ Kit, not assembled (MT = 0)
▶▶ Positioning bushings 15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

bWT (mm) Width of 400; 480; 640; 800
workpiece pallet
lWT (mm) Length of 400; 480; 640; 800; 1040

workpiece pallet

lW T (mm x mm) options 480 x 480; 640; 800
640 x 640; 800; 1040; 1200;
800 x 800; 1040; 1200
1040 x 1040; 1200
1200 x 1200
MT Kit 0; 1
0 = not assembled
1 = assembled
b
WT
LS Wear pad 0; 1
0 = PA
1 = PE
00012893

Dimensions
1
bWT + 10 28 bWT – 53,5
bWT 10 bWT – 160 2
5
bWT – 115
lWT – 53,5
bWT – 36
lWT – 160
lWT + 10
lWT
6
8
57,5 57,5 70 bWT – 115
77,5 bWT – 36
9
12H7 10
00012904
00012904
No production drawing 11
Width of workpiece pallet Length of workpiece pallet Workpiece pallet mass 12

bWT lWT mWT
(mm) (mm) (kg)
13
400 400 6.6
400 480 7.1 14
400 640 8.9
400 800 10.8 15
480 480 7.7
480 640 9.4 16
480 800 11.4
640 640 11.2 17
640 800 12.5
640 1040 15.0 18
640 1200 16.8
800 800 13.9 19
800 1040 16.0
800 1200 18.4 20
1040 1040 19.1
1040 1200 20.7 21
1200 1200 22.2
22
23
24

WT 2/F-H frame workpiece pallet

240
▶▶ Frame workpiece pallet for especially high maximum

permitted total weight up to 240 kg (2 kg/cm length)
in combination with accumulation roller chain
conveyor medium
▶▶ Fully assembled or unassembled as a kit
▶▶ Low weights and high stability thanks to aluminum
frame construction
▶▶ Standard grooves to easily fasten cross struts and
workpiece supports
▶▶ For workpiece pallet dimensions
bWT x lWT = 400 x 400 mm up to 1200 x 1200 mm
▶▶ Material:
Frame module with PE (= polyethylene) wear pad
Pick-up and transportation of workpieces in the TS 2plus

transfer system.
Accessories
▶▶ 2x WT 2/F-H (LE 2) positioning bushing kits, see p. 2-53
Delivery notes
▶▶ Corner module ▶▶ Assembled (MT = 1)
▶▶ Wear pads ▶▶ Kit, not assembled (MT = 0)
▶▶ Frame modules
▶▶ Bracket caps

1
bWT (mm) Width of workpiece 400; 480; 640; 800; 1040;
T
2
W
b
pallet 1200
lWT (mm) Length of 400; 480; 640; 800; 1040; 3

workpiece pallet 1200
IW

T
4
(mm x mm) options 480 x 480; 640; 800
640 x 640; 800; 1040; 1200;
800 x 800; 1040; 1200 5
1040 x 1040; 1200
lWT ≥ bWT 1200 x 1200
6
MT Kit 0; 1
0 = not assembled
1 = assembled 7
T
W
l
9
bW
T
WT 2/F-H
10
00012970
Technical data 11
Load 12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Dimensions
(bWT – 53,5)
(bWT + 12) (bWT – 115)
bWT bWT – 160
l2
x)
(4
l1
°
,5
° ±0
90
(lWT – 205)
(60)
(lWT – 53,5)
(lWT – 115)
(lWT + 12)
lWT – 160
lWT
l3
A
l4
A
(80)
(7,5)
l5 (7.5) 17 (bWT – 205)
l6 (60) l7 (80) (12)
l8 70±0,4
28916
28916
Width of Length of Workpiece Dimen- Dimen- Dimen- Dimen- Dimen- Dimen- Dimen- Dimen-
workpiece workpiece pallet mass sion sion sion sion sion sion sion sion
pallet pallet mWT l1 l2 l3 l4 l5 l6 l7 l8
bWT lWT
(mm) (mm) (kg) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
400 400 7.3 60 140 120 200 60 140 120 200
400 480 8.2 100 180 160 240 60 140 120 200
400 640 10.1 180 260 240 320 60 140 120 200
400 800 11.9 260 340 320 400 60 140 120 200
480 480 9.1 100 180 160 240 100 180 160 240
480 640 11.0 180 260 240 320 100 180 160 240
480 800 12.8 260 340 320 400 100 180 160 240
640 640 12.8 180 260 240 320 180 260 240 320
640 800 14.7 260 340 320 400 180 260 240 320
640 1040 17.4 380 460 440 520 180 260 240 320
640 1200 19.3 460 540 520 600 180 260 240 320
800 800 16.5 260 340 320 400 260 340 320 400
800 1040 19.3 380 460 440 520 260 340 320 400
800 1200 21.1 460 540 520 600 260 340 320 400
1040 1040 22.0 380 460 440 520 380 460 440 520
1040 1200 23.9 460 540 520 600 380 460 440 520
1200 1200 25.7 460 540 520 600 460 540 520 600

WT 2/F-H positioning bushing kit
WT 2/F-H positioning bushing kit 1
3
▶▶ Positioning bushings are used for defined support of the
workpiece pallet in positioning units
4
▶▶ Can be combined with the WT 2/F-H frame module
5
Accessories 8
▶▶ Positioning bushings are required when using a PE 2/H 9
positioning unit
10
11
WT 2/F-H positioning bushing kit 2 3842530529
12
Technical data
Material number 3842530529 13
Features
Mass kg 1.3 14
15
16
17
18
29452 19
20
21
22
23
24


Longitudinal conveyor | TS 2plus 7.03-1

Longitudinal conveyor
1
Conveyor media selection 3-2 6
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

3-2 TS 2plus 7.0 | Longitudinal conveyor
Conveyor media selection
Belts, toothed belts, flat top chains, and accumulation Belts/toothed belts
roller chains are available conveyor belts for longitudinal
conveying. All toothed belts and the belt are suitable for use in EPAs
(ESD-protected areas). The belt has been designed for
loads of up to 250 kg and is pretensioned with a special
device and then bonded to form a continuous belt. It is
mainly used in systems with light conveying loads and
section lengths of over 2 m.
Belt sections with toothed belts are available for shorter
sections. The workpiece pallet is conveyed on the back
side, which has been reinforced with fabric. A change to
the conveying direction (reversible operation) is also
possible.
Flat top chain
Plastic flat top chains have wear-free polyamide caps on

each chain link which reduce friction and help the system
run more quietly. A marked cap is available for the chain
joint. A design that is also flexible on the side enables use
of the plastic flat top chain in curves. It is mainly used in
systems with medium conveying loads.
Accumulation roller chain
The roller elements of the accumulation roller chain allow

the chain to lightly roll underneath the workpiece pallet
when pallets accumulate. It is mainly used to convey heavy
loads in rough environments. Both types of chains are
closed using a master link to create an endless chain
(1 master link each in scope of delivery).


Belt and toothed belt conveyor medium 3-4 1
Flat top chain conveyor medium 3-50

4
Accumulation roller chain conveyor medium 3-120

7
Vplus accumulation roller chain conveyor medium Vplus 3-192

10
11
12
LG 2/H lift gate 3-226
13
14
15
Connection kits 3-236
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Belt and toothed belt conveyor medium
The belt and toothed belt conveyor media are suitable for
conveying small and medium-sized workpiece pallets in
clean, dry environments. The high flexibility and flat design
of the conveyor media allow for narrow conveyor trenches
between section profiles.
Whereas the belt is an especially economical conveyor
medium, primarily utilized on longer section segments, the
toothed belt is suitable for shorter section segments and/or
driving neighboring modules without their own drives.
The conveyor media, or the modules equipped with these

media, are used for assembly of lightweight products, e.g.,
electrical household appliances. Features such as a low risk
of drawing-in and low profile construction height, as well as
quiet operation, facilitate use at manual assembly stations.
A surface load of up to 1 kg/cm is permissible on
workpiece pallets with PA wear pads.


BS 2 belt sections 3-6 1
Parts for AS 2, UM 2, ST 2 3-16

4
conveyor units

7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

BS 2 belt section
BS 2 belt section
60 kg
▶▶ Ready for operation conveyor section with own drive

▶▶ Accumulation operation possible
▶▶ Conveyor medium: Toothed belt (suitable for use in
an EPA)
▶▶ Reversible operation possible
▶▶ Right, left or central motor mounting
(central from track width of 240 mm)
▶▶ Motor connection: optionally with cable/plug or
terminal box
▶▶ Special models on request
The belt section is a ready for operation conveyor section of the workpiece pallet between parallel conveyor sections
with own drive for the transportation of workpiece pallets in connection with two HQ 2 lift transverse units.
in the longitudinal direction or for the transverse conveying
Accessories
▶▶ Connection kit, see page 3-236
▶▶ SZ 2 leg sets, see page 6-2
Delivery notes
Condition on delivery
▶▶ Fully assembled

BS 2 belt section
1
b (mm) Track width in direction 160; 240; 320; 400; 480; 2
of transport 640; 800; 1040; 1200
160 ... 12001) 3

b
l (mm) Length 240 ... 60002)
vN (m/min) Nominal speed 03; 6; 9; 12; 15; 18
4
U (V) Voltage See motor data, p. 11-24ff
f (Hz) Frequency See motor data, p. 11-24ff
5
AT Motor connection S; K
S = cable/plug
K = terminal box 6
l
MA Motor mounting R; L; M4)
R = right 7
L = left
M = center
8
1)
Individual width variants available
2)
l is rounded in accordance with the toothed belt pitch 9
3)
vN = 0: without motor or gear
4)
When MA = M and b = 160 mm, the max. section load is only 30 kg 10
21630
Technical data 11
Load 12
Max. section load in accumulation kg 60 5
operation 13
Features
ESD Yes 14
Material specification Section profile: Aluminum,
natural; anodized
15
Guide profile: polyamide
Glide profile: polyamide
16
Dimensions
Length l mm 240 ... 6000 17
5)
When MA = M and b = 160 mm, the max. section load is only 30 kg
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

BS 2 belt section
Dimensions
l b
30 130
A
7
102
95
A
15
352,5
A–A
b
40
87
80
b – 75 200 Ø136
b + 15
237
(MA = L)
134
MA = M
b – 100
b + 40
b + 15
(MA = R)
00012812

BS 2/M belt section
BS 2/M belt section 1

60 kg
2
3
▶▶ Functional operation conveyor complete with drive
4
an EPA)
5
6
terminal box 7
8
10
11
12
The belt section is a conveyor section that is ready for in which the motor cannot be fitted to the end of the 13
operation with own drive for the transportation of belt section.
workpiece pallets. It is suitable for all installation situations 14
Accessories 15
▶▶ Connection kit, see page 3-236 16
▶▶ SZ 2/... leg sets, see page 6-2
17
Delivery notes
Condition on delivery 18
19
20
21
22
23
24

BS 2/M belt section
b (mm) Track width in direction 160; 240; 320; 400; 480;
of transport 640; 800; 1040; 1200
160 ... 12001

l (mm) Length 310 ... 60002
l1 (mm) Length 90 ... 5770
l vN (m/min) Nominal speed 03; 6; 9; 12; 15; 18
l1 f (Hz) Frequency See motor data, p. 11-24ff
S = cable/plug
K = terminal box
b
R = right
L = left
M = center
1)
2)
l – l 1 > 222 mm l is rounded in accordance with the toothed belt pitch
l – l1 > 222 mm
00012190 3)
4)
Technical data
Load
Max. section load in accumulation kg 605
operation
Features
ESD Yes
natural; anodized
Guide profile: Polyamide
Glide profile: Polyamide
Dimensions
Length l mm 310 ... 6000
5

BS 2/M belt section
Dimensions
1
2
l
130 l1 b 3
30 A 30
7
4
95
102
5
3842525110
6
15
352,5
A
7
A–A
b
8
40
87
9
80
200 Ø136
b – 75
b + 15
10
237
11
(MA = L)
134
12
13
MA = M 14
b – 100
b + 15
b – 75
b + 40
b – 75
15
16
17
(MA = R)
18
00012813
19
00012813
20
21
22
23
24

Transmission drive
Transmission drive 60 kg
▶▶ Timing belt side drive for gear motors that must be

constructed set lower so that they can be driven over
▶▶ Suitable for flange mounted gears, flange diameter
120 mm (B5 version with worm gear) and hollow shaft,
diameter 20 mm
▶▶ Designed for Spiroplan SEW, WAF20, WAF30 or WAF37
right-angle gear motors and SAF37 worm gear motors
▶▶ Suitable for mounting to BS 2 and BS 2/M belt sections
▶▶ Maximum transferable torque (on the gear output):
mmax = 12 Nm
▶▶ Only suspended mounting of the gear motor is
permitted
For mounting larger third-party motors for the transmission

of higher drive torques (maximum section loads of the belt
section must not be exceeded).
Accessories
▶▶ BS 2 (see p. 3-6) or BS 2/M (see p. 3-9) belt section
▶▶ Gear motor
▶▶ Torque support (to be supplied by the operator)
Delivery notes
▶▶ Unassembled in parts
▶▶ Bearing already press-fitted
▶▶ Including adapter set and additional hexagonal shaft

Transmission drive
1
10
30042

11
Transmission drive 3842542550

12
Technical data
Load
Maximum transferable torque Nm 12 14
Features
ESD Yes 15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Transmission drive
Dimensions
95 106
36,5
187,5
291
ø20g6
124 76
00139059


10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Conveyor units
Parts for belt conveyor medium
UM 2/B
3842539479
3842528746
ST 2/B
ST 2/B-100
AS 2/B-150
AS 2/B-250
A conveyor unit is a complete unit used for linear conveying The UM 2/B and AS 2/B may be set up right next to each
of workpiece pallets. It consists of: other, which allows for conveyor unit combinations.
▶▶ AS 2/B‑… drive module, see p. 3-18
▶▶ UM 2/B return unit, see p. 3-24 The drive module is designed for section loads up to mG =
▶▶ ST 2/… section, see p. 3-28 150 kg or up to mG = 250 kg per conveyor unit.
▶▶ SZ 2/… leg sets, see page 6-2


AS 2/B drive module 3-18 1
150 kg 250 kg
2
UM 2/B return unit 3-24 4
ST 2/B section, components 3-28

7
Belt conveyor medium, accessories 3-45

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

AS 2/B-150 drive module

150 kg
▶▶ Conveyor medium: Belt (suitable for use in an EPA)

terminal box
The AS 2/B-... drive module drives the conveyor medium return unit and conveyor belt or serves as a transverse
belt in self-built conveyor section elements with section, section.
Accessories
▶▶ RB 2 roller track (3842532822, see p. 3-27) with
adjacent longitudinal sections and workpiece pallet
lengths of < 320 mm
▶▶ RB 2/UM 2 roller track set (3842558657 see p. 5-88) for
use in transverse sections with adjacent longitudinal
sections
Delivery notes
▶▶ AS 2/B-150 drive module ▶▶ Fully assembled
▶▶ Includes fastening material to mount on the ST 2
conveyor section, as well as to mount on an adjacent
return unit.

1
Material number 3842999083 3842999190
b (mm) Track width in 160; 240; 320; 400; 480; 640; 2
direction of transport 800; 1040; 1200
160 … 12001 3
4
3842999190 f (Hz) Frequency See motor data, p. 11-24ff
AS 2/B-150 b
MA = R AT Motor connection S; K
5
S = cable/plug
K = terminal box
6
MA Motor mounting R4); L4); M
R = right
L = left 7
M = center
1)
8
2)
3842999083
AS 2/B-150
3)
Not possible at f = 60 Hz 9
4)
MA = M The following applies to 3842999190: MA = R; L
10
30045
Technical data 11
Material number 3842999083 3842999190
Motor mounting MA = M MA = R, L 12
Load
Max. section load in accumulation kg 150 150 13
operation
Features 14
ESD Yes Yes
Additional information 15
Required conveyor lAS mm 660 660
medium length*
16
*
Formula for calculating the conveyor medium, see p. 3-46
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Dimensions
372,5
360
280 b
70
7
50
208
201
418,8
Ø152
216
372,5
360
280
133
(MA = L)
b + 38
3842999083
b
(MA = M)
157,5
MA = R
(3842999190)
356,8 70
00013251

AS 2/B-250 drive module 1

250 kg
2
3
4
terminal box
5
10
11
12
The AS 2/B-... drive module drives the conveyor medium return unit and conveyor belt or serves as a transverse 13
belt in self-built conveyor section elements with section, section.
14
Accessories
Required accessories 15
▶▶ RB 2 roller track (3842532822, see p. 3-27) with
adjacent longitudinal sections and workpiece pallet 16
lengths of < 320 mm
▶▶ RB 2/UM 2 roller track set (3842558657 see p. 5-88) for 17
use in transverse sections with adjacent longitudinal
sections 18
Delivery notes
19
▶▶ AS 2/B-250 drive module ▶▶ Fully assembled
20
▶▶ Includes fastening material to mount on the ST 2
21
return unit.
22
23
24

Material number 3842999720 3842999721
b (mm) Track width in 160; 2401); 320; 400; 480; 640;
direction of transport 800; 1040; 1200
240 … 12002)
3842999721 f (Hz) Frequency See motor data, p. 11-24ff
AS 2/B-250
MA = R b
S = cable/plug
K = terminal box
MA Motor mounting R4); L4); M1)

R = right
L = left
M = center
1)
The following applies to 3842999720: MA = M and b ≥
240 mm
2)
3842999720 3)
AS 2/B-250 4)
The following applies to 3842999721: MA = R; L
MA = M
26852
Technical data
Material number 3842999720 3842999721
Motor mounting MA = M MA = R, L
for b ≥ 240 mm
Load
operation
Features
ESD Yes Yes
Required conveyor lAS mm 660 660
medium length*
*

Dimensions
1
372,5
360 2
280 b
70 3
7
4
50
201
208
5
502
7
9
Ø152
10
372,5
360 11
280
78 12
(MA = L) 13
14
15
b + 38
3842999720
(MA = M) 16
b
17
18
181
MA = R
(3842999721)
19
440 70
00013252
20
21
22
23
24

UM 2/B return unit
UM 2/B return unit

▶▶ For use in conjunction with all AS 2/B drive modules
▶▶ Max. permissible section load up to 250 kg in
accumulation operation per conveyor unit
The return unit is used for constructing conveyor units. It

guides the conveyor medium at the end of the conveyor unit
back to the drive module.
Delivery notes
▶▶ Incl. all fastening material to mount on ST 2 conveyor ▶▶ Fully assembled
section

UM 2/B return unit
1
b (mm) Track width in direction 160; 240; 320; 400; 480: 2
b
of transport 640; 800; 1040; 1200
160 … 12001 3
1
10
00012915
Technical data 11
Features 12
ESD Yes
Required conveyor lUM mm 660
medium length* 14
*
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

UM 2/B return unit
Dimensions
360 b
70
12,6
156,4
169
b + 38
280
372,5
00013253
00013253

RB 2 roller track
RB 2 roller track 1
3
▶▶ It is used to support the workpiece pallets at the
transition point between a conveyor unit and another
4
adjacent conveyor unit. Necessary for workpiece pallets
with lWT < 320 mm.
5
▶▶ Universal design
10
11
12
Delivery notes 13
▶▶ Incl. fastening material ▶▶ Fully assembled 14
RB 2 roller track 2 3842532822 16
Technical data 17
Features 18
ESD Yes
Material specification Roller carrier: Aluminum 19
Rollers: Steel; hardened
20
21
22
23
24

ST 2/B section, ST 2/B-100 section
▶▶ For conveyor unit self-assembly

ST 2/B
▶▶ Easy insertion of the guide profile into the section
profile
▶▶ Easily replaceable when worn out
00012914
ST 2/B-100
23745
The section is used for self-construction of conveyor units

in conjunction with the AS 2/B drive module and the UM
2/B return unit.
Accessories
▶▶ Profile connector, see p. 3-40
▶▶ Cross connector, see p. 3-41
Delivery notes
▶▶ ST 2/B: 2x SP 2/B section profile, ▶▶ Not assembled
2x FP 2/B guide profile
▶▶ ST 2/B-100: 2x SP 2/B-100 section profile, 2x FP 2/B
guide profile

1
ST 2/B section
ST 2/B
l (mm) Length 60 … 6000
h (mm) Height to conveying level 80 3
7
l
9
80
23748
10
ST 2/B-100 section 11
ST 2/B-100
l (mm) Length 60 … 6000
h (mm) Height to conveying level 100
13
14
15
16
17
l
18
100
19
00012913
20
Technical data
21
Material number 3842992650 3842994927
Product designation ST 2/B section ST 2/B-100 section
22
Features
ESD Yes Yes
Material specification Section profile: Aluminum; anodized Section profile: Aluminum; anodized 23
Guide profile: polyamide Guide profile: polyamide
Dimensions 24
Length l mm 60 … 6000 60 … 6000
Height to conveying level h mm 80 100
Dimensions
ST 2/B
b
40
87
80
45 b – 75
b + 15
00126842
ST 2/B-100
00126824
b
40
10
20
100
107
45 b – 75
b + 15
00126840
00126840

SP 2/B section profile
SP 2/B section profile 10 1
3
▶▶ Used for self-construction of low-profile conveyor units
and the conveyor media belt
4
▶▶ For use in conjunction with all AS 2/B drive modules,
UM 2/B return units and FP 2/B guide profiles
5
▶▶ Longitudinal grooves for easy mounting
▶▶ ST 2/B to be used in sections
6
10
11
12
Product designation l (mm) Delivery unit Material number
SP 2/B 16 x 6070 mm 6070 16 3842532695 14
section profile
SP 2/B section profile 60 … 6000 3842992884 15
Technical data 16
Material number 3842532695 3842992884
Load 17
Moment of inertia lx cm4 49.6 49.6
ly cm4 25.8 25.8 18
Moment of resistance Wx cm3 12.1 12.1
Wy cm3 11.5 11.5 19
Features
Material specification Aluminum, natural; anodized Aluminum, natural; anodized 20
Mass m kg/m 2.8 2.8
Dimensions 21
Length l mm 6070
Length l mm 60 … 6000 22
Profile surface A cm2 10.4 10.4
23
24

SP 2/B section profile
Dimensions
45
39
25
Ø5,5
35
20
10
75
28
18
10
20
00013214
00013214

SP 2/B-50 section profile
SP 2/B-50 section profile 8 10 1
3
4
5
▶▶ Suitable for installation at manual workplaces
6
10
11
12
Product designation l (mm) l (mm) Delivery unit Material number
SP 2/B-50 20 x 6070 mm 6070 20 3842532697 14
section profile
SP 2/B-50 section profile 60 … 6000 3842992903 15
Technical data 16
Material number 3842532697 3842992903
Load 17
ly cm4 16.9 16.9 18
Wy cm3 7.5 7.5 19
Features
Mass m kg/m 1.9 1.9
Dimensions 21
Length l mm 6070
Length l mm 60 … 6000 22
23
24

Dimensions
45
38
25
35
50
10
20
8
16,5
00013213
00013213

SP 2/BH section profile
SP 2/BH section profile 10 1
3
4
5
▶▶ In tough design
6
10
11
12
SP 2/BH 16 x 6070 mm 6070 16 3842532696 14
section profile
SP 2/BH section profile 60 … 6000 3842990409 15
Technical data 16
Material number 3842532696 3842990409
Load 17
ly cm4 28.6 28.6 18
Wy cm3 13.8 13.8 19
Features
Mass m kg/m 3.3 3.3
Dimensions 21
Length l mm 6070
Length l mm 60 … 6000 22
23
24

SP 2/BH section profile
Dimensions
45
36
25
35
20
75
10
10
20
00013215
00013215

SP 2/B-100 section profile 10 1
3
▶▶ Used for self-construction of conveyor units with a
height of 100 mm and the conveyor medium belt
4
5
▶▶ For use in assembly systems with mixed conveyor media,
6
e.g., belt and flat top chain
10
11
12
SP 2/B-100 16 x 6070 mm 6070 16 3842532608 14
section profile
SP 2/B-100 section profile 60 … 6000 3842993259 15
Technical data 16
Material number 3842532608 3842993259
Load 17
ly cm4 30.4 30.4 18
Wy cm3 13.5 13.5 19
Features
Mass m kg/m 3.2 3.2
Dimensions 21
Length l mm 6070
Length l mm 60 … 6000 22
23
24

Dimensions
45
39
25
35
10
95
10
00013216
20

FP 2/B guide profile
FP 2/B guide profile 1
3
▶▶ For belt guide
▶▶ For clipping onto the SP 2/B section profiles
4

9
FP 2/B guide profile 6000 16 3842532675
Technical data 10

Features
11
ESD Yes
Material specification Plastic, PA (suitable for use in an 12
EPA)
Dimensions 13
Length l mm 6000
14
Dimensions
15
42
16
31
4,5
17
7
12
18
00117806
19
20
21
22
23
24

Profile connector
Profile connector
▶▶ For the end-to-end connecting of two profiles SP 2/...

Two profile connectors are required for each profile joint
UM 2/B return units and SP 2/B section profiles
Delivery notes
Scope of delivery
▶▶ Profile connector, screws
Profile connector 3842528746
Technical data
Features
Material specification Steel; galvanized
Dimensions
0
18
00013291
00013291

QV 2 cross connector
QV 2 cross connector 1
3
▶▶ For connecting section profiles and defining the
4
track width
▶▶ Can be combined with all SP 2 section profiles
5
10
11
12
Formula for calculating the number of cross connectors 13

needed
14
AQV = (l/2000 mm) + 1

15
AQV = Number of cross connectors 16

I = section length
17
Delivery notes
Scope of delivery 18
▶▶ 45x60 strut profile, finished
▶▶ 2x fastening material to mount on an ST 2 section 19
20
21
22
23
24

b (mm) Track width in direction 160; 240; 320; 400; 480:
of transport 640; 800; 1040; 1200
160 … 12001
1
0
00
≤2
b
l
00013202
Technical data
Features
Material specification Aluminum, natural; anodized
Dimensions
b
–
7
5
00013292

Scraper
Scraper 1
3
▶▶ To scrape small parts from the conveyor medium
▶▶ For use with workpiece pallets with a minimum weight
4
of 3 kg
▶▶ Conveyor media: Belt, toothed belt and flat top chain
5
▶▶ May be mounted on the right side (R) or left side (L)
▶▶ Reversible operation is not possible on sections with
6
scrapers
10
11
12
Delivery notes 13
Scope of delivery
▶▶ 1x scraper, right or left, including fastening material 14
Scraper, right 3842532679 16
Scraper, left 3842532680
17
18
19
20
R
21
00013293
22
23
24

Scraper
Dimensions
66,7
39,6
35
50 47,6
10
41
12
27
27630

GT 2 belt
GT 2 belt 1
10
11
12
The belt used as a conveyor medium transports the continuous belt. A belt assembly tool kit is used for 13
workpiece pallets into the transfer system. The belts are jointing, tensioning and bonding.
pretensioned during installation and bonded to form a 14
Accessories 15
▶▶ Belt mounting tool kit, see p. 3-48 16
▶▶ Glue, see p. 3-47
17
Product designation l (m) l (m) Material number 18
GT 2 belt 250 3842539479
GT 2 belt 1 … 2501 3842992811 19
1
Order and delivery are only possible up to the next full meter
20
Technical data
Material number 3842539479 3842992811 21
Features
ESD Yes Yes 22
Material specification Polyamide (PA) Polyamide (PA)
Dimensions
23
Length l m 250
Length l m 1 … 250
24

GT 2 belt
Dimensions
1,8±0,1
30
26850
Calculating the required length of the conveyor medium
lUM lAS
lS
UM 2 AS 2
00126838
The required belt length is determined using the following Pretensioning factor F for belt
formula. With BS 2, when lS ≤ 4000 mm, F = 0.98
00126838
Note: A pretensioning factor F is required for the belt, see With BS 2, when lS > 4000 mm, F = 0.975
the "Pretensioning factor F for belts" overview. With AS 2/B-250, F = 0.965
Length of the conveyor medium for belt

lB = ((2 x lS + lAS + lUM) x F) + 60
lUM = 660 mm
lAS = 660 mm
lB = Length of belt
Belt expansion
lS = Length of section
at lS ≤ 4000 mm, = 2%
lAS = Length of the conveyor medium at the drive module
at lS > 4000 mm = 2.5%
lUM = Length of the conveyor medium at the return unit
at AS 2/B-250, = 3,5%
F = pretensioning factor

Glue
Glue 1
3
▶▶ Used for bonding belts
▶▶ For use in connection with the belt assembly tool kit
4
▶▶ For industrial use only
▶▶ Follow the safety instructions
5
10
11
12
Glue, 50 ml 3842315106 14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Belt assembly tool
Belt assembly tool
▶▶ Skiving device for reducing belts at connection points

▶▶ Heat press to glue the belt ends thermally
▶▶ Belt pretensioning device
The belt assembly tool is used to join the ends of belts for
section lengths l > 2000 mm.
Accessories
Required accessories Recommended accessories
▶▶ Glue, see p. 3-47 ▶▶ Second heating press for the simultaneous bonding of
adjacent belts
Delivery notes
Scope of delivery
▶▶ Skiving device
▶▶ Heating press
▶▶ Pretensioning device
▶▶ Abrasive belt
▶▶ Brush
Heating press, single 3842315101
Belt mounting tool kit 3842532810


10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Flat top chain conveyor medium
The flat top chain conveys primarily medium and large-sized

workpiece pallets in environments with low to moderate
production emissions.
The arcing capacity of the plastic flat top chain permits
continuous drive combinations with curve arcs
(see p. 4-32).
PA wear pads on the workpiece pallets are recommended
in the combination with the plastic flat top chain. This
permits in the standard design with plastic glide profiles in
the section profile surface loads of up to 1 kg/cm, whereas
the optionally available version with steel glide profiles can
tolerate surface loads of up to 1.5 kg/cm.
A particularly robust combination can be created from the

HD profiles in combination with steel glide profiles and
steel guide profile.
Reversible operation is not permitted with the flat top chain

conveyor medium.
If flat top chains are used, the LU2 automatic lubrication

unit is highly recommended.


Single-track CS/C section, BS 2/C belt sections 3-52 1
100 kg 250 kg
2
400 kg 3
Parts for AS 2/..., UM 2/..., ST 2... 3-66

4
conveyor units

7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Single-track CS/C section

100 kg

terminal box
▶▶ Motor mounting right or left
▶▶ Conveyor medium: plastic flat top chain (with KA = A
suitable for use in an EPA)
▶▶ Reversible operation is possible for l ≤ 2000 mm and
environments without small parts
The single-track CS/C section is a conveyor section that is small parts for mounting and assembly workstations.
ready for operation with own drive for the transportation of
Accessories
▶▶ Connection kits, see page 3-236
▶▶ LU 2 automatic lubrication unit, see p. 3-84
Delivery notes

1
b (mm) Track width in direction 42; 52; 62; 72 2
of transport
l (mm) Length 350 ... 6000 3

4
l
5
S = cable/plug
l K = terminal box
6
00125193.eps
b
MA Motor mounting R; L
R = right
L = left 7
KA Chain version N; A
Chain in standard version 8
(KA = N)
Chain suitable for use in
9
an EPA (KA = A)
10
00125193
Technical data 11
Load 12
Max. section load in at l = 2001 ... 6000 mm at l = 350 ... 2000 mm
accumulation operation kg 100 70 13
Features
ESD yes, with KA = A* 14
Max. operating T °C +40
temperature 15
Dimensions
Length l mm 350 ... 6000 16
*
Chain suitable for use in an EPA (KA = A)
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Dimensions
CS/C ≤ 2000 mm
100
246
211,3
200
170 112
l
70
121
45
233,7
Ø136
38,5 293,5
25947
CS/C > 2000 mm 25947

100
211,3
200
293
261
170 60
l
70
121
62
233,7
Ø136
38,5 293,5
25948
25948

BS 2/C-100 belt section
BS 2/C-100 belt section 1

100 kg
2
3
▶▶ Longitudinal conveying of the workpiece pallet on
4
conveyor sections of up to 6000 mm
▶▶ Transverse conveyor between parallel conveyor sections
5
6
▶▶ Motor connection: optionally with cable/plug or terminal 7
box
▶▶ Special models on request 8
▶▶ Reversible operation not permitted
▶▶ Use with medium accumulation loads 9
▶▶ The LU 2 automatic lubrication unit is highly
recommended 10
11
12
The belt section is a ready for operation conveyor section of the workpiece pallet between parallel conveyor sections 13
in the longitudinal direction or for the transverse conveying 14
Accessories 15
▶▶ Connection kits, see page 3-236 16
▶▶ LU 2 automatic lubrication unit, see p. 3-84 17
Delivery notes 18
▶▶ Fully assembled 19
20
21
22
23
24

of transport 640; 800; 1040; 1200
160 ... 12001

b l (mm) Length 300 ... 6000
l
S = cable/plug
K = terminal box
MA Motor mounting R; L; M3
R = right
L = left
M = center
Chain in standard
version (KA = N)
Chain suitable for use in
00013196 an EPA (KA = A)
1)
2)
3)
MA = M only for b ≥ 240 mm
Technical data
Load
operation
Features
ESD yes, with KA = A*
natural; anodized
Glide profile: Polyamide
Max. operating temperature T °C +40

Dimensions
Length l mm 300 ... 6000
*) Chain suitable for use in an EPA (KA = A)

Dimensions
1
l b 2
60 170
3
7
107
100
160
234,3
6
Ø136 7
200
293,5 39,5 8
A–A b
9
138,5
114,5
MA = L
40
106,5
100
10
11
b – 75
b – 100
b + 15
b + 40
b – 75
b + 15
12
b
13
14
(MA = R)
15
70
MA = M
16
17
110,5
b – 100
b + 40
18
b
19
30123
20
21
22
23
24


250 kg

conveyor sections of up to 6000 mm
▶▶ Transverse conveying between parallel conveyor
sections in conjunction with lift transverse units
terminal box
▶▶ Use with medium accumulation loads
recommended
The belt section is a ready for operation conveyor section of the workpiece pallet between parallel conveyor sections
in the longitudinal direction or for the transverse conveying
Accessories
Delivery notes

1
of transport 640; 800; 1040; 1200
l (mm) Length 300 ... 6000 3

b
l
4
5
S = cable/plug
K = terminal box
6
MA Motor mounting2 R; L
R = right
L = left 7
Chain in standard 8
version (KA = N)
Chain suitable for use
9
in an EPA (KA = A)
1)
10
30046
2)
Geometry does not permit MA = M
11
Technical data
Load
operation
Features 14
Material specification Section profile: Aluminum, 15
natural; anodized
Glide profile: Polyamide 16
Max. operating temperature T °C +40 17

Dimensions
Length l mm 300 ... 6000
18
*
19
20
21
22
23
24

Dimensions
I b
60 170
A
107
A
160
A–A b
310
40
106,5
100
b – 75 Ø142,1
b + 15 215
(MA = L)
149,6
b + 40
b + 30
b
b + 181,5
61,7
70
78,5
Ø142,1
63
60
MA = R
430
00013210a

BS 2/C-H belt section
BS 2/C-H belt section 1

400 kg
2
3
▶▶ Sturdy design for especially heavy-duty systems
4
conveyor sections of 6000 mm
5
▶▶ Transverse conveying between parallel conveyor
sections in conjunction with lift transverse units
6
▶▶ Motor mounting right, left or central 7
terminal box 8
▶▶ Stainless steel workpiece pallet lateral guide 9
▶▶ Profile width: 50 mm 10
▶▶ Use with high accumulation loads
▶▶ The LU 2 automatic lubrication unit is highly 11
recommended
12
The belt section is a ready for operation conveyor section of the workpiece pallet between parallel conveyor sections 13
in the longitudinal direction or for the transverse conveying 14
Accessories 15
▶▶ Connection kits, see page 3-236 16
▶▶ SZ 2/...-H leg sets, see p. 6-2
Delivery notes 18
20
21
22
23
24

b (mm) Track width in direction 400 ... 1200
of transport
l (mm) Length 650 ... 6000

vN (m/min) Nominal speed 01); 6; 9; 12; 15; 182)
b U (V) Voltage See motor data, p. 11-24ff
l
S = cable/plug
K = terminal box
MA Motor mounting R; L; M
R = right
L = left
M = center
Chain in standard
version (KA = N)
Chain suitable for use
in an EPA (KA = A)
00125191
GP Glide profile 0; 1
Corrosion-resistant
steel (GP = 1)
Plastic (GP = 0)
1)
2)
Not possible if f = 60 Hz
Technical data
Load
operation
Features
natural; anodized
Lateral guide: Stainless
steel glide profile:
Steel/plastic; corrosion-
resistant
Dimensions
Length l mm 650 ... 6000
*

Dimensions
1
2
I
170 A 280
3
7
4
107
240
A
5
A–A b 7
8
40
107
100
b – 75
b + 25
(MA = L) 10
11
12
13
(MA = M)
b + 40
14
b
b + 182
15
16
70
17
105
Ø 155,6
18
70
MA = R
430
19
30041 20
21
22
23
24

BS 2/C+R connection belt
▶▶ Conveyor medium: Toothed belt (suitable for use in an

EPA)
The head-to-head connection of the drive and return heads used to bridge these > 180 mm conveyor trenches by using
results in short, non-driven sections. The connection belt is short IWT < 320 mm workpiece pallets.
Delivery notes
Connection belt, left 3842528480
Connection belt, right 3842539096
Technical data
Material number 3842528480 3842539096
Features
ESD Yes Yes

Dimensions
1
2
0,6
4
40,6
7
27
120 70
9
10
11
12
60 13
14
15
16
ca. 70
14
17
42,5
25
18
19
27631
20
21
22
23
24

Conveyor units
Parts for flat top chain conveyor medium
UM 2/C-60
AS 2/C-100
3842551226
AS 2/C-250
3842551227 UM 2/C-170
3842528746
ST 2/C-100
ST 2/C-H
AS 2/C-400
AS 2/C-700
SZ 2
A conveyor unit is a complete unit used for linear conveying The UM 2/C and AS 2/C-... may be set up right next to each
▶▶ AS 2/C drive module, see p. 3-68
▶▶ UM 2/C return unit, see p. 3-80 Drive modules for loads up to mG = 100 kg; 250 kg; 400 kg;
▶▶ ST 2/… section, see p. 3-86 or up to mG = 700 kg per conveyor unit.
▶▶ SZ 2/... leg sets, see p. 6-2
▶▶ QV 2 cross connector, see p. 3-108
▶▶ Flat top chain, see p. 3-116


AS 2/C drive module 3-68 1
100 kg 250 kg
2
400 kg 700 kg 3
UM 2/C return unit 3-80

4
ST 2/C section, components 3-86

7
Flat top chain conveyor medium 3-116

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

AS 2/C-100 drive module

100 kg
▶▶ Drive for conveyor unit self-assembly

▶▶ Conveyor medium: flat top chain (with KA = A suitable
for use in an EPA)
terminal box
recommended
The AS 2/C-... drive module drives the flat top chain with section, return unit and flat top chain.
conveyor medium in self-built conveyor section elements
Accessories
Delivery notes
▶▶ Includes fastening material to mount on the ST 2 ▶▶ Fully assembled
return unit.

1
of transport 640; 800; 1040; 1200
160 … 12001 3
AS 2/C-100
MA = R vN (m/min) Nominal speed 02; 6; 9; 12; 15; 18
4
5
S = cable/plug
K = terminal box
6
b

R = right
L = left 7
M = center
1)
8
2)
3)
MA = M only when b ≥ 240 mm 9
00012872
10
Technical data 11
Load 12
operation 13
Features
Required conveyor media length** lAS mm 475 15
*
Chain suitable for use in an EPA (KA = A) 16
**
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Dimensions
170 b
7
107
100
160
234,3
Ø136
200
293,5 39,5
MA = L
138,5
114,5
110,5
(MA = M)
b – 100
b + 40
b
(MA = R)
70
00013212

AS 2/C-250 drive module 1

250 kg
2
3
4
for use in an EPA)
5
terminal box
6
▶▶ Use with medium accumulation loads 7
recommended 8
10
11
12
The AS 2/C-... drive module drives the flat top chain with section, return unit and flat top chain. 13
14
Accessories
Recommended accessories 15
Delivery notes 17
▶▶ Includes fastening material to mount on the ST 2 ▶▶ Fully assembled 18
return unit. 19
20
21
22
23
24

of transport 640; 800; 1040; 1200
AS 2/C-250 160 … 12001

MA = R vN (m/min) Nominal speed 02; 6; 9; 12; 15; 18
S = cable/plug
K = terminal box
b
R = right
L = left
1)
2)
26855
Technical data
Load
operation
Features
Required conveyor media length** lAS mm 475
*
**

Dimensions
1
170 b
7
2
107
3
100
4
160
5
281,3
6
Ø142,1 8
223,5
(MA = L)
10
149,6
11
12
13
b + 40
b
14
b + 181,5
15
MA = R
70
16
78,5
17
Ø142,1
18
63
60
430 19
00013275
20
21
22
23
24


400 kg

for use in an EPA)
terminal box
recommended
The AS 2/C-... drive module drives the flat top chain with section, return unit and flat top chain.
Accessories
Delivery notes
section

1
of transport 640; 800; 1040; 1200
160 … 12001 3
AS 2/C-400
MA=R 4
5
S = cable/plug
K = terminal box
6
b
R = right
L = left 7
M = center
1)
8
2)
3)
Not possible if f = 60 Hz 9
4)
MA = M only when b ≥ 240 mm
10
00012873
Technical data 11
Load 12
operation 13
Features
Required conveyor medium lAS mm 625 15
length**
*
Chain suitable for use in an EPA (KA = A) 16
**
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Dimensions
375 b
360
280
7
40
247
240
196
Ø155,6
215
153
(MA = L)
70
b + 40
b
(MA = M)
b + 181,5
70
MA = R
78,5
Ø155,6
63
60
430
30299

AS 2/C-700 drive module 1

700 kg
2
3
4
for use in an EPA)
5
6
terminal box
▶▶ Reversible operation not permitted 7
▶▶ Use with high accumulation loads
recommended
9
10
11
12
The AS 2/C-... drive module drives the flat top chain with section, return unit and flat top chain. 13
14
Accessories
Delivery notes 17
▶▶ Incl. all fastening material to mount on ST 2 conveyor ▶▶ Fully assembled 18
section
19
20
21
22
23
24

of transport 640; 800; 1040; 1200
160 … 12001
AS 2/C-700 vN (m/min) Nominal speed 02; 6; 9; 12; 15; 183
MA = R
S = cable/plug
K = terminal box
b
R = right
L = left
M = center
1)
2)
3)
Reduced load to 600 kg
4)
26856
Technical data
Load
operation
Features
Required conveyor medium lAS mm 625
length**
*
**

Dimensions
1
375 b
2
360
280
3
7
4
40
240
5
504
7
9
Ø152
216 10
11
(MA = L) 12
13
70 14
b + 40
15
b
(MA = M)
16
MA = R
70
17
105
181
18
Ø152
19
498,3
00013277
20
21
22
23
24

UM 2/C-60 return unit
▶▶ Conveyor medium: flat top chain (suitable for use in an

EPA)
▶▶ For use with all AS 2/C drive modules
▶▶ Version with sliding piece for return unit
▶▶ Recommended for sections up to l = 6000 mm

Accessories
Delivery notes
▶▶ One pair of return heads ▶▶ Fully assembled
▶▶ Incl. all fastening material to mount on ST 2 conveyor
section
UM 2/C-60 return unit 3842528802

Technical data
1
Features 2
ESD Yes
Required conveyor medium lUM mm 150
length*
4
*
5
Dimensions
60 b 6
7
8
100
10
11
16
12
13
62
14
00013278
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

▶▶ Conveyor medium: flat top chain (suitable for use in

an EPA)
▶▶ For use with all AS 2/C drive modules
▶▶ Version with pinion for return unit
▶▶ Recommended for sections of l > 6000 mm

Accessories
Delivery notes
section
UM 2/C-170 return unit 3842528806

Technical data
1
Features 2
ESD Yes
length*
4
*
5
Dimensions
170 b 6
7
8
100
10
11
70
12
20
13
70
14
00013279
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

LU 2 automatic lubrication unit
LU 2 automatic lubrication unit Vplus
▶▶ Modular design consisting of LU 2 automatic lubrication

unit, LC 2 oil container and adapter set
▶▶ LU 2 automatic lubrication unit with drive, compressed
air connection to drive module and fastening material
▶▶ LC 2 lubricant container with Structovis GHD from
Klüber; contains: 0.25 l (must be ordered separately)
▶▶ Specific adapter sets with compatible lubrication pins
for different drive modules
▶▶ Adjustment of lubrication amount to be distributed per
metering process on the LU 2 automatic lubrication unit.
The metering process is actuated by an external PLC.
▶▶ Designed for lubricating one belt section or conveyor
unit respectively
▶▶ Use of the LU 2 automatic lubrication unit is highly
recommended for flat top chains
Increasing the system service life through continuous and Suitable for use with all belt sections and conveyor units;
maintenance-free lubrication of flat top chains, lubrication unit on the drive module.
accumulation roller chains, and duplex chains during Reduction of lubricant consumption thanks to exact
operation. metering and pinpoint application to the chain links.
For preventing dry running.
Accessories
▶▶ LC 2 lubricant container, see p. 3-85
▶▶ Adapter set, see p. 3-85
Delivery notes
▶▶ Not assembled, fastening material enclosed
▶▶ LC 2 lubricant container and adapter set as ordered

1
Set AS ...
2
LU 2 6
LC 2 7
33025
10
11
LU 2 automatic lubrication unit 1 3842543482

LC 2 lubricant container 4 3842543469 12
Product designation Packaging unit Material number 13
Adapter set for AS 2/C-100 1 3842543483 14

AS 2/C-250
BS 2/C 15
Adapter set for AS 2/C-400 (assembly on UM2/C-170 when b = 160 mm) 1 3842543484
AS 2/C-700 (assembly on UM2/C-170 when b = 160 mm) 16
BS 2/C-H (assembly on UM2/C-170, UM 2/R-170 when b = 160 mm)
Adapter set for AS 2/R-300 1 3842543485
17
AS 2/R-700
BS 2/R
18
BS 2/R-H with RV = 1*
Adapter set for AS 2/R-1200 (assembly on UM2/R-170 when b = 160 mm) 1 3842543486
19
AS 2/R-2200 (assembly on UM2/R-170 when b = 160 mm)
BS 2/R-H with RV = 0 (assembly on UM2/C-170, UM 2/R-170 when b = 160 mm)
20
Adapter set for AS 2/R-V-1200 (assembly on UM2/R-170 when b = 160 mm) 1 3842543487
AS 2/R-V-2200 (assembly on UM2/R-170 when b = 160 mm)
BS 2/R-V-1200 (assembly on UM2/R-170 when b = 160 mm)
21
Adapter set for HQ 2/U-H 1 3842548578
* Assembly on UM return unit 22
Technical data
23
Features
24
ESD Yes

Section, section profiles
Sections can be individually configured for special

requirements by selecting various section, glide, and guide
profiles.
Depending on the load spectrum of the conveyor medium,

stainless steel or plastic glide profiles can be inserted in
3842528746
the section profile. Use of steel glide profiles increases
resistance to wear and temperature. This opens up new
areas of application for the TS 2plus.
ST 2/C-100
ST 2/C-H
The proven SP 2/C-100 profiles are primarily suitable for
medium loads in simple system layouts.
Especially suited for high strains and loads, the new, sturdy
SP 2/C-H section profiles have been developed for flat top
chains. In addition to a more robust profile cross section
and improvements to details (integrated cable duct), the
use of stainless steel in the guide profile enhances the
system. An adapter plate not only enables visually attractive
mounting of the SP 2/C-H section profiles on the drive
modules in the TS 2plus, it also securely keeps the glide
profiles (sliding guides) from shifting.

ST 2/C-100 section
ST 2/C-100 section 1
3
▶▶ For use in conjunction with all AS 2/C drive modules
4
and UM 2/C return units
▶▶ Conveyor medium: plastic flat top chain
5
▶▶ GP 2 plastic glide profile
▶▶ Pre-assembled unit for quick setup
6
10
11
12
The section is used to construct conveyor units with plastic and UM 2/C return units 13
flat top chains in connection with the AS 2/C drive modules
14
Accessories
Required accessories Recommended accessories 15
▶▶ Cross connector, see p. 3-108 ▶▶ SZ 2 leg sets, see page 6-2
▶▶ Profile connector, see p. 3-107 16
17
Delivery notes
Scope of delivery Condition on delivery 18
▶▶ 2x SP 2/C section profiles with assembled FP 2 and ▶▶ Fully assembled
GP 2 guide profiles and glide profiles 19
▶▶ 8x blocking bolts
20
21
22
23
24

l (mm) Length 60 … 6000
SP 2/C
FP 2
GP 2
l
27644
Technical data
Features
Material specification Section profile:
Aluminum; anodized
FP 2 guide profile: polyamide
GP 2 glide profile: polyamide

Dimensions
Length l mm 60 … 6000

Dimensions
1
b 2
4
40
5
10
106,5
20
100
45 b – 75
9
b + 15
00126845
10
00126845
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Blocking bolts
Blocking bolts
▶▶ To prevent the plastic glide profiles from moving in

a longitudinal direction
▶▶ Installation at the beginning of the section in the
conveying direction
▶▶ Included in delivery of all ST 2/C sections
Note: Not required for all ST 2/C-H sections.
Blocking bolts prevent the plastic glide profiles from moving

in a longitudinal direction.
Accessories
▶▶ Drilling template (3842538972, see p. ) 3-118
Delivery notes
Scope of delivery
▶▶ Set consisting of 8x blocking bolts
Blocking bolts Set 3842537353
Dimensions
1,5
0,8
20°
A
Ø7h12
118°
9,7
M4
27675

27675
ST 2/C-H section
ST 2/C-H section 1
3
▶▶ For use with all AS 2/C drive modules and UM 2/C
4
return units
▶▶ Section profile (50 mm wide) in especially sturdy design
5
for section loads of up to 30% higher
▶▶ Conveyor medium: plastic flat top chain
6
▶▶ Optional steel or plastic GP 2 glide profiles
10
11
12
The section is used to construct heavy-duty conveyor units drive modules and UM 2/C return units 13
with plastic flat top chains in connection with the AS 2/C
14
Accessories
▶▶ ST 2/C-H adapter plate kit, see p. 3-102 ▶▶ SZ 2/… leg sets, see page 6-2
▶▶ If GP = 0, then adapter plates are to be fitted between ▶▶ Profile connector, see p. 3-107 16
each section joint. ▶▶ Cross connector, see p. 3-108
▶▶ Cover rail for cable duct, see p. 3-94 17
Delivery notes 18
Scope of delivery
▶▶ 2x SP 2/C-H section profiles with assembled FP 2/H-St 19
and GP 2/H guide profiles and glide profiles
20
21
22
23
24

ST 2/C-H section
SP 2/C-H l (mm) Length 200 … 6000
AO Installation location 0; 1; 2
Plastic glide profile
AO = 2
Steel glide profile
FP 2/H-St
AO = 0; 1; 2
Corrosion-resistant
steel (GP = 1)
Plastic (GP = 0)
l
GP 2/H-... A0
0
5
FP 2/H-St
1
5 5
2
00125179
Technical data
Features
Material specification Section profile:
Aluminum; anodized
Guide profile: Steel;
corrosion-resistant
Glide profile: Plastic or
steel; corrosion-resistant
Max. operating T °C +40

temperature
Dimensions

ST 2/C-H section
Dimensions
1
b
2
4
47
40
5
10
25
107
20
6
60
8
22,5
50 b – 75
9
b + 25
00125200
10
00125201
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Cover rail for cable duct
Cover rail for cable duct 10
▶▶ To prevent dirt from entering the profile slot

▶▶ For fixing cables in position
▶▶ Flush with profile
Cover rail for cable duct 10 3842523258
Technical data
Features
Dimensions
Length l mm 2000
30292

SP 2/C-100 section profile
SP 2/C-100 section profile 10 1
3
▶▶ For conveyor unit self-assembly for profile construction
heights of 100 mm
4
▶▶ For use in conjunction with all AS 2/C drive modules,
UM 2/C return units, FP 2 guide profiles and GP 2 glide
5
profiles
6
▶▶ For conveyor units with a height to conveying level of
100 mm
7
10
11
12
The section profile is used to set up conveyor units with the prevent the glide profiles from moving in a longitudinal 13
flat top chain conveyor medium. Additional blocking bolts direction.
14
Accessories
▶▶ GP 2 glide profile, see p. 3-97
▶▶ FP 2 guide profile, see p. 3-97 16
▶▶ Blocking bolts, see p. 3-90
17
Product designation l (mm) Delivery unit Material number 18
SP 2/C-100 16 x 6070 mm 6070 16 3842532609
section profile
19
20
21
22
23
24

SP 2/C-100 section profile
Technical data
Load
Moment of inertia lx cm4 128.0
ly cm 4
37.0
Moment of resistance Wx cm3 24.6

Wy cm3 16.4
Features
Material specification Aluminum; anodized
Mass m kg/m 4.0
Dimensions
Length l mm 6070
Profile surface A cm2 15.0
Dimensions
39,5+0,2
−0,3
24,2±0,2
45,7±0,2
35,2+0,3
105,7
30,5±0,2
10,2±0,2
20,3
45
27277
27277

FP 2 guide profile set, GP 2 glide profile
FP 2 guide profile set, GP 2 glide profile 1
3
▶▶ Used in conjunction with ST 2/C section profiles, AS
4
2/C drive modules and UM 2 /C return units
FP 2
▶▶ FP 2 guide profile for laterally guiding the workpiece
5
pallet; slid onto the SP 2/C-100 section profile
▶▶ GP 2 glide profile for guiding the top flat chain; slid
onto the SP 2/C-100 section profile 6
GP 2 9
10
11
12
The guide profile is used for lateral guidance of the Additional blocking bolts prevent the glide profiles from 13
workpiece pallet. The glide profile is used to guide the flat moving in a longitudinal direction.
top chain. Both profiles are pushed onto the section profile. 14
Accessories Delivery notes 15

Required accessories Scope of delivery
▶▶ Blocking bolts, see p. 3-90 ▶▶ 16x FP 2 guide profile (L = 6000 mm) 16
▶▶ 64x GP 2 glide profiles (L = 6000 mm)
17
Product designation l (mm) Material number 18
FP 2 guide profile set, GP 2 glide profile 6000 3842529933
19
Technical data
Features
ESD Yes 21
Material specification Guide profile: Plastic; PA (suitable for use in an
EPA)
Glide profile: Plastic; PA (suitable for use in an 22
EPA)
Max. operating temperature T °C +40 23
Dimensions
FP 2 length l mm 6000 24
GP 2 length l mm 6000

Blocking bolts
Blocking bolts
▶▶ To prevent the plastic glide profiles from moving in

a longitudinal direction
▶▶ Installation at the beginning of the section in the
conveying direction
▶▶ Included in delivery of all ST 2/C-100 sections
Note: Not required for all ST 2/C-H sections.
Blocking bolts prevent the plastic glide profiles from moving

in a longitudinal direction.
Accessories
▶▶ Drilling template (3842538972, see p. ) 3-118
Delivery notes
Scope of delivery
▶▶ Set consisting of 8x blocking bolts
Blocking bolts Set 3842537353
Dimensions
1,5
0,8
20°
A
Ø7h12
118°
9,7
M4
27675

27675
SP 2/C-H section profile
SP 2/C-H section profile 10 1
3
▶▶ In especially sturdy design for particularly heavy-duty
4
sections
▶▶ For use with all AS 2/C drive modules, FP 2/H guide
5
profiles and GP 2/H glide profiles
6
▶▶ For conveyor units with a height to conveying level of
100 mm
▶▶ For heavy-duty conveyor unit assembly 7
▶▶ Profile width: 50 mm
8
10
11
12
The section profile is used to set up conveyor units with the 13

flat top chain conveyor medium.
14
Accessories
▶▶ FP 2/H-St guide profile, see p. 3-104
▶▶ GP 2/H-St glide profile, see p. 3-105 16
▶▶ GP 2/H-Kst glide profile, see p. 3-106
▶▶ ST 2/C-H adapter plate kit, see p. 3-102 17
▶▶ Cover rail for cable duct, see p. 3-164
18
Product designation l (mm) Material number 19
SP 2/C-H 12 x 6000 mm section profile 6070 3842536793
20
21
22
23
24

Technical data
Load
ly cm4
54.9

Wy cm3 21.4
Features
Mass m kg/m 5.3
Dimensions
Length l mm 6070
FP 2/H-...
GP 2/H-...
21642

Dimensions
1
46-0,4
3
34,5+0,4
22,5+0,4 4
39±0,3
33,2
7
10+0,4 8
9
99±0,4
32,5±0,3
10
(60)
11
12
13
22,5 14
50±0,3
27278 15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

ST 2/C-H adapter plate kit
▶▶ Front end plate

▶▶ For connecting SP 2/C-H section profiles and AS 2/C
drive modules;
for connecting SP 2/C-H profiles and UM 2/C return
units;
and between section profiles if GP 2 plastic glide
profiles are used
The adapter plates are used as front covers and for The adapter plates are also suitable for use between
connecting section profiles and drive modules, or between section profiles where GP 2 plastic glide profiles are used.
section profiles and return units.
Delivery notes
Scope of delivery
▶▶ 2x left adapter plate
▶▶ 2x right adapter plate
ST 2/C-H adapter plate kit 4 3842536801
Technical data
Features
Material specification Steel; corrosion-resistant

Dimensions
1
34,5
3
22,5 5
4
39
7
8
21
11
9
98,7
29
10
44
11
12
13
14
22,35 15
50
16
17
18
3
3
19
27633
20
21
22
23
24

FP 2/H-St guide profile
▶▶ For lateral guidance of the workpiece pallet

▶▶ For sliding onto SP 2/C-H or SP 2/R-H section profiles
FP 2/H-St ▶▶ Robust version in corrosion-resistant steel
Accessories
▶▶ SP 2/C-H section profile, see p. 3-99, or SP 2/R-H, see
p. 3-169
Delivery notes
Scope of delivery
▶▶ 24x rods (l = 3000 mm)
FP 2/H-St guide profile 3000 24 3842537890
Technical data
Features
ESD Yes
Dimensions
Length l mm 3000
Dimensions
9 L = 3020+30
8
3,8- 0,2
27658
27658

GP 2/H-St glide profile
GP 2/H-St glide profile 1
3
▶▶ For guiding the flat top chain or accumulation roller
4
chain
▶▶ In especially sturdy design with corrosion-resistant steel
5
for particularly heavy-duty sections
▶▶ For use with all AS 2/C drive modules, UM 2/C return 6
units and SP 2/C section profiles
GP 2/H-St
7
Accessories 8
▶▶ SP 2/C-H section profile, see p. 3-99, or SP 2/R-H, see 9
p. 3-169
10
Delivery notes
▶▶ 48x rods (l = 3000 mm)
12
GP 2/H-St glide profile 3000 48 3842537888
14
Technical data
Features
ESD Yes 16
Dimensions 17
Length l mm 3000
18
Dimensions
19
4,5±0,1 L = 3020+30
20
3,5±0,1
21
5
22
6
27659
23
27659
24

GP 2/H-Kst glide profile

▶▶ For guiding the flat top chain or the accumulation roller
chain
▶▶ For use with all AS 2/C drive modules, UM 2/C return
GP 2/H-Kst
Accessories
p. 3-169
Delivery notes
Scope of delivery
▶▶ 48x rods (l = 3000 mm)
GP 2/H-Kst glide profile 3000 48 3842537889
Technical data
Features
ESD Yes
Material specification Plastic; PA (suitable for use in an
EPA)
Dimensions
Length l mm 3000
Dimensions
4,5±0,2 L = 3000+30
3,5±0,2
5
6
27660
27660

Profile connector
Profile connector 1
3
▶▶ For connecting two SP 2 profiles end to end
Two profile connectors are recommended for each
4
profile joint
5
▶▶ For use with all AS 2/C drive modules, UM 2/C return
6
Delivery notes 8
Scope of delivery
▶▶ Profile connector, screws 9

11
Technical data 12
Features 13
14
Dimensions
15
0
16
18
17
18
00013291
19
00013291
20
21
22
23
24


▶▶ For connecting section profiles and defining the track
width
▶▶ Can be combined with all SP 2 section profiles.
Formula for calculating the number of cross connectors

needed
AQV = (l/2000 mm) + 1
AQV = number of cross connectors

I = section length
Delivery notes
Scope of delivery
▶▶ 2x fastening material to mount on an ST 2 section

1
of transport 640; 800; 1040; 1200
160 … 12001 3
1
0
00
≤2 4
b
5
8
l
10
00013202
Technical data 11
Features 12
13
Dimensions
14
15
16
17
b
–
7
5
18
19
20
21
22
00013292
23
24

QV 2-H cross connector
▶▶ For heavy-duty conveyor unit self-assembly

track width
QV 2-H cross connectors are particularly suitable for

connections between section profiles in heavy-duty
systems.
Formula for calculating the number of cross connectors

needed
AQV = (l/2000 mm) + 1

I = section length
Delivery notes
Scope of delivery
▶▶ 4x fastening material to mount on an ST 2 section

1
of transport 640; 800; 1040; 1200
160 … 12001 3
1
0
00
≤2 4
b
5
8
l
10
26857
Technical data 11
Features 12
13
Dimensions
14
15
16
17
b
–
7
5
18
19
20
21
22
00125184
23
24

ST 2/...-W maintenance section
▶▶ For maintenance use (assembly, disassembly or

lubrication)
▶▶ Two removable side covers each
▶▶ Suitable for flat top chains
The maintenance section is a section element with disassembly, lubrication) of the flat top chain conveyor
removable caps. It is used for maintenance (assembly, medium.
Delivery notes
Scope of delivery
▶▶ 2x maintenance section elements, 400 mm long
▶▶ Incl. 8x profile connectors
ST 2/C-W maintenance section 3842532777
ST 2/C-H-W maintenance section 3842537310
Technical data
Material number 3842532777 3842537310
Features
ESD Yes Yes
Material specification Section profile: Aluminum, Section profile: Aluminum,
natural; anodized natural; anodized
Side cover: PE Side cover: PE
Dimensions
Length l mm 400 400

Dimensions
1
ST 2/C-W maintenance section
200 4
100 57
6
107
8
400 45
580 9
10
30128
11
ST 2/C-H-W maintenance section
12
13
100 200 62
14
15
107
16
17
400 50
500
18
19
27632
20
27632
21
22
23
24

Scraper
Scraper
▶▶ To scrape small parts from the conveyor medium

▶▶ For use with workpiece pallets with a minimum weight
of 3 kg
▶▶ Conveyor media: Belt, toothed belt and flat top chain
▶▶ May be mounted on the right side (R) or left side (L)
▶▶ Reversible operation is not possible on sections with
scrapers
Delivery notes
Scope of delivery
▶▶ 1x scraper, right or left, including fastening material
Scraper, right 3842532679
Scraper, left 3842532680
00013293

Scraper
Dimensions
1
4
66,7
39,6
5
8
35
50 47,6 9
10
11
12
10
13
14
15
41
16
12
17
18
27
19
27630 20
21
22
23
24

Plastic flat top chain

Master link
▶▶ Conveyor medium for use with conveyor unit self-

assembly
▶▶ For use with ST 2/C sections and ST 2/C-H sections
▶▶ Delivered in units of up to 12000 mm. Lengths of l >
12000 mm can be produced by connecting several flat
top chains using a master link
▶▶ Nickel-plated steel base chain version
▶▶ Steel chain with PA66 polyamide support caps
Note:
▶▶ The plastic flat top chain, which is also suitable for use
in an EPA, cannot be used in curves and curve arcs
▶▶ Accumulation operation with workpiece pallets fitted
with PE wear pads not recommended as this increases
wear
▶▶ The plastic flat top chain is not permitted for use with
steel GP glide profiles
Conveyor medium for the workpiece pallets in the TS 2plus

system in conjunction with ST 2/C and ST 2/C-H conveyor
sections.
Accessories
▶▶ Additional master link, 3842551234
▶▶ Tool for flat top chain, see p. 3-118
Delivery notes
Scope of delivery
▶▶ Plastic flat top chain (l = 12000 mm; black),
incl. 1x master link
▶▶ ESD plastic flat top chain (l = 12000 mm; gray),
incl. 1x master link
▶▶ Master link, incl. 1x ESD flat top (gray) with hole
Plastic flat top chain 3842551226
ESD plastic flat top chain 3842551227
Master link* 3842551234
*
Can be used on both plastic flat top chains

Technical data
1
Material number 3842551226 3842551227 3842551234
Features 2
ESD No Yes Yes
Material specification Base chain: Steel; nickel-plated Base chain: Steel; nickel-plated Steel; nickel- 3
Flat chain: PA66 Flat chain: PA66 (suitable for plated
use in an EPA)
4
Dimensions
Length l mm 12000 12000
5
Dimensions
6
7
lUM lAS
8
lS
UM 2 AS 2
9
10
11
12
13
14
00126838 15
The 00126838
required chain length is determined using the following Length of the conveyor medium for flat top chain 16
formula. lUM 2/C-170 = 310 mm
lUM 2/C-60 = 150 mm 17
lC = 2 x lS + lAS + lUM
lAS = 625 mm
18
lC = length of flat top chain
lS = length of the section profile 19
lAS = length of the conveyor medium in the drive module
lUM = length of the conveyor medium at the return unit 20
21
22
23
24

Chain breaker, drilling template
Chain breaker
▶▶ For disassembling plastic flat top chains
Chain breaker for plastic flat top chain 8981010510
Drilling template for blocking bolts
Drilling template for blocking bolts 3842538972


10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Accumulation roller chain conveyor medium
The accumulation roller chain is suitable for large, heavy

workpiece pallets. Stress occurring due to media such as
test oils or production emissions does not affect functional
reliability. The accumulation rollers do not only reduce the
accumulation pressure on stop gates, but also enable
a quick return to the transport speed following work at
a processing station.
In conjunction with PE wear pads on the workpiece pallets,

the standard design with plastic glide profiles in the section
profile permits surface loads of up to 1.5 kg/cm, whereas
the optionally available version with steel glide profiles and
accumulation roller chain with steel rollers can tolerate
surface loads up to 2 kg/cm.
The new HD profiles equipped with steel glide profiles and

steel guide profile provide a particularly sturdy, low-
maintenance combination.


BS 2/R belt sections 3-122 1
300 kg 700 kg
2
1200 kg 3
Parts for AS 2/..., UM 2/..., ST 2... 3-134

4
conveyor units

7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

BS 2/R-300 belt section

300 kg
▶▶ Conveyor section ready to use

▶▶ Conveyor medium: Accumulation roller chain (suitable
for use in an EPA)
▶▶ Reversible operation possible for l ≤ 2000 mm and
accumulation roller chains without small parts
protection
▶▶ Chain tensioner for reversible operation contained in
drive head
▶▶ Motor mounting right, left or central
terminal box
The belt section is a ready for operation conveyor section Note: With short, light workpiece pallets (lWT = 160, 240), it
with own drive for the transportation of workpiece pallets may be necessary to ensure that conveyor trenches are
in the longitudinal direction or for the transverse conveying traversable by installing the included acceleration element.
of the workpiece pallet between parallel conveyor sections When doing so, note the following:
in connection with two HQ 2 lift transverse units. Avoid accumulation above the acceleration element.
Accumulation above the acceleration element causes
severe roller wear and shortens the service life of the chain.
Accessories
Delivery notes

1
b (mm) Track width in direction of 160; 240; 320; 400; 2
transport 480; 640; 800; 1040;
1200
160 ... 12001 3
l (mm) Length 300 ... 6000
vN Nominal speed 02; 6; 9; 12; 15; 18 4
b (m/min)
U (V) Voltage See motor data, 5
p. 11-24ff
l f (Hz) Frequency See motor data,

p. 11-24ff 6
S = cable/plug 7
K = terminal box
8
R = right
L = left
M = center 9
RV Reversible operation 0; 1
No reversible operation (RV = 0)
Reversible operation (RV = 1) 10
00013198
GP Corrosion-resistant steel glide K; S

profile (GP = S) 11
Plastic (GP = K)
KT Chain type 1; 2; 3; 4
12
Accumulation roller chain with PA
accumulation rollers (KT = 1)
Accumulation roller chain with 13
steel accumulation rollers (KT = 2)
accumulation rollers and small 14
parts protection (KT = 3)
Accumulation roller chain with
steel accumulation rollers and 15
small parts protection (KT = 4)
1)
Individual width variants available 16
2)
3)
17
Technical data
Load
operation
Features
20
ESD Yes
Material specification Section profile: Aluminum, natural;
anodized
21
Glide profile Polyamide or steel;
corrosion-resistant 22
Chain: Polyamide or steel
accumulation rollers
Small parts protection: Polyamide 23
Dimensions 24
Length l mm 300 ... 6000

Dimensions
l b
60 170
7
107
100
160
234,3
Ø136
200
293,5 39,5
A–A b
138,5
114,5
MA = L
40
106,5
100
b – 75
b – 100
b – 75
b + 15
b + 40
b + 15
b
(MA = R)
70
MA = M
110,5
b – 100
b + 40
b
00013280

BS 2/R-700 belt section 1

700 kg
2
3
for use in an EPA)
4
5
terminal box
6
10
11
12
The belt section is a ready-to-use conveyor section with Note: With short, light workpiece pallets (lWT = 160, 240), it 13
built-in drive for the transportation of workpiece pallets in may be necessary to ensure that conveyor trenches are
the longitudinal direction or for the transverse conveying of traversable by installing the included acceleration element. 14
the workpiece pallet between parallel conveyor sections in When doing so, note the following:
connection with two HQ 2 lift transverse units. Avoid accumulation above the acceleration element. 15
Accumulation above the acceleration element causes
severe roller wear and shortens the service life of the chain. 16
17
Accessories
18
▶▶ SZ 2/… leg sets, see page 6-2 19
20
Delivery notes
21
22
23
24

b (mm) Track width in direction of 160; 240; 320; 400;
transport 480; 640; 800; 1040;
1200; 160 ... 1200
l (mm) Length 300 ... 6000
vN Nominal speed 01); 6; 9; 12; 15; 18
(m/min)
b U (V) Voltage See motor data,
p. 11-24ff
f (Hz) Frequency See motor data,
l p. 11-24ff
S = cable/plug
K = terminal box
R = right
L = left
GP Corrosion-resistant steel glide K; S
profile (GP = S)
Plastic (GP = K)
30094 Accumulation roller chain with PA
accumulation rollers (KT = 1)
accumulation rollers and small
steel accumulation rollers and
small parts protection (KT = 4)
1)
Technical data
Load
operation
Features
ESD Yes
natural; anodized
Glide profile Polyamide or
steel; corrosion-resistant
Small parts protection:
Polyamide
Dimensions
Length l mm 300 ... 6000

Dimensions
1
I b
60 170 2
A
107
4
A
5
160
A–A b
281,3
6
40
106,5
100
b – 75
8
Ø142,1
b + 15 223,5
9
10
(MA = L)
149,6
11
12
13
b + 30
b + 40
14
b
b + 181,5
15
16
61,7
70
17
78,5
Ø142,1
18
63
60 19
MA = R
430
30124 20
21
22
23
24

BS 2/R-H belt section

1200 kg
▶▶ Conveyor section ready to use

for use in an EPA)
protection
▶▶ Chain tensioner for reversible operation is mounted on
the return unit at RV = 1
terminal box
▶▶ Profile width: 50 mm
The belt section is a ready-to-use conveyor section with the workpiece pallet between parallel conveyor sections in
built-in drive for the transportation of workpiece pallets in connection with two HQ 2 lift transverse units.
the longitudinal direction or for the transverse conveying of
Accessories
Delivery notes

1
b (mm) Track width in direction of 400 ... 1200 2
transport
l (mm) Length 650 ... 6000

3
vN Nominal speed 01); 6; 9; 12; 15; 182)
(m/min)
4
b U (V) Voltage See motor data,
p. 11-24ff
f (Hz) Frequency See motor data, 5
p. 11-24ff
AT Motor connection S; K 6
RV = 1
S = cable/plug
l K = terminal box
7
R = right
L = left 8
M = center
RV Reversible operation 0, 13
No reversible operation (RV = 0) 9
Reversible operation (RV = 1)
GP Corrosion-resistant steel glide 0; 1 10
00125189
profile (GP = S)
Plastic (GP = K)
11
accumulation rollers (KT = 1) 12
Accumulation roller chain with PA 13
accumulation rollers and small
14
steel accumulation rollers and
small parts protection (KT = 4) 15
1)
2)
3)
RV = 1 possible when l ≤ 2000 mm and section loads < 400 kg;
no reversible operation for chains with small parts protection (KT = 3, 4)
17
Technical data
Load
operation
Features
20
ESD Yes
natural; anodized 21
Glide profile Polyamide or
steel; corrosion-resistant 22
Small parts protection: 23
Polyamide
Dimensions
24
Length l mm 650 ... 6000

BS 2/R-H belt section dimensions
I
170 A 280
7
107
240
A
A–A b
40
100
107
b – 75 (MA = L)
b + 25
(MA = M)
b + 40
b
b + 182
70
105
Ø 160
70
MA = R
430
27276
27276

BS 2/R-H belt section dimensions with chain tensioner

1
I 3
170 A 280
7
4
107
240
A
6
160
A–A b
9
10
40
100
107
11
(MA = L)
b – 75 12
b + 25
13
14
15
(MA = M) 16
b + 40
b
17
b + 182
18
19
70
20
105
Ø 160
21
MA = R
70 22
430
23
31532
24
31532


an EPA)
The head-to-head connection of the drive and return heads used to bridge these > 180 mm conveyor trenches by using
results in short, non-driven sections. The connection belt is short IWT < 320 mm workpiece pallets.
Delivery notes
Connection belt, left 3842528480
Connection belt, right 3842539096
Technical data
Material number 3842528480 3842539096
Features
ESD Yes Yes

Dimensions
1
2
0,6
4
40,6
7
27
120 70
9
10
11
12
60 13
14
15
16
ca. 70
14
17
42,5
25
18
19
27631
20
21
22
23
24

Conveyor units
Accumulation roller chain conveyor medium
UM 2/R-60
AS 2/R-300
3842551226
AS 2/R-700
3842551227 UM 2/R-170
3842528746
ST 2/R-100
ST 2/R-100 ST
ST 2/R-H
AS 2/R-1200
AS 2/R-2200
SZ 2
A conveyor unit is a complete unit used for linear conveying The UM 2/R and AS 2/R may be set up right next to each
▶▶ AS 2/R drive module, see p. 3-136
▶▶ UM 2/R return unit, see p. 3-148 Drive modules for loads up to mG = 300 kg; 700 kg; 1200 kg,
▶▶ ST 2/R… sections, see p. 3-154 or up to mG = 2200 kg per conveyor unit.


AS 2/R drive module 3-136 1
300 kg 700 kg
2
1200 kg 2200 kg 3
UM 2/R return unit 3-148 4
ST 2/R section, components 3-154

7
Accumulation roller chain conveyor medium, 3-183

10
accessories
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

AS 2/R-300 drive module

300 kg

▶▶ For use with UM 2 return units and ST 2 sections
for use in an EPA)
protection
terminal box
The AS 2/R... drive module drives the accumulation roller elements with section, return unit and accumulation
chain conveyor medium in self-built conveyor section roller chain.
Accessories
Delivery notes

1
b (mm) Track width in 160; 240; 320; 400; 480; 2
direction of transport 640; 800; 1040; 1200
160 … 12001 3
4
b f (Hz) Frequency See motor data, p. 11-24ff
AS 2/R-300
MA = R AT Motor connection S; K
5
S = cable/plug
K = terminal box
6
R = right
L = left 7
M = center
8
RV Reversible operation 0; 14)
No reversible operation
(RV = 0) 9
Reversible operation
(RV = 1)
10
00012912
1)
2)
vN = 0: without motor or gear 11
3)
4)
RV = 1 possible when l ≤ 2000 mm; no reversible operation for chains
with small parts protection (KT = 3, 4) 12
Technical data 13
Load 14
operation 15
Features
ESD Yes 16
length*
*
Formula for calculating the conveyor medium, see p. 3-184/3-186
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Dimensions
170 b
7
107
100
160
234,3
Ø136
200
293,5 39,5
MA = L
138,5
114,5
110,5
(MA = M)
b – 100
b + 40
b
(MA = R)
70
00013212
00013212

AS 2/R-700 drive module 1

700 kg
2
3
4
for use in an EPA)
5
6
terminal box
7
10
11
12
The AS 2/R... drive module drives the accumulation roller elements with section, return unit and accumulation 13
14
Accessories
16
Delivery notes
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

b (mm) Track width in 160; 240; 320; 400; 480;
160 … 12001
AS 2/R-700 b
MA = R f (Hz) Frequency See motor data, p. 11-24ff
S = cable/plug
K = terminal box
R = right
L = left
1)
2)
26859
Technical data
Load
operation
Features
ESD Yes
Required conveyor medium length* lAS mm 475
*

Dimensions
1
170 b
7
2
107
100
4
160
5
281,3
6
Ø142,1 8
223,5
(MA = L)
10
149,6
11
12
13
b + 40
14
b
b + 181,5
15
MA = R
70
16
78,5
17
Ø142,1
18
63
60
430
19
00013275 20
21
22
23
24


1200 kg

for use in an EPA)
terminal box
The AS 2/R... drive module drives the accumulation roller elements with section, return unit and accumulation
Accessories
Delivery notes

1
160 … 12001 3
4
b
AS 2/R-2200 AT Motor connection S; K
MA=R 5
S = cable/plug
K = terminal box
6
R = right
L = left 7
M = center
1)
8
2)
3)
AS 2/R-1200 4)
MA = M when b ≥ 240 mm
MA=M
10
00012911
Technical data 11
Load 12
operation 13
Features
ESD Yes 14
length*
*
Formula for calculating the conveyor medium, see p. 3-184/3-186 16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Dimensions
375 b
360
280
7
40
247
240
196
Ø160
215
153
(MA = L)
70
b + 40
b
b + 181,5
(MA = M)
70
MA = R
78,5
Ø160
63
60
430
00013276

AS 2/R-2200 drive module 1

2200 kg
2
3
4
for use in an EPA)
5
6
terminal box
▶▶ Special models on request 7
10
11
12
The AS 2/R... drive module drives the accumulation roller elements with section, return unit and accumulation 13
14
Accessories
16
Delivery notes
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

b (mm) Track width in 160; 240; 320; 400; 480;
160 … 12001
b AT Motor connection S; K
S = cable/plug
K = terminal box
AS 2/R-2200 MA Motor mounting R; L; M4

MA = R R = right
L = left
M = center
1)
2)
3)
4)
26858
Technical data
Load
operation
Features
ESD Yes
length*
*

Dimensions
1
375 b
2
360
280
3
7
4
40
240
5
504
7
9
Ø152
216 10
11
(MA = L) 12
13
70 14
b + 40
15
b
(MA = M)
16
MA = R
70
17
105
181
Ø152
18
19
498,3
00013277
00013277
20
21
22
23
24

UM 2/R-60 return unit

for use in an EPA)
▶▶ For use in conjunction with all AS 2/R-... and ST 2/…
sections
▶▶ Version with sliding piece for return
Recommended for sections up to l = 6000 mm

Delivery notes
▶▶ Incl. all fastening material to mount on an ST 2/R
conveyor section
UM 2/R-60 return unit 3842528803
Technical data
Features
ESD Yes
length*
*

Dimensions
1
60 b
2
7
4
100
7
16
8
62
00013278
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24


for use in an EPA)
▶▶ For use in conjunction with all AS 2/R-... and ST 2/…
sections
▶▶ Version with pinion for return unit recommended for
sections of l ≥ 6000 mm or for sections of any length for
reversible operation

Delivery notes
▶▶ Incl. all fastening material to mount on an ST 2/R
conveyor section
UM 2/R-170 return unit 3842528807
Technical data
Features
ESD Yes
length*
*

Dimensions
1
170 b
2
7
4
100
70 7
8
20
70
10
00013279
00013279
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

LU 2 automatic lubrication unit Vplus
▶▶ Modular design consisting of LU 2 automatic lubrication

unit, LC 2 oil container and adapter set
▶▶ LU 2 automatic lubrication unit with drive, compressed
air connection to drive module and fastening material
▶▶ LC 2 lubricant container with Structovis GHD from
Klüber; contains: 0.25 l (must be ordered separately)
▶▶ Specific adapter sets with compatible lubrication pins
for different drive modules
▶▶ Adjustment of lubrication amount to be distributed per
metering process on the LU 2 automatic lubrication unit.
The metering process is actuated by an external PLC.
▶▶ Designed for lubricating one belt section or conveyor
unit respectively
▶▶ Use of the LU 2 automatic lubrication unit is highly
recommended for flat top chains
Increasing the system service life through continuous and Suitable for use with all belt sections and conveyor units;
maintenance-free lubrication of flat top chains, lubrication unit on the drive module.
accumulation roller chains, and duplex chains during Reduction of lubricant consumption thanks to exact
operation. metering and pinpoint application to the chain links.
For preventing dry running.
Accessories
▶▶ LC 2 lubricant container, see p. 3-153
▶▶ Adapter set, see p. 3-153
Delivery notes
▶▶ Not assembled, fastening material enclosed
▶▶ LC 2 lubricant container and adapter set as ordered

1
Set AS ...
2
LU 2 6
LC 2 7
33025
10
11
LU 2 automatic lubrication unit 1 3842543482

LC 2 lubricant container 4 3842543469 12

Adapter set for AS 2/C-100 1 3842543483
AS 2/C-250 14
BS 2/C
Adapter set for AS 2/C-400 (assembly on UM2/C-170 when b = 160 mm) 1 3842543484 15
AS 2/C-700 (assembly on UM2/C-170 when b = 160 mm)
BS 2/C-H (assembly on UM2/C-170, UM 2/R-170 when b = 160 mm) 16
Adapter set for AS 2/R-300 1 3842543485
AS 2/R-700 17
BS 2/R
BS 2/R-H with RV = 1* 18
Adapter set for AS 2/R-1200 (assembly on UM2/R-170 when b = 160 mm) 1 3842543486
AS 2/R-2200 (assembly on UM2/R-170 when b = 160 mm) 19
BS 2/R-H with RV = 0 (assembly on UM2/C-170, UM 2/R-170 when b = 160 mm)
Adapter set for AS 2/R-V-1200 (assembly on UM2/R-170 when b = 160 mm) 1 3842543487
20
AS 2/R-V-2200 (assembly on UM2/R-170 when b = 160 mm)
BS 2/R-V-1200 (assembly on UM2/R-170 when b = 160 mm)
21
Adapter set for HQ 2/U-H 1 3842548578
* Assembly on UM return unit
22
Technical data
23
Features
24
ESD Yes

Sections can be individually configured for special

requirements by selecting various section, glide, and
guide profiles.
Depending on the load spectrum of the conveyor medium,

stainless steel or plastic glide profiles can be inserted in
the section profile. Use of steel glide profiles increases
resistance to wear and temperature. This opens up new
areas of application for the TS 2plus.
The proven SP 2/R-100 profiles are primarily suitable for

medium to high loads in simple system layouts.
Especially suited for high strains and loads, the new, sturdy
SP 2/R-H section profiles have been developed for
accumulator roller chains. In addition to a more robust
profile cross section and improvements to details
(integrated cable duct), the use of stainless steel in the
guide profile enhances the system. An adapter plate not
only enables visually attractive mounting of the SP 2/R-H
section profiles with drive modules in the TS 2plus, it also
securely keeps the glide profiles (sliding guides)
from shifting.

ST 2/R-100 section
ST 2/R-100 section 1
3
▶▶ For use in conjunction with AS 2/R drive modules and
4
UM 2/R return units
▶▶ GP 2 plastic glide profile
5
▶▶ Pre-assembled unit for quick setup
10
11
12
The section is used for the construction of conveyor units 13

in conjunction with the AS 2/R drive modules and the UM
2/R return units. 14
Accessories 15
▶▶ SZ 2/… leg sets, see page 6-2 16
▶▶ Profile connector, see p. 3-215 17
Delivery notes 18
▶▶ 2x SP 2/R section profiles with assembled FP 2 and GP ▶▶ Fully assembled 19
2 guide profiles and glide profiles
20
21
22
23
24

l (mm) Length 60 … 6000
FP 2
GP 2
27648
Technical data
Features
Material specification Glide profile: Polyamide (PA)
Section profile: Aluminum, natural;
anodized

Dimensions

Dimensions
1
b 2
4
40
5
10
106,5
20
100
45 b – 75
9
b + 15
10
00126844
00126844
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

ST 2/R-100 ST section
▶▶ For conveyor unit self-assembly for higher section loads

UM 2/R return units
The section is used for the construction of conveyor units

in conjunction with the AS 2/R drive modules and the UM
2/R return units.
Accessories
Delivery notes Condition on delivery

Scope of delivery ▶▶ Fully assembled
▶▶ 2x SP 2/R section profiles with assembled FP 2, FP 2
SRK and GP 2/ST guide profiles and glide profiles

1
l (mm) Length 60 … 6000 2
6
FP 2
GP 2/ST l 7
GP 2
FP 2 SRK 8
10
27650
Technical data 11
Features 12
Material specification GP 2/ST glide profile Steel
GP 2 glide profile: PA 12 13
Guide profile FP 2: PA 12
Accumulation roller chain FP 2 chain
guide profile: PE 14
Section profile: Aluminum, natural;
anodized
15
Dimensions
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Dimensions
FP 2
b
40
GP 2/ST
106,5
20
10
FP 2 SRK
100
45 b-75 GP 2
b+15
31531

ST 2/R-H section
ST 2/R-H section 1
3
4
UM 2/R return units
▶▶ Section profile in especially sturdy design for section
5
loads of up to 30% higher
▶▶ Optional steel or plastic GP 2 glide profiles
6
10
11
12
The section is used for the construction of heavy-duty 13

conveyor units in conjunction with the AS 2/R drive
modules and the UM 2/R return units. 14
Accessories 15
▶▶ ST 2/R-H adapter plate kit, see p. 3-171 If GP = 0, then ▶▶ SZ 2/...-H leg sets, see p. 6-2 16
adapter plates are to be fitted between each ▶▶ Cross connector, see p. 3-216
section joint ▶▶ Profile connector, see p. 3-215 17
▶▶ Cover rail for cable duct, see p. 3-213
18
Delivery notes
Scope of delivery
19
▶▶ 2x SP 2/R-H section profiles with assembled FP 2 and
GP 2 guide profiles and glide profiles
20
21
22
23
24

ST 2/R-H section
SP l (mm) Length 200 … 6000
Plastic glide profile
AO = 2
Steel glide profile
FP 2
AO = 0; 1; 2
Corrosion-resistant
steel (GP = 1)
Plastic (GP = 0)
l
GP 2 A0
0
5
FP 2
1
5 5
2
00125180
Technical data
Features
natural; anodized
corrosion-resistant
Glide profile: Plastic or steel;
corrosion-resistant
Dimensions

ST 2/R-H section
Dimensions
1
b
2
4
47
40
10 5
25
107
20
60 6
8
22,5
50 b – 75 9
b + 25
00125201
10
00125201 11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24


Cover rail for cable duct 10 3842523258
Technical data
Features
Dimensions
Length l mm 2000
30292

SP 2/R-100 section profile
SP 2/R-100 section profile 10 1
3
▶▶ For use with all AS 2/R drive modules, UM 2/R return
4
units, FP 2 guide profiles and GP 2 glide profiles
5
10
11
12
The section profile is used to set up conveyor units with the 13

accumulation roller chain conveyor medium.
14
Accessories
▶▶ FP 2 guide profile, see p. 3-167
▶▶ GP 2 glide profile, see p. 3-167 16
SP 2/R-100 16 x 6070 mm section profile 6070 16 3842529931 18
Technical data
19
Load 20
ly cm4 40.1
21
Wy cm3 17.8
22
Features
23
Mass m kg/m 4.4
Dimensions
24
Length l mm 6070

SP 2/R-100 section profile
Dimensions
40
10
20
105,7
100
45
35144

FP 2 guide profile/GP 2 glide profile set
FP 2 guide profile/GP 2 glide profile set 1
3
▶▶ For use with ST 2/R section profiles, AS 2/R drive
FP 2 4
modules and UM 2 /R return units
▶▶ FP 2 guide profile for laterally guiding the workpiece
5
pallet; slid onto SP 2/R-100 section profile
▶▶ GP 2 glide profile for guiding the top flat chain; slid onto
SP2/R-100 section profile 6
9
GP 2
10
11
12
The guide profile is used for lateral guidance of the accumulation roller chain. Both profiles are pushed onto 13
workpiece pallet. The glide profile is used to guide the the section profile.
14
Delivery notes
▶▶ 16x FP 2 guide profile (L = 6000 mm)
▶▶ 64x GP 2 glide profiles (L = 6000 mm) 16
FP 2 guide profile/GP 2 glide profile set 6000 3842529933 18
Technical data
19
Features 20
ESD Yes
Material specification Guide profile: Plastic; PA (suitable for use in 21
an EPA)
Glide profile: Plastic; PA (suitable for use in
an EPA) 22
Dimensions 23
FP 2 length l mm 6000
GP 2 length l mm 6000 24

Accumulation roller chain FP guide profile/GP 2/ST glide profile set
Accumulation roller chain FP guide profile/GP 2/ST

glide profile set

▶▶ Used in conjunction with ST 2/R section profiles, AS 2/R
drive modules and UM 2 /R return units
▶▶ GP 2/ST glide profile for supporting the accumulation
GP 2/ST roller chain; enables higher permissible loads in
conjunction with an accumulation roller chain with
steel rollers
▶▶ Accumulation roller chain guide profile for lateral
guiding of the accumulation roller chain in conjunction
with GP 2/ST glide profile
FP SRK
FP 2
GP 2/ST
GP 2 FP SRK
Accessories Delivery notes

Required accessories Scope of delivery
▶▶ FP 2 guide profile, see p. 3-167 ▶▶ 24x accumulation roller chain FP guide profile
▶▶ GP 2 glide profile, see p. 3-167 (l = 2000 mm)
▶▶ 32x GP 2/ST glide profile (l = 3000 mm)
Accumulation roller chain FP guide 2000 3842532676
profile/GP 2/ST glide profile set 3000
Technical data
Features
ESD Yes
Material specification Accumulation roller chain guide
profile PE
Glide profile: Steel;
corrosion-resistant
Dimensions
Accumulation roller chain FP l mm 2000
guide profile length
GP 2/ST length l mm 3000

SP 2/R-H section profile
SP 2/R-H section profile 10 1
3
▶▶ For conveyor unit self-assembly for higher section loads
in the 100 mm construction height
4
units, FP 2/H guide profiles, GP 2/H glide profiles and
5
SP 2/R section profiles
6
▶▶ Extruded aluminum profile with an especially
sturdy design
▶▶ Integrated cable duct at the profile base 7
10
11
12
The section profile is used for constructing conveyor units accumulation roller chain and guide profile conveyor media. 13
with 100 mm construction height and with the
14
Accessories
▶▶ Cover rail for cable duct, see p. 3-164 ▶▶ GP 2/H-St and GP 2/H-Kst glide profiles,
▶▶ FP 2/H-St guide profile, see p. 3-173 see p. 3-174/3-175 16
▶▶ ST 2/R-H adapter plate kit, see p. 3-171
SP 2/R-H 12 x 6070 mm section profile 6070 12 3842536792 18
Technical data
19
Load 20
ly cm4 51.3
21
Wy cm3 19.8
22
Features
23
Mass m kg/m 5.2
Dimensions
24
Length l mm 6070

SP 2/R-H section profile
Dimensions
39
39
10
20
25
99
60
22,5
50
35145

ST 2/R-H adapter plate kit
ST 2/R-H adapter plate kit 1
3
▶▶ For connecting SP 2/R-H section profiles and AS 2/R
4
drive modules;
for connecting SP 2/R-H profiles and UM 2/R
5
return units;
profiles are used 6
10
11
12
The adapter plates are used as front covers and for The adapter plates are also suitable for use between 13
section profiles and return units. 14
Delivery notes 15
Scope of delivery
▶▶ 2x left adapter plate 16
17
ST 2/R-H adapter plate kit 4 3842536800
19
Technical data
Features
ESD Yes 21
22
23
24

ST 2/R-H adapter plate kit
Dimensions
30
16 5
39
21
11
98,7
34,5
39
22,35
50
3
27634

FP 2/H-St guide profile 1
3
▶▶ For lateral guidance of the workpiece pallet
4
▶▶ For press-fitting onto SP 2/C-H or SP 2/R-H section
FP 2/H-St profiles
5
▶▶ Robust version in corrosion-resistant steel
Accessories 8
p. 3-169
10
Delivery notes
▶▶ 24x rods (l = 3000 mm)
12
FP 2/H-St guide profile 3000 24 3842537890
14
Technical data
Features
ESD Yes 16
Dimensions 17
Length l mm 3000
18
Dimensions
9 L = 3020+30 19
20
8
21
8
22
3,8- 0,2
27658
23
27658
24


▶▶ For guiding the flat top chain or accumulation
roller chain
▶▶ In especially sturdy design with corrosion-resistant steel
for particularly heavy-duty sections
GP 2/H-St
units and SP 2/R section profiles
Accessories
p. 3-169
Delivery notes
Scope of delivery
▶▶ 48x rods (l = 3000 mm)
GP 2/H-St glide profile 3000 48 3842537888
Technical data
Features
ESD Yes
Dimensions
Length l mm 3000
Dimensions
4,5±0,1 L = 3020+30
3,5±0,1
5
27659
27659

GP 2/H-Kst glide profile 1
3
▶▶ For guiding the flat top chain or the accumulation
4
roller chain
5
▶▶ Used with all AS 2/R drive modules, UM 2/R return units
and SP 2/R section profiles
6
GP 2/H-Kst
7
Accessories 8
p. 3-169
10
Delivery notes
▶▶ 48x rods (l = 3000 mm)
12
GP 2/H-Kst glide profile 3000 48 3842537889
14
Technical data
Features
ESD Yes 16
Material specification Plastic; PA (suitable for use in
an EPA) 17
Dimensions
Length l mm 3000 18
Dimensions
19
L = 3000+30
4,5±0,2
20
3,5±0,2
21
5
22
6
23
27660
24
27660

Profile connector
Profile connector

profile joint
units and SP 2/R section profiles
Delivery notes
Scope of delivery
▶▶ Profile connector, screws
Technical data
Features
Dimensions
0
18
00013291
00013291

QV 2 cross connector 1
3
4
track width
▶▶ Can be combined with all SP 2/... section profiles
5
10
11
12
The cross connectors serve to connect the conveyor 13

section profiles.
14
Formula for calculating the number of cross
connectors needed 15
AQV = (l/2000 mm) + 1 16
17
I = section length 18
Delivery notes
19
Scope of delivery
20
21
22
23
24

of transport 640; 800; 1040; 1200
160 … 12001
1
0
00
≤2
b
l
00013202
Technical data
Features
Dimensions
b
–
7
5
00013292

QV 2-H cross connector 1
3
4
track width
5
10
11
12
QV 2-H cross connectors are particularly suitable for 13

systems. 14
Formula for calculating the number of cross 15

connectors needed
16
AQV = (l/2000 mm) + 1
17
AQV = number of cross connectors 18

I = section length
19
Delivery notes
Scope of delivery
20
21
22
23
24

of transport 640; 800; 1040; 1200
160 … 12001
1
000
≤2
b
l
26857
Technical data
Features
Dimensions
b
–
7
5
00125184

ST 2/R-...-W maintenance section
ST 2/R-...-W maintenance section 1
3
lubrication)
4
▶▶ Suitable for accumulation roller chains
5
▶▶ ST 2/R-W suitable for ST 2/R section profiles
▶▶ ST 2/R-H-W suitable for ST 2/R-H section profiles
6
10
11
12
The maintenance section is a section element with disassembly, lubrication) of the accumulation roller chain 13
removable caps. It is used for maintenance (assembly, conveyor medium.
14
Delivery notes
▶▶ 2x maintenance section elements consisting of ST 2/R- ▶▶ 4x side cover
100 section profiles, FP 2/R guide profiles and GP 2/R ▶▶ 8x profile connector 16
glide profiles ▶▶ Incl. fastening material
17
Product designation Delivery unit Material number 18
ST 2/R-W maintenance section 2 3842532778
ST 2/R-H-W maintenance section 2 3842537319 19
Technical data
20
Material number 3842532778 3842537319
Features 21
ESD Yes Yes
Material specification Section profile: Aluminum, Section profile: Aluminum, natural; 22
natural; anodized anodized
Side cover: Polyethylene Side cover: Polyethylene
23
Dimensions
Length l mm 400 400
24

ST 2/R-...-W maintenance section
Dimensions
ST 2/R-W maintenance section
200
100 57
107
400 45
580
30126
ST 2/R-H-W maintenance section
100 200 62
107
400 50
500
27654
27654

Accumulation roller chain with PA accumulation rollers
Accumulation roller chain with PA accumulation rollers 1
3
▶▶ Conveyor medium for the workpiece pallets
4
▶▶ For use in conjunction with ST 2/R and ST 2/R-H
conveyor units
5
▶▶ Delivered in units of 12000 mm. Lengths of l > 12000
mm can be produced by connecting several
accumulation roller chains using master links. 6
▶▶ Chains are available with small parts protection (= filler
pieces in the accumulation roller chain prevent small 7
parts from pinching)
8
Note: Reversible operation is not possible in conjunction
with small parts protection. 9
10
11
12
1 Accumulation roller chain with PA accumulation rollers 13

2 Accumulation roller chain with PA accumulation rollers and small
parts protection
14
Delivery notes 15
Scope of delivery
▶▶ Units up to 12000 mm, incl. 1x master link 16
Accumulation roller chain with PA accumulation rollers 3842523918 18
Accumulation roller chain with PA accumulation rollers and small parts protection 3842536268
19
Technical data
Material number 3842523918 3842536268 20
Features
ESD Yes Yes 21
Material specification Accumulation roller chains: Accumulation roller chains: PA 12
PA 12 Small parts protection: PA 12
22
Dimensions
Length l mm 12000 12000 23
24

Accumulation roller chain with PA accumulation rollers
PA12
00013261
Dimensions
lUM lAS
lS
UM 2 AS 2
00126838
The required chain length is determined using the Length of the conveyor medium for accumulation
following formula. roller chain
00126838
lUM 2/C-170 = 310 mm

lR = 2 x lS + lAS + lUM
lUM 2/C-60 = 150 mm
lAS = 625 mm
lR= length of accumulation roller chain

lS = length of the section profile
lUM = length of the conveyor medium at the return unit
Accumulation roller chain with steel accumulation rollers
Accumulation roller chain with steel accumulation rollers St

1
3
▶▶ Conveyor medium for the workpiece pallets
4
▶▶ For use in conjunction with ST 2/R and ST 2/R-H
conveyor units
5
▶▶ Delivered in units of 12000 mm. Lengths of
l > 12,000 mm can be produced by connecting several
accumulation roller chains using master links. 6
pieces in the accumulation roller chain prevent small 7
parts from pinching)
8
with small parts protection. 9
10
11
12
1 Accumulation roller chain with steel accumulation rollers 13

2 Accumulation roller chain with steel accumulation rollers and small
parts protection
14
Delivery notes 15
Scope of delivery
▶▶ Units up to 12000 mm, incl. 1x master link 16
Accumulation roller chain with steel accumulation rollers 3842530864 18
Accumulation roller chain with steel accumulation rollers and small parts protection 3842536270
19
Technical data
Material number 3842530864 3842536270 20
Features
ESD Yes Yes 21
Material specification Accumulation roller chains: Accumulation roller chains: Steel
Steel Small parts protection: PA 12
(suitable for use in an EPA) 22
Dimensions
23
Length l mm 12000 12000
24

Accumulation roller chain with steel accumulation rollers
PA12
00013261
Dimensions
lUM lAS
lS
UM 2 AS 2
00126838
00126838
lUM 2/C-170 = 310 mm

lR = 2 x lS + lAS + lUM
lUM 2/C-60 = 150 mm
lAS = 625 mm

lS = length of the section profile
Master link for accumulation roller chain
Master link for accumulation roller chain 1
3
▶▶ For locking the accumulation roller chain after insertion
in conveyor section element
4
▶▶ Suitable for all accumulation roller chains except the
Vplus accumulation roller chain
5

9
Master link for accumulation roller chain 3842530417
Technical data 10

Features
11
ESD Yes
Material specification Accumulation roller chains: Steel 12
Small parts protection: PA 12
(suitable for use in an EPA)
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Acceleration element
Acceleration element
▶▶ For accelerated transport of a workpiece pallet to

a stop gate
▶▶ The acceleration element is used in conjunction with the
accumulation roller chain conveyor medium with
steel rollers.
▶▶ Accumulation operation not permitted
▶▶ Installation in sections after the stop gate
▶▶ Suitable for retrofitting
The support wheels of the chain elements are lifted and roll the workpiece pallet with a peripheral speed of vU = 2 x vN.
frictionally engaged between the acceleration element and This may be limited in oily environments.
Delivery notes
▶▶ Not assembled
SP 2/R Product designation Packaging unit Material number
2 x vN SP 2/R acceleration 2 3842536382

element
vN
120
130
SP 2/R-H
2 x vN Product designation Packaging unit Material number
vN
SP 2/R-H acceleration 2 38425376151
element
1
Use with WT 2/F on request
126
Ø6H13
00125215
Technical data
Material number 3842536382 3842537615
Features
ESD Yes Yes
Material specification PE; abrasion-resistant PE; abrasion-resistant

RB 2/UM roller track set
RB 2/UM roller track set 1
3
▶▶ Mounted roller section for mounting on AS 2/B or
UM 2/B for transverse conveying
4
▶▶ Additional workpiece pallet support on the front
transition from AS 2/B to UM 2/B or from AS 2/B or
5
UM 2/B to a lift transverse unit
▶▶ One set is required for each AS 2/B or UM 2/B
6
▶▶ Required for workpiece pallet lengths of 160 mm;
recommended for longer lengths
▶▶ Without drive 7
▶▶ Can be combined with WT 2/E, WT 2, WT 2/F 8
10
11
12
Delivery notes 13
▶▶ Set (containing 2x roller track, 2x guide profile, ▶▶ Fully assembled 14
2x fastening kit)
15
RB 2/UM 2 roller track set Set 3842558657
17
Technical data
Features
Material specification Track: Aluminum 19
Rollers: Steel
20
21
22
23
24

RB 2/UM roller track set
30267
Dimensions
Ø13
25
11,3
40,5 7,5 7,5

47 33,0
22,3
9,5
52,0
29408

Chain breaker for accumulation roller chain
Chain breaker for accumulation roller chain 1
3
▶▶ Makes it easier to open and disassemble the
accumulation roller chain
4
▶▶ Turning the thread pin pushes out a chain bolt and the
chain can be removed
5
10
11
12
The thread pin has a hexagonal fixture acting as a lever arm the exact positioning of the chain links. 13
for a size 13 hexagonal wrench Grooves are provided for
14
Delivery notes
16
Product designation Material number 17
Chain breaker for accumulation roller chain 8981010511
18
Technical data
Features
Material specification Steel; hardened 20
21
22
23
24

Vplus accumulation roller chain Vplus
Vplus accumulation roller chain – transportation speed over distance
2,5
[ VT / VN ]
2,0
1,5
1,0
0,5
0 0,5 1,0 1,5 [m]
Beschl-Vplus.eps
vN  Nominal speed
vT  Max. transportation speed
With the Vplus accumulation roller chain, the workpiece If conveying speeds over 18 m/min are to be attained with
pallet attains conveying speeds to the factor of 2.5 higher the Vplus chain, the resulting higher dynamic loads on the
than the nominal chain speed. entire system must be taken into account.
Please contact your Rexroth specialist if in any doubt.
Smoother running and less wear can thus be achieved by
using drives with lower chain speeds with the Vplus Workpiece pallets with PE wear pads must be used on the
accumulation roller chain. Vplus accumulation roller chain. The maximum permissible
section load is 1.5 kg/cm.
Another benefit of the Vplus accumulation roller chain is the
acceleration effect: after each processing station, the Vplus planning advice 3-193
conveying speed is picked up quickly without requiring any
additional internal elements.
As a rule, dampened stop gates and dampers are

recommended.

Longitudinal conveyor| TS 2plus 7.03-193
Vplus planning advice
Vplus planning advice Vplus

1
3
The Vplus accumulation roller chain can mathematically The system must be adjusted to the significantly higher
reach a transportation speed that is 2.5 times the nominal kinetic energy of the workpiece pallet:
4
speed of the conveyor medium. –– Dampers and dampened stop gates must be designed
for the mathematical transportation speed.
5
In practice: –– Before entering a curve, ensure that the
–– The weight of the workpiece pallet transportation speed is max. 18 m/min.
–– The lubrication and wear of the chain 6
–– The length of the acceleration section
Can cause transportation speeds that are typically up to 7
2.5 times the nominal speed of the conveyor medium.
8
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24



BS 2/R-V belt sections Vplus 3-196 1
1200 kg
2
Parts for AS 2/..., UM 2/..., ST 2... Vplus 3-200

4
conveyor units

7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

BS 2/R-V-1200 belt section
BS 2/R-V-1200 belt section Vplus
1200 kg
▶▶ Functional operation conveyor complete with drive for

high workpiece pallet speeds
▶▶ Conveyor medium: Vplus accumulation roller chain
protection
terminal box
The belt section is a ready-to-use conveyor section with Note: On the Vplus chain, the workpiece pallet attains a
built-in drive for the transportation of workpiece pallets in speed up to the factor of 2.5 higher than that of the chain.
the longitudinal direction or for the transverse conveying of Special requirements must therefore be observed for chain
the workpiece pallet between parallel conveyor sections in speeds > 9 m/min!
connection with two HQ 2 lift transverse units.
Accessories
▶▶ SZ 2/...-H leg sets, see p. 6-2
Delivery notes

1
b (mm) Track width in direction 400 ... 1200 2
of transport
l (mm) Length 650 ... 6000 3

vN (m/min) Nominal speed of the 01); 6; 9; 12; 15; 182)
chain
4
b U (V) Voltage See motor data, p. 11-24ff
5
S = cable/plug
RV = 1 K = terminal box 6
l
R = right 7
L = left
M = center
8
RV Reversible operation 0; 1
No reversible operation
(RV = 0) 9
Reversible operation
(RV = 1)
10
00125189
KT Chain type 2; 4
Accumulation roller
chain with steel 11
(KT = 2)
Accumulation roller 12
chain with steel
accumulation rollers and
13
small parts protection
(KT = 4)
1)
2)
15
Technical data
Load
operation
Features
18
ESD Yes
Material specification Glide profile: Steel;
19
corrosion-resistant
Small parts protection: Steel
20
Dimensions
Length l mm 650 ... 6000
21
22
23
24

Dimensions
I
170 A 280
7
107
240
A
A–A b
40
100
107
b – 75
(MA = L)
b + 25
(MA = M)
b + 40
b
b + 182
70
105
Ø 160
70
MA = R
430
30127
30127


10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Vplus
Conveyor units Vplus accumulation roller

chain conveyor medium
UM 2/R-V-170
3842538869
3842538870
3842528746
ST 2/R-V
AS 2/R-V-1200
AS 2/R-V-220
SZ 2
A conveyor unit is a complete unit used for linear conveying The UM 2/R-V and AS 2/R-V may be set up right next to
of workpiece pallets. It consists of: each other, which allows for conveyor unit combinations.
▶▶ AS 2/R-V drive module, see p. 3-202
▶▶ UM 2/R-V return unit, see p. 3-208 The drive modules are designed for section loads up to
▶▶ ST 2/R-V... sections, see p. 3-210 mG = 2200 kg per conveyor unit.
▶▶ QV 2... cross connector, see p. 3-216
▶▶ Vplus accumulation roller chain, see p. 3-192


AS 2/R-V drive module Vplus 3-202 1
1200 kg 2200 kg
2
UM 2/R-V-170 return unit Vplus 3-208 4
ST 2/R-V section, components Vplus 3-210

7
Accumulation roller chain conveyor medium, Vplus 3-222

10
accessories
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

AS 2/R-V-1200 drive module
AS 2/R-V-1200 drive module Vplus
1200 kg

▶▶ For use in conjunction with ST 2/R-V sections and
ST 2/R-V-170 return units
terminal box
The AS 2/R-V-1200 drive module drives the conveyor Note: On the Vplus chain, the workpiece pallet attains a
medium Vplus accumulation roller chain in self-built speed up to the factor of 2.5 higher than that of the chain.
conveyor sections with sections, return units and Vplus Special requirements must therefore be observed for chain
accumulation roller chains. speeds > 9 m/min!
Accessories
Delivery notes

1
AS 2/R-V-1200 b (mm) Track width in direction 400; 480; 640; 800; 2
MA = R of transport 1040; 1200
b
400 … 12001 3
vN (m/min) Nominal speed of the 02; 6; 9; 12; 15; 183
chain
4
5
S = cable/plug
K = terminal box 6
R = right 7
L = left
M = center
8
MA = R 1)
2)
3)
M L
10
30097
Technical data 11
Load 12
operation 13
Features
ESD Yes 14
length*
*
Formula for calculating the conveyor medium, see p. 3-223 16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Dimensions
375 b
360
280
7
40
247
240
196
Ø160
215
153
(MA = L)
70
b + 40
b
b + 181,5
(MA = M)
70
MA = R
78,5
Ø160
63
60
430
00013276

AS 2/R-V-2200 drive module Vplus

1
2200 kg
2
3
4
5
terminal box
6
10
11
12
The AS 2/R-V-2200 drive module drives the conveyor Note: On the Vplus chain, the workpiece pallet attains a 13
medium Vplus accumulation roller chain in self-built speed up to the factor of 2.5 higher than that of the chain.
conveyor sections with section, return unit and Vplus Special requirements must therefore be observed for chain 14
accumulation roller chain. speeds > 9 m/min!
15
Accessories 16
Delivery notes 18
20
21
22
23
24

b (mm) Track width in 400; 480; 640; 800;
direction of transport 1040; 1200
AS 2/R-V-2200
MA=R 400 … 12001
b
vN (m/min) Nominal speed of the 02; 6; 9; 12; 15; 183
chain

S = cable/plug
K = terminal box
R = right
L = left
M = center
MA = R 1)
2)
3)
M L
30098
Technical data
Load
operation
Features
ESD Yes
length*
*

Dimensions
1
375 b
2
360
280
3
7
4
40
240
5
504
7
9
Ø152
216 10
11
(MA = L) 12
13
70 14
b + 40
15
b
(MA = M)
16
MA = R
70
17
105
181
18
Ø152
19
498,3
00013277 20
21
22
23
24

UM 2/R-V-170 return unit
UM 2/R-V-170 return unit Vplus

▶▶ For use with all AS 2/R-V drive modules
▶▶ Version with pinion for return unit
The return unit is used for constructing conveyor units. It Note: On the Vplus chain, the workpiece pallet attains a
guides the conveyor medium at the end of the conveyor unit speed up to the factor of 2.5 higher than that of the chain.
back to the drive module. Special requirements must therefore be observed for chain
speeds > 9 m/min!
Delivery notes
▶▶ Incl. all fastening material to mount on the ST 2 section
UM 2/R-V-170 return unit 3842536803
Technical data
Features
ESD Yes
length*
*

UM 2/R-V-170 return unit
Dimensions
1
170 b
2
7
4
100
70 7
8
20
70
10
00013279
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

ST 2/R-V section
ST 2/R-V section Vplus
▶▶ Section profile in especially sturdy design for section

loads of up to 30% higher
The section is used for the construction of conveyor units

in conjunction with the Vplus accumulation roller chain with
the AS 2/R-V drive module and the UM 2/R-V return unit
Accessories
▶▶ Adapter plate kit, see p. 3-214 ▶▶ SZ 2/...-H leg sets, see p. 6-2
Delivery notes
▶▶ 2x SP 2/R-H section profile ▶▶ Fully assembled
▶▶ 2x FP 2/H-St guide profile
▶▶ 4x GP 2/H-St glide profile (in a different mounting
position)

ST 2/R-V section
FP 2/H-St 1
GP 2/H-St
2
5
00130153
6
SP 2/R-H l (mm) Length 200 … 6000
7
Steel glide profile
AO = 0; 1; 2 8
FP 2/H-St
GP Glide profile corro- 1
sion-resistant 9
steel (GP = 1)
10
11
l
GP 2/H-St A0
0 12
5
FP 2/H-St 13
1
5 5
14
2
00130142 15
Technical data 16
Features 17
ESD Yes
Material specification Section profile: Aluminum; 18

anodized
corrosion-resistant 19
Glide profile: Steel;
corrosion-resistant
20
Dimensions
Length l mm 200 … 6000 21
22
23
24

ST 2/R-V section
Dimensions
b
47
40
10
25
107
20
60
22,5
50 b – 75
b + 25
00130150
00125201


1
3
4
10
11
12
Cover rail for cable duct 10 3842523258 14
Technical data 15
Features 16
Dimensions 17
Length l mm 2000
18
19
20
21
22
30292
23
24

ST 2/R-V adapter plate kit
ST 2/R-V adapter plate kit Vplus

▶▶ For connecting SP 2/R-H section profiles and AS 2/R-V
drive modules, for connecting SP 2/R-H section profiles
and UM 2/R-V-170 return units;
profiles are used
The adapter plates are used as front covers and for The adapter plates are also suitable for use between
section profiles and return units.
Delivery notes
Scope of delivery
▶▶ 2x left adapter plate
ST 2/R-V adapter plate kit 4 3842536802
Technical data
Features
ESD Yes

Profile connector
Profile connector 1
3
4
profile joint
5
▶▶ For use with all AS 2/R-V drive modules, UM 2/R-V return
units and SP 2/R-H section profiles
6
Delivery notes 8
Scope of delivery
▶▶ Profile connector, screws 9

11
Technical data 12
Features 13
14
Dimensions
15
18
0 16
17
18
00013291 19
00013291
20
21
22
23
24


track width
The cross connectors serve to connect the conveyor

section profiles.

connectors needed
AQV = (l/2000 mm) + 1

I = section length
Delivery notes
Scope of delivery

1
of transport 640; 800; 1040; 1200
160 … 12001 3
1
0
00
≤2 4
b
5
8
l
10
00013202
Technical data 11
Features 12
13
Dimensions
14
15
16
17
b
–
7
5
18
19
20
21
22
00013292
23
24


track width
QV 2-H cross connectors are particularly suitable for

systems.

connectors needed
AQV = (l/2000 mm) + 1

I = section length
Delivery notes
Scope of delivery

1
of transport 640; 800; 1040; 1200
160 … 12001 3
1
0
00
≤2 4
b
5
8
l
10
26857
Technical data 11
Features 12
13
Dimensions
14
15
16
17
b
–
7
5
18
19
20
21
22
00125184
23
24

ST 2/R-V-W maintenance section
ST 2/R-V-W maintenance section Vplus

lubrication)
▶▶ Suitable for Vplus accumulation roller chains
▶▶ Suitable for SP 2/R-H section profiles
The maintenance section is a section element with disassembly, lubrication) of the Vplus accumulation
removable caps. It is used for maintenance (assembly, roller chain.
Delivery notes
Scope of delivery
▶▶ 2x maintenance section element consisting of ST 2/R-H ▶▶ 4x side cover
section profile, FP 2/H-ST guide profile and GP 2/H-Kst ▶▶ 8x profile connector
glide profile ▶▶ Fastening material
ST 2/R-V-W maintenance section 3842537320
Technical data
Features
ESD Yes
Material specification Section profile: Aluminum, natural;
anodized
Side cover: Polyethylene
Dimensions
Length l mm 400

Dimensions
1
3
100 200 62
5
107
7
400 50
500
8
9
27654
10
27654
11
12
13
0
40
14
15
16
00116764.eps
17
18
19
20
00012908
21
22
23
24

Vplus accumulation roller chain Vplus
▶▶ Conveyor medium for the workpiece pallets in the

TS 2plus system
▶▶ Can be combined with ST 2/R-V and ST 2/R-H
conveyor units
▶▶ Delivered in units of 12000 mm. Lengths of l
> 12000 mm can be produced by connecting several
accumulation roller chains using master links.
pieces in the Vplus accumulation roller chain prevent
small parts from pinching)

with small parts protection.
1 Accumulation roller chain with steel accumulation rollers

2 Accumulation roller chain with steel accumulation rollers and small
parts protection
Note: On the Vplus accumulation roller chain, the factor of 2.5 higher than that of the chain. Special
workpiece pallet can attain a speed up to a requirements must therefore be observed for chain speeds
> 9 m/min!
Delivery notes
Scope of delivery
▶▶ Units up to 12000 mm, incl. 1x master link
Vplus accumulation roller chain with steel accumulation rollers 3842538869
Vplus accumulation roller chains with steel accumulation rollers and small parts protection 3842538870
Technical data
Material number 3842538869 3842538870
Features
ESD Yes Yes
Material specification Rollers: Steel Rollers: Steel
Small parts protection: PA 12
Dimensions
Length l mm 12000 12000

6
1
7
8
2
9
PA12
00130140
10
Dimensions
11
lUM lAS 12
13
lS
UM 2 AS 2
14
15
16
17
18
19
00126838
20
21
00126838
lUM 2/C-170 = 310 mm

lR = 2 x lS + lAS + lUM 22
lUM 2/C-60 = 150 mm
lAS = 625 mm
23
lS = length of the section profile 24

Master link for Vplus accumulation roller chain
Master link for Vplus accumulation roller chain Vplus
▶▶ To close the Vplus accumulation roller chain after

insertion in conveyor section element
▶▶ Only suitable for Vplus accumulation roller chains
Master link for Vplus accumulation roller chain 3842538872
Technical data
Features
ESD Yes
00130146

Chain breaker for Vplus accumulation roller chain
Chain breaker for Vplus accumulation roller chain Vplus

1
3
▶▶ For disassembly of Vplus accumulation roller chains
▶▶ Makes it easier to open and disassemble the Vplus
4
accumulation roller chain.
▶▶ Turning the thread pin pushes out a chain bolt and the
5
chain can be removed
10
11
12
Delivery notes 13
Chain breaker for Vplus accumulation roller chain 3842539357 16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

LG 2/H lift gate
LG 2/H lift gate
▶▶ Can be used for BS 2, BS 2/C-100, BS 2/R-300 belt

sections and for combinations of section ST 2/C-H
(ST 2/R-H), drive AS 2/C-100 (AS 2/R-300) and return
unit UM 2/C-60 (UM 2/R-60)
▶▶ From width b = 240 mm up to b = 1200 mm
▶▶ For passage width (A) 600 ... 1800 mm
▶▶ In open position (85°), locked
▶▶ Mechanical unlocking, optionally with pneumatic
unlocking (PN kit)
▶▶ Safety switch in off position
▶▶ Can be used as transverse section
Note:
▶▶ The length of the belt section (lBS) is the passage width
plus 500 mm
▶▶ The total required space of the LG 2/H is the passage
width plus 535 mm
Accessories
▶▶ 1x BS 2 belt section, see p. 3-6, or conveyor unit
▶▶ 2x SZ 2 leg set, see p. 6-6
▶▶ 2x 4 45x60 strut profile, see p. 3-232
▶▶ 16x 45x45 bracket, see p. 3-232
▶▶ 2x foundation bracket, see p. 3-231 and 6-28
▶▶ PN kit, see p. 3-232
Delivery notes
Scope of delivery
▶▶ Mounting kit with gas pressure springs, attachment kit,
locking and safety switch
The LG 2/H lift gate provides access or passage to the inner 0°. The effort required to do this is reduced with the aid of
spaces of a belt section (BS). Manually tilting the belt a gas pressure spring.
section can open it from 0° to 85° or close it from 85° to

LG 2/H lift gate
Overall width of the different lift gate assembly variants 1
Lift gate interfering contours

2
A: b WT ≥ 160 mm; MA = M The total width results from the belt section width (b),
the motor width (M) and other interfering contours
3
bsz = bWT + 135

(e.g., locking bolts for unlocking, etc.).
b + 196
The requirements for other interfering contours are
b
4
specified in the dimension drawings on the left.
In addition, the workpiece pallet width need not be taken
5
into account.
Overall width/obtruding parts 6

62
56
X Y Belt section M (mm)

45
51
7
B BS 2 154.0
B: b WT ≥ 320 mm; MA = R; L bsz = bWT – 105
BS 2/C-100 158.5
8
BS 2/R-300 158.5
ST 2/C-H 158.5
9
ST 2/R-H 158.5
b + 115
C BS 2 154.0
b
BS 2/C-100 158.5
10
BS 2/R-300 158.5
11
M
ST 2/C-H 158.5
ST 2/R-H 158.5
12
C: b WT = 240 mm; MA = R; L Passage width A
If both plates are mounted outside of the belt section, the 13
51
45
X Y
minimum width of the workpiece pallet is bWT = 240 mm.
62
56
14
bsz = bWT
Passage width B
If both plates are mounted in the center of the belt section,
86
15
79
the minimum width of the workpiece pallet is

bWT = 320 mm. 16
b
For mounting a locking bolt (not included) or mounting the

PN locking mechanism bWT = 320 mm.
M
17
358 734-20
The following applies to the BS 2: When MA = M and b = 160 mm, the max. Passage width C 18
section load is only 30 kg If one plate is mounted in outside or inside of the belt
section, the minimum width of the workpiece pallet is
19
bWT = 240 mm.
20
21
22
23
24

LG 2/H lift gate
Selection of the LG 2/H mounting kit for the ▶▶ 3. Use this reference number from the "LG 2/H mounting
belt section type kit" table to identify the correct mounting kit (see p. 4)
▶▶ 1. Select the appropriate table for your belt section Note:

type. ▶▶ The length of the belt section (lBS) is the passage width
▶▶ 2. Determine the LG 2/H mounting kit reference number, plus 500 mm
which can be worked out from the workpiece pallet ▶▶ The total required space of the LG 2/H is the passage
width bWT and the feed width (A = lBS – 500) width plus 535 mm
BS 2 BS 2 C-100
Passage Width of workpiece pallet bWT Passage Width of workpiece pallet bWT
width A width A
160 240 320 400 480 640 800 1040 1200 160 240 320 400 480 640 800 1040 1200
600 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 600 x *
1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2
700 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 700 x* 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
800 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 800 x *
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
900 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 900 x* 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3
1000 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 1000 x *
2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3
1100 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 1100 x* 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
1200 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 1200 x* 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
1300 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1300 x *
3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4
1400 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1400 x* 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5
1500 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1500 x *
4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5
1600 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 1600 x* 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5
1700 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 1700 x* 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
1800 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 1800 x *
5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6
x* Mounting not possible
BS 2 R-300 ks BS 2 R-300 st

width A width A
160 240 320 400 480 640 800 1040 1200 160 240 320 400 480 640 800 1040 1200
600 x *
2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 600 x *
2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3
700 x* 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 700 x* 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3
800 x* 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 800 x* 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
900 x *
2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 900 x *
3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4
1000 x* 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 1000 x* 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4
1100 x *
3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 1100 x *
3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5
1200 x* 3 3 3 3 4 4 5 5 1200 x* 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5
1300 x* 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 1300 x* 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5
1400 x *
4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 1400 x *
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
1500 x* 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 1500 x* 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6
1600 x *
5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 1600 x *
5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6
1700 x* 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 1700 x* 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
1800 x* 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 1800 x* 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
x Mounting not possible
*
x Mounting not possible
*

LG 2/H lift gate
Conveyor unit Conveyor unit

1
ST 2/C-H + AS 2/C-100 + UM 2/C-60 ST 2/R-H + AS 2/R-300 + UM 2/R-60 (st)
2
width width
A A
160 240 320 400 480 640 800 1040 1200 160 240 320 400 480 640 800 1040 1200
3
600 x* 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 600 x* 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
700 x* 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 700 x* 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4
4
800 x*
3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 800 x* 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4
900 x* 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 900 x* 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4
5
1000 x*
4 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 1000 x*
4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5
1100 x* 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 1100 x* 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
6
1200 x*
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 1200 x*
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5
1300 x* 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 1300 x* 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6
7
1400 x* 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 1400 x* 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6
1500 x* 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 1500 x* 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6
8
1600 x*
6 6 6 6 6 6 6 7 1600 x* 6 6 6 6 6 6 7 7
1700 x* 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 1700 x* 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 7
1800 x*
6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 1800 x* 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 7
9
x* Mounting not possible x* Mounting not possible
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

LG 2/H lift gate
0 LG 2/H mounting kit
40
BS ▶▶ Determine the LG 2/H mounting kit reference number
hsz + 40
using the tables and the description “Selection of the LG
2/H mounting kit for the belt section type” on page
5 30 3-228f.
A + 500 The reference number is also the mounting kit number.
175 A 325 For example, if the reference number is 2, the mounting
kit number is also 2.
Minimum length of the leg connection:

Minimum length B/C Connection
(mm)
145*) BS 2 return unit

A + 535 hsz
H
175* )
UM 2/C-60, UM 2/R-60
245 BS 2 drive
285 AS 2/C-100, AS 2/C-250, AS 2/R-300, AS
2/R-700, UM 2/C-170, UM 2/R-170
B C
26800 395 AS 2/C-400, AS 2/C-700, AS 2/R-1200, AS
2/R-220
*) Optimal leg connection for ideal support: 220 mm

Required accessories: Recommended accessories:
▶▶ 1x BS 2 belt section, see p. 3-6, or conveyor unit ▶▶ PN kit for unlocking in the top end position, see p. 3-232
▶▶ 2x SZ 2 leg set, see p. 6-6
▶▶ 2x 4 45x60 strut profile, see p. 3-232
▶▶ 16x 45x45 bracket, see p. 3-232
▶▶ 2x foundation bracket, see p. 3-231
LG 2/H mounting kit Packaging unit Material number
1 1 3842549511
2 1 3842549512
3 1 3842549513
4 1 3842549514
5 1 3842549515
6 1 3842549516
7 1 3842549517

LG 2/H lift gate
Belt section of l = A + 500

1
Select the length (l) of the belt section (BS).
l = A + 500 mm, according to the ambient system:
2
▶▶ BS 2, see p 3-6
▶▶ BS 2/C-100, see p. 3-55
3
▶▶ BS 2/R-300 plastic chain and steel chain, see p. 3-122
▶▶ Conveyor unit: ST 2/R-H (see p. 3-161), AS 2/R-300
4
(see p. 3-136), UM 2/R-60 (see p. 3-148)
▶▶ Conveyor unit: ST 2/C-H (see p. 3-91), AS 2/C-100
5
26801
(see p. 3-68), UM 2/C-60 (see p. 3-80)
To construct a lift gate, you need: 6

–– One SZ 2 leg set (3842996320) with AO = profile
height of a BS 2 7
–– One SZ 2 leg set with parameters, see table below:
AO = 60 mm and leg set width bSZ 8
BS 2 SZ 21 leg sets Material number 9

A b ≥ 160, bSZ3 = b4 + 120, 3842996320
MA = M AO2) = 60 mm
10
B b ≥ 320, bSZ3 = b4 – 120, 3842996320
MA = L; R AO2)= 60 mm
C b = 240 b = b4 3842996320 11
MA = L; R AO = 60 mm
2)
1)
See also p. 6-7 12
2)
AO = installation location
3)
bSZ = width b for leg
4)
b = width of belt section 13
See also p. 3-227:
For A: If both plates are mounted outside of the belt section
14
For B: If both plates are mounted in the middle of the belt section
26802 For C: If one plate is mounted outside or inside the belt section
15
Foundation bracket 20 3842146848 17
See also p. 6-28
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

LG 2/H lift gate
ø Floor dowel 100 3842526560
l2
See also p. 6-30

L
l1
00109714
45x60 Ordering information

x
A = 11,0 cm2 Material number 3842990570
lx = 37,2 cm4 B
ly = 22,7 cm4 l (mm) 15 ... 5600
y
Wx = 12,4 cm3 A C Packaging unit 1
45
Wy = 10,1 cm3
m = 3,0 kg/m Note: Determine the required length/number of strut profiles up to
D the next leg set according to your needs.
30
10 10
45 60
19433
45/45 10
45/45 bracket set 1 3842523561
18
Scope of delivery: Incl. fastening material
9,5 8,7
18,7
Technical data
41
Features
34,5
45
ESD Yes
Dimensions
45 41 43 Groove 10/10
5
00109431
PN kit 1 3842549509
26803

LG 2/H lift gate
Safety switch ▶▶ Connection of safety switch: 10-pin socket, cable with

1
plug not included
▶▶ Activator locking type: inserted
2
Technical data
3
Features
Safety switch STA3A-2131A024L024BHA10C2090
4
IP rating IP 65
Material specification Housing: Die-cast aluminum alloy
5
Actuation/extraction/retention force N 35; 30; 20
6
Max. closing force N 3000
Closing force Fzh as per testing N 2300
principle GS-ET-19 7
Actuation frequency 1/h 1200

8
Switching functions *
1 Mechanically locked.
2 Unlocked by applying a voltage.
3 Opened when the activator is pulled. 9
10
Solenoid operating voltage 10% AC/DC V 24
Operating time ED % 100
11
Connection power W 8
Connection type BHA10 integrated plug (9-pin + PE)
Approvals CE, UL, CCC 12
*
See also “Switching function” on page 3-235
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

LG 2/H lift gate
Dimensions
Note on direction of actuation:
After undoing the fastening
screws, you can switch the
fastening knob to the desired
30 direction of approach.
4
41,5
35,5 0,5
1
M20x1,5 (3x)
2
190
144
RD
ON
22
30
4
5 Z 30
46,5 40
9 D
6 4
Z
7 8 1
A
6 10 9 2
5 3
4
16
C 0,5
B
33024
1 d = 5.3 (4x) for M5x35 mm ISO 1207/100 47 4 Integrated plug

2 Auxiliary release 5 M20x1.5 screw plug (2x)
3 Locking screw 6 BHA10 integrated plug, not aligned
Circuit diagrams
LED
RD 3 41
33
42
34
4
5 21 22
6
1 11 12
2
10
LED 9
GN
33022

LG 2/H lift gate
Plug assignment; MR10 socket plug, 10-pin

1
2
7 8 1
6 10 9 2
3
5 3 4
4
5
33021
1 OG 6 OG/BK 6
2 BU 7 RD
3 WH/BK 8 GN/YE 7
4 RD/BK 9 BK
5 GN/BL 10 WH
8
Switching function
9
Activator Inserted Inserted Pulled
Switch position Locked Unlocked
Schaltfunktionen
Schaltfunktionen Open
Schaltfunktionen
10
762 1 2 3
Betätiger Betätiger
gesteckt
Betätiger gestecktgesteckt
gesteckt gesteckt gesteckt gezogen gezogen gezogen
Schalterstellung: Schalterstellung: 1) Schaltfunktionen
verriegelt 1) Schaltfunktionen
2) Schaltfunktionen
entriegelt 2) 3) geöffnet 3) geöffnet 3)
verriegelt
Schalterstellung: entriegelt
verriegelt 1) geöffnet
entriegelt 2) 11
762 Betätiger 762 Betätiger
gesteckt
762Betätiger gesteckt
gesteckt gesteckt gesteckt gesteckt gezogen gezogen gezogen
Schalterstellung: verriegelt 1)
Schalterstellung: entriegelt1)2)
verriegelt 1)
verriegelt entriegelt 2)geöffnet 3)
entriegelt 2) geöffnet 3)geöffnet 3)
Schalterstellung: 12
762 762 762
13
E1 E1 E1
E1 E1 E1
E1 E2 E1 E2
E1 E2 E2 E2 E2
E2 E2 E2
14
E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1
E1 E2 E1 E1E2 E2
E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2
Typ Typ Typ 15
STA3-2131 STA3-2131 STA3-2131
41 42 41 41 42
41 42 42 41 42
4141 4242 41 42
41 42
STA4-2131 STA4-2131 STA4-2131
Schaltglied 33
Schaltglied 34 33 33 34
33 34 34 33 34
3333 3434 33 34
33 34
Typ Schaltglied
Typ
4)
3NCSTA3-2131
+1NO
Typ
3NC
4)
21
+1NOSTA3-2131 22
4) 21 21 22
21 22 22 21 22
2121 2222 21 22
21 22 16
STA3-2131 3NC +1NO
Contact element STA4-2131 11 41STA4-2131
STA4-2131 12 42 11 41 11 1241
41
42
11 12 4242 11
12 41 12
11 4241
41
11 1242 11
1242 41 41
1242
11 42
12
Schaltglied 33 34
Schaltglied +4)33
33
33
34 34
34 33 33
3433 3434 33 33
34 34
3NC* + 1NO Schaltglied
4) 2 Zwangsöffner 12 nacheilender
Zwangsöffner + 1 nacheilender
Öffner Öffner als Türmeldekontakt
als Türmeldekontakt
4) 2 Zwangsöffner
33023
4)
3NC +1NO 33023 3NC4)+1NO213NC4)+1NO 22 21 21
21
22 22 21+ 1 nacheilender
22 2221
21 Öffner
2222 als
21
Türmeldekontakt
21
22 22 17
33023
11 12 11 11
11
12 12 11
12 1211
11 1212 11 11
12 12
4) 2 Zwangsöffner 4) 2 Zwangsöffner
4) 2+Zwangsöffner
1 nacheilender
+ Öffner als
+ 1Türmeldekontakt
nacheilender
1 nacheilender Öffner als Öffner als Türmeldekontakt
Türmeldekontakt
33023 33023 33023
18
*
2x positively driven NC contacts + 1x delayed NC contact as a door monitoring contact 19
20
21
22
23
24

Connection kits for longitudinal conveyors
Use: For connecting the TS 2plus modules on a longitudinal

conveyor at the ends (end-to-end)
Return unit (return side)

UM 2/B UM 2/C-60 BS 2 BS 2/C KE 2 KU 2 CU 2
UM 2/C-170 BS 2/C-H
UM 2/R-60 BS 2/R
UM 2/R-170 BS 2/R-H
Drive (drive side)

AS 2/B-150, 38421795741 3842530871 3842518828 3842530871 3842518828 3842530871 3842518828
AS 2/-250
AS 2/C-100, 3842530871 3842529881 3842525110 3842179574 –2 3842179574 3842525110

AS 2/C-250, -or- -or-
KU 2/90, 3842529881 3842529881
KU 2/180
AS 2/C-400, 38421795741 3842530871 3842518828 3842530871 –2 3842530871 3842518828

AS 2/C-700
AS 2/R-300, 3842530871 3842529881 3842525110 3842179574 –2 3842179574 3842525110

AS 2/R-700 -or- -or-
3842529881 3842529881
AS 2/R-1200, 38421795741 3842530871 3842518828 3842530871 –2 3842530871 3842518828

AS 2/R-2200
BS 2 3842518828 3842525110 3842525110 3842525110 38425251103 3842525110 3842525110

BS 2/C 3842530871 3842529881 3842525110 3842179574 –2
3842179574 3842525110
BS 2/R -or- -or-
3842529881 3842529881
BS 2/C-H 38421795741 3842530871 3842518828 3842530871 –2 3842530871 3842518828

BS 2/R-H
KE 2/90 3842518828 –2 3842525110 –2 38425251103 –2 3842525110

KE 2/180
1
Included with UM 2/B
2
Connection not permitted
3
Included with KE 2
3842518828 3842525110 3842179574 3842529881 3842530871

M8x20 M8x60 M8x20
(4x) (2x)
(4x) M8x25 M8x25
(12x) (6x) (2x)
(4x)
(4x) N10 (2x)
2xM8
ISO 4017 (2x) ISO 4017
M8x8 M8
M8x25 M8 M8x25
(4x) (8x) M8x8
(4x) M8x40 (2x) MLF
(2x) (4x)
(2x) M8x12
21450
(4x) 21452
21448 21449 21451

Connection kits for transverse conveyors
Connection kits for transverse conveyors 1
Use: For connecting the TS 2plus module on a transverse

4
conveyor laterally (end-to-section), the following are
additionally required: Lift transverse unit
5
6
ST 2/B ST 2/C-H
SP 2/B ST 2/R-H
ST 2/B-100 ST 2/R-V 7
ST 2/C-100
ST 2/R-100
8
9
Transverse conveyor
AS 2/B-150, 3842518828 –
AS 2/B-250 10
AS 2/C-100, 3842528192 3842528192

AS 2/C-250 11
AS 2/C-400, 3842518828 3842518828
AS 2/C-700 12
AS 2/R-300, 3842528 192 3842528192
AS 2/R-700 13
AS 2/R-1200, 3842518828 3842518828
AS 2/R-2200 14
UM 2/B 3842518828 –
UM 2/C-60, UM 2/C-170, 3842528192 3842528192 15
UM 2/R-60, UM 2/R-170,
BS 2 3842525110 – 16
BS 2/C (drive side and return side) 3842528192 3842528192
BS 2/R (drive side and return side) 17
BS 2/C-H (drive side) 3842518828 3842518828
BS 2/R-H (drive side)
18
BS 2/C-H (return side) 3842528192 3842528192
BS 2/R-H (return side)
19
KU 2 (drive side and return side) 3842528192 3842528192
20
3842518828 3842528192 3842525110
M8x20 M8x60 21
(4x) M8x40 M8x25 (4x) M8x25
(4x) (4x) (6x)
(4x) 10 (12x) 22
(4x) (4x)
3
ISO 4017 (4x)
M8x8 M8 23
M8x25 10
(4x) (8x)
(4x) (4x) M8x40
M8 (8x) (2x) 24
21448 21453
21449


Curves | TS 2plus 7.04-1

Curves
1
Selection of curves 4-2 6
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

4-2 TS 2plus 7.0 | Curves

Selection of curves
Curves Connection kits
Curves are used to change the direction of a workpiece They are used for connecting curves and curve arcs.
pallet and to keep the orientation of the parts traveling
(the front is always the front). The pneumatic and electrical
installation and control effort for these modular units
is minimal.


Curves 4-4 1
Connection kits for longitudinal conveyor 4-40 4
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Curves
The following products are available for configuration for CU 2/90 curve
the curves:
Used with the toothed belt conveyor medium (suitable for
use in an EPA) without additional drive.
KE curves
Used with the round belt conveyor medium in KE 2/90 and

KE 2/180 versions with and without a built-in drive.
Can be used for combining the longitudinal section with
belts or toothed belts.
KU curves
Used with the flat top chain conveyor medium in KU 2/90

and KU 2/180 versions with and without a built-in drive and
conveyor medium.
KU curve arc
The construction principle of KU 2/O‑-90 and KU 2/0-180

curves with the flat top chain conveyor medium allows
smooth integration into longer conveyor units driven by a
single drive.
Note:
▶▶ For higher drive loads with integration of sections and
curves, please consider the layout design
▶▶ The use of an automatic lubrication unit for curves with
flat top chains is highly recommended


CU 2/90 curve 4-6 1

10
60 kg
2
KE 2/..., KE 2/O-... curves 4-9 4

20
5
KU 2/... curves 4-24

7
70 kg 90 kg
8
KU 2/O-...curve arcs 4-32

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

CU 2/90 curve
CU 2/90 curve
10
60 kg
▶▶ 90° curve conveying of the workpiece pallet

▶▶ With no additional drive for the curve function
▶▶ Max. total workpiece pallet weight = 10 kg
an EPA)
▶▶ Curve in anti-static version
▶▶ Can be combined with WT 2 and WT 2/F
Note: Accumulation operation not permitted in the curve.
The drive for CU 2/90 curves with the toothed belt

conveyor medium is provided by the belt section.
Accessories
▶▶ SZ 2 leg sets/..., see p. 6-2
▶▶ Accumulation pressure control, e.g., with WI/M rocker,
see p. 8-133
Delivery notes
▶▶ Belt section ▶▶ Partially assembled
▶▶ Inner guide
▶▶ Outer guide
▶▶ Fastening material
▶▶ Connection kit 3842538259

CU 2/90 curve
1
b (mm) Track width in 240; 320 2
direction of transport
lT (mm) Length in direction of 240; 320; 400 3

transport
l (mm) Length 721 ... 6000

4
l KR = R w x ld x l Combination options 240 x 240 x 721 ... 6000
(mm x mm x 240 x 320 x 801 ... 6000
mm) 320 x 320 x 881 ... 6000 5
320 x 400 x 961 ... 6000
lT
6
7
b

S = cable/plug 8
K = terminal box
9
KR Curve direction R; L
R = right
L = left 10
00125185
Technical data 11
Load 12
Max. section load in accumulation operation before the curve kg 60
13
Max. total workpiece pallet weight mG kg 10
Features 14
ESD Yes
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

CU 2/90 curve
Dimensions
146,5
41
b + 15
b – 75
b
lT
d1 d2
li b
00125187
d2 = (bT - 75) / 2 + 85 b Track width in direction of transport

d1 = L - d00125187
2 lT Length in conveyor direction
L = d1 + d2 = d1 + (bT - 75) / 2 + 85
Track width in Length in direction Length Dimension Dimension Dimension

direction of of transport l d1 d2 li
transport lT
b
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
240 240 721 ... 6000 553.5 ... 5832.5 167.5 270.5
240 320 801 ... 6000 633.5 ... 5832.5 167.5 285.5
320 320 881 ... 6000 673.5 ... 5792.5 207.5 285.5
320 400 961 ... 6000 753.5 ... 5792.5 207.5 350.5

KE 2/90 curve
KE 2/90 curve 1
20
2
3
4
▶▶ Conveyor medium: Round belt (suitable for use in
an EPA)
5
▶▶ Intended for grease-free and oil-free environments
6
Note: Accumulation operation not permitted.

7
10
11
12
The KE 2 curves with round belt conveyor medium have combine the longitudinal section with belts or 13
a built-in drive at the curve end. They can be used to toothed belts.
14
Accessories
▶▶ Connection kits, see p. 4-40
▶▶ SZ 2 leg sets/..., see p. 6-2 16
Delivery notes 17
▶▶ Curve; complete with drive motor ▶▶ Partially assembled 18
▶▶ Inner guide and motor included
19
20
21
22
23
24

KE 2/90 curve
b (mm) Track width in direction 160; 240; 320; 400
of transport
lT (mm) Length in direction of 160; 240; 320; 400

KR = R transport
MA = S
w x lT Combination options 160 x 160; 240
(mm x mm) 240 x 160; 240; 320
320 x 240; 320; 400
400 x 320; 400
lT vN (m/min) Nominal speed 0; 6; 9; 12; 15; 18

b
S = cable/plug
K = terminal box
MA Motor mounting M; S
M = center1
S = side
00012752 KR Curve direction R; L

R = right
L = left
1)
Technical data
Load
Features
ESD Yes

KE 2/90 curve
Dimensions
1
91
19
3
32
204
4
5
Ø121 Ø121
185 6
222,5
b + 39,2 121,5
7
b – 99,2
130
C
lT lT 10
222,5
11
b – 55
b + 15
b + 45,5
b–5
KR = L KR = L
b
b
KR = R MA = S 12
13
(KR = R)
(MA = S)
14
130
C b + 45,5
00012771
15
b Track width in direction of transport lT Length in conveyor direction

16
Track width in direction of transport Length in direction of transport Dimension 17

b lT C
(mm) (mm) (mm)
18
160 160 170
160 240 225 19
240 160 200
240 240 200 20
240 320 200
320 240 290 21
320 320 290
320 400 290 22
400 320 355
400 400 355
23
24

KE 2/180 curve
KE 2/180 curve
20

▶▶ Curve module with built-in drive
an EPA)
▶▶ Intended for grease-free and oil-free environments
Note: Accumulation operation not permitted.
The KE 2 curves with round belt conveyor medium have combine the longitudinal section with belts or
a built-in drive at the curve end. They can be used to toothed belts.
Accessories
Delivery notes
▶▶ Curve; complete with drive motor ▶▶ Partially assembled
▶▶ Inner guide and motor included

KE 2/180 curve
1
b (mm) Track width in 160; 240; 320; 400 2
direction of
KR = R transport
b
MA = S lT (mm) Length in direction 160; 240; 320; 400 3
of transport
a (mm) Distance between 90; 135 4

a conveyors1
w x ld Combination b x lT 5
(mm x mm) options 160 x 160; 240
240 x 160; 240; 320
6
320 x 240; 320; 400
400 x 320; 400
vN (m/min) Nominal speed 0; 6; 9; 12; 15; 18 7
lT U (V) Voltage See motor data, p. 11-24ff

f (Hz) Frequency See motor data, p. 11-24ff 8
S = cable/plug 9
K = terminal box
MA Motor mounting M; S 10
00012753
M = center2)
S = on the outside,
on the side
11
R = right 12
L = left
1)
13
w x ld is possible in all combinations
2)
14
Technical data 15
Load 16
Features 17
ESD Yes
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

KE 2/180 curve
Dimensions
19
91
204
32
Ø121
185
222,5
KR = L
MA = S
121,5
KR = L
b – 92,2
b + 39,2
b–5
2 x b + a + 91
lT lT
a
b – 55
b + 15
b–5
b
b
KR = R
(KR = R)
(MA = S)
130
C b + 45,5
00012772
Track width in direction of Length in direction of transport Dimension Distance between conveyors
transport lT C a
b (mm) (mm) (mm)
(mm)
160 160 170 90; 135
160 240 170 90; 135
240 160 200 90; 135
240 240 200 90; 135
240 320 200 90; 135
320 240 290 90; 135
320 320 290 90; 135
320 400 290 90; 135
400 320 355 90; 135
400 400 355 90; 135

KE 2/O-90 curve
KE 2/O-90 curve 1
20
2
3
▶▶ Suitable for combination with BS 2/K
4
▶▶ Curve without built-in drive
5
an EPA)
6
Note: 7
▶▶ Drive by subsequent BS 2/K belt section (pulling 8
operation)
9
10
11
12
In the KE 2/O curves with round belt conveyor medium, the 13

drive is effected by the BS 2/K belt section in the infeed
and outfeed sections. 14
Accessories 15
▶▶ 2x BS 2/K belt section, see p. 4-21 ▶▶ SZ 2 leg sets/..., see p. 6-2 16
Delivery notes 17
▶▶ Curve, complete with mounting hardware ▶▶ Partially assembled 18
▶▶ Inner guide included
19
20
21
22
23
24

KE 2/O-90 curve
b (mm) Track width in direction 160; 240; 320; 400
of transport
lT (mm) Length in direction of 160; 240; 320; 400

transport
w x lT Combination options 160 x 160; 240

(mm x mm) 240 x 160; 240; 320
320 x 240; 320; 400
lT 400 x 320; 400
b
00012754
Technical data
Load
Features
ESD Yes

KE 2/O-90 curve
Dimensions
1
19
3
91
32
4
9
IT IT
45
10
b + 45,5
b + 15
b – 75
KR = L 11
b
b
b
KR = R
12
13
45
C b + 45,5 14
00012773
00012773 15

16
Track width in direction of transport Length in direction of transport Dimension 17

b lT C
(mm) (mm) (mm)
18
160 160 170
160 240 225 19
240 160 200
240 240 200 20
240 320 200
320 240 290 21
320 320 290
320 400 290 22
400 320 355
400 400 355
23
24

KE 2/O-180 curve
KE 2/O-180 curve
20

▶▶ Suitable for combination with BS 2/K
▶▶ Curve module without built-in drive
an EPA)
Note:
▶▶ Drive by subsequent BS 2/K belt section
(pulling operation)
In the KE 2/O curves with round belt conveyor medium, the

drive is effected by the BS 2/K belt section in the infeed
and outfeed sections.
Accessories
▶▶ 2x BS 2/K belt section, see p. 4-21 ▶▶ SZ 2 leg sets/..., see p. 6-2
Delivery notes
▶▶ Curve, complete with mounting hardware ▶▶ Partially assembled
▶▶ Inner guide included

KE 2/O-180 curve
1
b (mm) Track width in 160; 240; 320; 400 2
lT (mm) Length in direction of 160; 240; 320; 400 3

b transport
a (mm) Distance between 90; 135

4
conveyors1
w x ld Combination options b x lT
(mm x mm) 160 x 160; 240 5
240 x 160; 240; 320
320 x 240; 320; 400 6
400 x 320; 400
1) 7
a lT w x ld is possible in all combinations
10
00012755
Technical data 11
Load 12
Features 13
ESD Yes
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

KE 2/O-180 curve
Dimensions
19
91
32
KR = L
2 x b + a + 91
IT IT
a
b + 15
b – 75
b
b
KR = R
45
C b + 45,5
00012774
Track width in direction of Length in direction of transport Dimension Distance between conveyors
transport lT C a
b
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
160 160 170 90; 135
160 240 170 90; 135
240 160 200 90; 135
240 240 200 90; 135
240 320 200 90; 135
320 240 290 90; 135
320 320 290 90; 135
320 400 290 90; 135
400 320 355 90; 135
400 400 355 90; 135

BS 2/K belt section
BS 2/K belt section 1

60 kg
2
3
▶▶ To drive a KE 2/O curve
4
an EPA)
▶▶ Max. permissible section load up to 60 kg in
5
accumulation operation (incl. the driven curve
section)
6
Note: Drive by subsequent BS 2/K belt section 7

(pulling operation).
8
10
11
12
The BS 2/K belt section is a conveyor section that is ready longitudinally convey workpiece pallets in the infeed and 13
for operation with the toothed belt conveyor medium and a outfeed sections.
built-in drive. It is used to drive the KE 2/O curves and to 14
Delivery notes 15
▶▶ Belt section, complete with drive motor ▶▶ Partially assembled 16
▶▶ Motor included
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

BS 2/K belt section
b (mm) Track width in direction 160; 240; 320; 400; 480
of transport
l (mm) Length 320 ... 6000

mm
000
–6 f (Hz) Frequency See motor data, p. 11-24ff
20
l =3 AT Motor connection S; K
S = cable/plug
K = terminal box
R = right
L = left
M = center1)
b
1)
00013192a
Technical data
Load
operation
Features
ESD Yes

BS 2/K belt section
Dimensions
1
l
2
b
130 130
10
102
4
352,5
6
7
200 Ø136
8
237
9
MA = L
10
134
11
12
b – 100
b + 40
b
13
14
00013206 15

16
Track width in direction of transport Length 17

b l
(mm) (mm)
18
160 320 ... 6000
240 320 ... 6000 19
320 320 ... 6000
400 320 ... 6000 20
480 320 ... 6000
21
22
23
24

KU 2/90 curve
KU 2/90 curve
90 kg

▶▶ Curve with built-in drive
▶▶ Section loads up to 90 kg in accumulation operation
▶▶ Conveyor medium: Flat top chain
▶▶ Plastic chain guides
▶▶ Automatic chain tensioning system
▶▶ Can be combined with WT 2, WT 2/F, WT 2/H and
WT 2/F-H
Note:
▶▶ Flat top chain in ESD version is not permitted
recommended for flat top chains:
The KU 2 curves with flat top chain conveyor medium have
a built-in drive. They are suitable for use with high section
loads in accumulation operation.
Accessories
see p. 8-133
Delivery notes
▶▶ Curve, complete ▶▶ Fully assembled

KU 2/90 curve
1
direction of transport 800
KR = R lT (mm) Length in direction of 160; 240; 320; 400; 480; 640; 3

MA = L transport 800; 1040
w x lT Combination options 160 x 160; 240; 320

4
(mm x mm) 240 x 160; 240; 320; 400
320 x 160; 240; 320; 400;
lT 480 5
b 400 x 240; 320; 400; 480;
640
480 x 320; 400; 480; 640; 6
800
640 x 400; 480; 640; 800;
1040 7
800 x 480; 640; 800; 1040
8
9
S = cable/plug 10
00012757
K = terminal box
MA Motor mounting R; L; M 11
R = right
L = left
12
M = center1
KR Curve direction R; L 13
R = right
L = left
14
1
15
Technical data
Load
operation
Features
18
Max. operating temperature T °C +40 °C
19
20
21
22
23
24

KU 2/90 curve
Dimensions
60
lT lT
A
f1
b
b
f2
242,5
170
149,3 b + 15
00012775
00012775
A Workpiece pallet outer guide from lT = 640 mm lT Length in conveyor direction
b Track width in direction of transport

KU 2/90 curve
Track width in Length in direction Curve radius Curve radius Dimension Dimension 1
direction of of transport f11 f21 g j
transport lT
b 2
160 160 493 286 755 667 3
160 240 493 287 835 747
160 320 493 266 915 827
4
240 160 573 287 835 707
240 240 573 280 915 787
5
240 320 573 270 995 867
240 400 573 256 1075 947
6
240 480 573 240 1155 1027
320 160 653 288 915 747
7
320 240 653 282 995 827
320 320 653 273 1075 907
8
320 400 653 261 1155 987
320 480 653 247 1235 1067
9
400 240 733 283 1075 867
400 320 733 275 1155 947
10
400 400 733 265 1235 1027
400 480 733 252 1315 1107
400 640 770 260 1299 1032
11
480 320 813 277 1235 987
480 400 813 268 1315 1067 12
480 480 813 256 1395 1147
480 640 850 267 1366 1060 13
480 800 930 319 1695 1289
640 400 973 272 1475 1147 14
640 480 973 263 1555 1227
640 640 1010 278 1503 1117 15
640 800 1090 333 1733 1347
640 1040 1090 277 1973 1587 16
800 480 1133 267 1715 1307
800 640 1170 285 1642 1176 17
800 800 1250 344 1872 1406
800 1040 1250 296 2112 1646 18
1
f1, f2 = guideline value
19
20
21
22
23
24

KU 2/180 curve
KU 2/180 curve
70 kg

▶▶ Curve with built-in drive
▶▶ Section loads up to 70 kg in accumulation operation
▶▶ Automatic chain tensioning system
WT 2/F-H
Note:
The KU 2 curves with flat top chain conveyor medium have
a built-in drive. They are suitable for use with high section
loads in accumulation operation.
Accessories
see p. 8-133
Delivery notes
▶▶ Curve, complete ▶▶ Fully assembled

KU 2/180 curve
1
KR = R direction of 800
MA = L transport
lT (mm) Length in direction 160; 240; 320; 400; 480; 640; 3
of transport 800; 1040
w x lT Combination options b x lT 4
lT (mm x mm) a = 640 mm 160 x 160; 240; 320
240 x 160; 240; 320; 400 5
320 x 160; 240; 320; 400; 480
400 x 240; 320; 400; 480; 640 6
480 x 320; 400; 480; 640
b
640 x 400; 480; 640 7
a 800 x 480; 640
a = 800 mm 480 x 800 8
640 x 800; 1040
800 x 800; 1040 9
10
00012759
11
S = cable/plug
K = terminal box
12
R = right
L = left 13
M = center1
14
R = right
L = left 15
1
16
Technical data
Load
operation
Features
19
20
21
22
23
24

KU 2/180 curve
Dimensions
g 170
lT lT
f1
b
a
f2
b + 15
242,5
149,3
00012776
00012776

KU 2/180 curve
Track width in Length in direction Curve radius Curve radius Dimension Distance between 1
direction of of transport f11 f21 g conveyors
transport lT a
b 2
160 160 493 286 755 640 3

160 240 493 287 835 640
160 320 493 266 915 640 4
240 160 573 287 835 640
240 240 573 280 915 640 5
240 320 573 270 995 640
240 400 573 256 1075 640 6
240 480 573 240 1155 640
320 160 653 288 915 640 7
320 240 653 282 995 640
320 320 653 273 1075 640 8
320 400 653 261 1155 640
320 480 653 247 1235 640 9
400 240 733 283 1075 640
400 320 733 275 1155 640 10
400 400 733 265 1235 640
400 480 733 252 1315 640 11
400 640 770 260 1299 640
480 320 813 277 1235 640 12
480 400 813 268 1315 640
480 480 813 256 1395 640
13
480 640 850 267 1366 640
480 800 930 319 1595 800
14
640 400 973 272 1475 640
640 480 973 263 1555 640
15
640 640 1010 278 1503 640
640 800 1090 333 1733 800
16
640 1040 1090 277 1973 800
800 480 1133 267 1715 640
17
800 640 1170 285 1642 640
800 800 1250 344 1872 800
18
800 1040 1250 296 2112 800
1
19
20
21
22
23
24

KU 2/O‑… curve arcs
The construction principle of KU 2/O curves with the flat Drive layout
top chain conveyor medium allows smooth integration into
longer conveyor units driven by a single drive. Each change in the direction of the conveyor medium on
the transport level, such as with KU 2 curves, results in a
In order to mount such units, the KU 2/O curve arcs are loss through friction which must be offset by the drive.
offered without the conveyor medium, and drive and return This increase in stress on the drive is taken into account by
heads. The following guidelines must be taken into account the curve factor. Multiplying the workpiece pallet load that
when designing sections with integrated curves. arises before the curve with the curve factor results in the
necessary load carrying capacity of the drive. The curve
The AS 2/...-C and UM 2/...-C on the conveyor units can be factor is 1.5 for every 90° curve angle.
used for driving and returning purposes.
The overall length of the flat top chain results from the sum
of the required length of the conveyor belt for each
component.

3
The following applies as a general guideline:
–– For each AS 2/C drive module, max. 2x curve arc of –– The workpiece pallet loads before and in the first
4
90° or max. 1x curve arc of 180° 90°curve are 50 kg before and in the second
–– Mount curve arc directly on a UM 2/C-170 return unit 90°curve, another 40 kg before and in the sec-
5
–– For permitted total workpiece pallet weights in a ond curve, and another 40 kg after the second curve.
90° curve arc: 90 kg From this arises the minimum required load capacity
180° curve arc: 70 kg of (50 kg * 1.5 * 1.5) + (40 kg * 1.5) + 400 kg = 6
572.5 kg. The AS 2/C-700 drive module must be
–– The workpiece pallet loads before and in a 180° curve selected for this section. 7
is 70 kg and an additional 100 kg after the curve.
From this arises the minimum required load capacity 8
of (70 kg * 1.5 * 1.5) + 100 kg = 257.5 kg. The AS 2/C-
400 drive module must be selected for this section. 9
10
11
12
AS WT= KU 2/O-180 WT= 13

100 kg 70 kg AS WT= KU 2/O-90 WT=
400 kg 40 kg
14
15
16
UM
29381 17
18
19
WT=
50 kg
20
UM
21
KU 2/O-90
29382
22
23
24

KU 2/O-90 curve arc
KU 2/O-90 curve arc
▶▶ Curve arc without built-in drive

WT 2/F-H
Note:
The arcs KU 2/O curve arcs without drive are used for workpiece pallets in accumulation operation.
setting up sections with integrated curves to transport the
Accessories
▶▶ Plastic flat top chain conveyor medium 3842551226 ▶▶ SZ 2 leg sets/..., see p. 6-2
▶▶ AS 2/C drive module, see p. 3-68 ▶▶ ST 2/C-100 section, see p. 3-231
▶▶ UM 2/C return unit, see p. 3-80 ▶▶ Profile connector, see p. 3-40
Delivery notes

KU 2/O-90 curve arc
1
lT (mm) Length in direction of 160; 240; 320; 400; 480; 3

transport 640; 800; 1040
w x lT Combination options 160 x 160; 240; 320

4
(mm x mm) 240 x 160; 240; 320; 400
lT 320 x 160; 240; 320; 400;
480 5
b
400 x 240; 320; 400; 480;
640
480 x 320; 400; 480; 640; 6
800
640 x 400; 480; 640; 800;
1040 7
800 x 480; 640; 800; 1040
8
10
00012765
Technical data 11
Features 12
13
Dimensions
14
g
lT lT 15
f1
A
16
b
b
17
18
f2 19
20
21
b + 15 22
j
23746
23
b Track width in direction of transport 24

KU 2/O-90 curve arc
Track width in Length in Curve radius Curve radius Dimension Dimension Required
direction of direction of f11 f21 g j conveyor medium
transport transport length
b lT lk
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
160 160 493 286 755 667 4640

160 240 493 287 835 747 5280
160 320 493 266 915 827 5920
240 160 573 287 835 707 4892
240 240 573 280 915 787 5532
240 320 573 270 995 867 6172
240 400 573 256 1075 947 6812
240 480 573 240 1155 1027 7452
320 160 653 288 915 747 5143
320 240 653 282 995 827 5783
320 320 653 273 1075 907 6423
320 400 653 261 1155 987 7063
320 480 653 247 1235 1067 7703
400 240 733 283 1075 867 6034
400 320 733 275 1155 947 6674
400 400 733 265 1235 1027 7314
400 480 733 252 1315 1107 7954
400 640 770 260 1299 1032 7355
480 320 813 277 1235 987 6926
480 400 813 268 1315 1067 7566
480 480 813 256 1395 1147 8206
480 640 850 267 1366 1060 7508
480 800 930 319 1695 1289 9197
640 400 973 272 1475 1147 8068
640 480 973 263 1555 1227 8708
640 640 1010 278 1503 1117 7827
640 800 1090 333 1733 1347 9524
640 1040 1090 277 1973 1587 11444
800 480 1133 267 1715 1307 9211
800 640 1170 285 1642 1176 8161
800 800 1250 344 1872 1406 9864
800 1040 1250 296 2112 1646 11784
1

KU 2/O-180 curve arc
KU 2/O-180 curve arc 1
3
▶▶ Curve arc without built-in drive
4
5
WT 2/F-H
6
Note:
8
10
11
12
The arcs KU 2/O curve arcs without drive are used for workpiece pallets in accumulation operation. 13
setting up sections with integrated curves to transport the
14
Accessories
▶▶ Plastic flat top chain conveyor medium 3842551226 ▶▶ SZ 2 leg sets/..., see p. 6-2
▶▶ AS 2/C drive module, see p. 3-68 ▶▶ ST 2/C-100 section, see p. 3-231 16
▶▶ UM 2/C return unit, see p. 3-80 ▶▶ Profile connector, see p. 3-40
17
Delivery notes 18
20
21
22
23
24

b (mm) Track width in 160; 240; 320; 400; 480; 640;
direction of transport 800
lT (mm) Length in direction of 160; 240; 320; 400; 480; 640;

transport 800; 1040
w x lT Combination options b x lT
lT (mm x mm) a = 640 mm 160 x 160; 240; 320
240 x 160; 240; 320; 400
320 x 160; 240; 320; 400; 480
400 x 240; 320; 400; 480; 640
b
480 x 320; 400; 480; 640
640 x 400; 480; 640
a
800 x 480; 640
a = 800 mm 480 x 800
640 x 800; 1040
800 x 800; 1040
00012767
Technical data
Features
Dimensions
g
lT lT
f1
b
a
f2
b + 15
23747

Track width in Length in Curve radius Curve radius Dimension Distance between Required 1
direction of direction of f11 f21 g conveyors conveyor
transport transport a medium length
b lT lk 2
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
160 160 493 286 755 640 7201 3

160 240 493 287 835 640 7841
160 320 493 266 915 640 8481 4
240 160 573 287 835 640 7704
240 240 573 280 915 640 8344 5
240 320 573 270 995 640 8984
240 400 573 256 1075 640 9624 6
240 480 573 240 1155 640 10264
320 160 653 288 915 640 8206 7
320 240 653 282 995 640 8846
320 320 653 273 1075 640 9486 8
320 400 653 261 1155 640 10126
320 480 653 247 1235 640 10766 9
400 240 733 283 1075 640 9349
400 320 733 275 1155 640 9989 10
400 400 733 265 1235 640 10629
400 480 733 252 1315 640 11269 11
400 640 770 260 1299 640 10669
480 320 813 277 1235 640 10491 12
480 400 813 268 1315 640 11131
480 480 813 256 1395 640 11771
13
480 640 850 267 1366 640 11074
480 800 930 319 1595 800 13265
14
640 400 973 272 1475 640 12137
640 480 973 263 1555 640 12777
15
640 640 1010 278 1503 640 11896
640 800 1090 333 1733 800 14095
16
640 1040 1090 277 1973 800 16015
800 480 1133 267 1715 640 13782
17
800 640 1170 285 1642 640 12732
800 800 1250 344 1872 800 14938
18
800 1040 1250 296 2112 800 16858
1
19
20
21
22
23
24

Use: For connecting the TS 2plus modules on a longitudinal

conveyor at the ends (end-to-end)
Return unit (return side)

UM 2/B UM 2/C-60 BS 2 BS 2/C KE 2 KU 2 CU 2
UM 2/C-170 BS 2/C-H
UM 2/R-60 BS 2/R
UM 2/R-170 BS 2/R-H
Drive (drive side)

AS 2/B-150, 38421795741 3842530871 3842518828 3842530871 3842518828 3842530871 3842518828
AS 2/-250
AS 2/C-100, 3842530871 3842529881 3842525110 3842179574 –2 3842179574 3842525110

AS 2/C-250, -or- -or-
KU 2/90, 3842529881 3842529881
KU 2/180
AS 2/C-400, 38421795741 3842530871 3842518828 3842530871 –2 3842530871 3842518828

AS 2/C-700
AS 2/R-300, 3842530871 3842529881 3842525110 3842179574 –2 3842179574 3842525110

AS 2/R-700 -or- -or-
3842529881 3842529881
AS 2/R-1200, 38421795741 3842530871 3842518828 3842530871 –2 3842530871 3842518828

AS 2/R-2200
BS 2 3842518828 3842525110 3842525110 3842525110 38425251103 3842525110 3842525110

BS 2/C 3842530871 3842529881 3842525110 3842179574 –2 3842179574 3842525110
BS 2/R -or- -or-
3842529881 3842529881
BS 2/C-H 38421795741 3842530871 3842518828 3842530871 –2 3842530871 3842518828

BS 2/R-H
KE 2/90 3842518828 –2 3842525110 –2 38425251103 –2 3842525110

KE 2/180
1
Included with the UM 2/B
2
Connection not permitted
3
Included with the KE 2
3842518828 3842525110 3842179574 3842529881 3842530871

M8x20 M8x60 M8x20
(4x) (2x)
(4x) M8x25 M8x25
(12x) (6x) (2x)
(4x)
(4x) N10 (2x)
2xM8
ISO 4017 (2x) ISO 4017
M8x8 M8
M8x25 M8 M8x25
(4x) (8x) M8x8
(4x) M8x40 (2x) MLF
(2x) (4x)
(2x) M8x12
21450
(4x) 21452
21448 21449 21451

Transverse conveyor | TS 2plus 7.0 5-1

Transverse conveyor
1
Selection of transverse conveyors 5-2 6
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

5-2 TS 2plus 7.0 | Transverse conveyor
Selection of transverse conveyors
Transverse conveyors are used to change the workpiece Transverse conveyors can be implemented in the TS 2plus
pallet direction of transport. They are used to create a transfer system in two different ways:
branch in the workpiece pallet paths to the individual ▶▶ EQ 2 electric transverse conveyors (see p. 5-4)
processing stations. The orientation of the workpiece pallet (e.g., EQ 2/TR version with roller section), or
relative to its conveying direction changes when it is moved ▶▶ HQ 2 lift transverse units (see p. 5-26) in combination
from longitudinal conveying to transverse conveying and with BS 2 belt sections or conveyor units
vice versa.
The EQ 2 electric transverse conveyors are complete macro
modules. They consist of one or two HQ 2s and additional
transverse conveyor sections (BS 2/RS 2).
The transverse transport level is 10 mm above the

transport level of the longitudinal section.
Note: The lift transverse units lift the workpiece pallet out
of the longitudinal section and transport it transversely into
the transverse section, which is situated 10 mm higher.


EQ 2 electric transverse conveyors 5-4 1
HQ 2 lift transverse units 5-26 4
RS 2 roller sections 5-80

7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

EQ 2 electric transverse conveyors
EQ 2 electric transverse conveyors are used to move conveyors are available with the following transport
workpiece pallets from a longitudinal conveyor section onto function:
a second, parallel longitudinal section. EQ 2s are complete
macro modules which consist of one or two HQ 2 lift
transverse units and one transverse conveyor section EQ 2/TR
(BS 2/RS 2).
Moving workpiece pallets from one longitudinal section to
All the transport belts are driven by a motor. a second one, which runs parallel a small distance away,
For the TS 2plus transfer systems, electric transverse across a roller section.
EQ 2/T
Moving workpiece pallets from one longitudinal section to

a second one, which runs parallel a large distance away,
across a transverse belt section.
EQ 2/TE
Moving pallets from a longitudinal section to a transverse

belt section and vice versa.
Note: Accumulation on the HQ 2 is not permitted.
All EQ 2 designs are delivered with pneumatic connections,

optionally for the center and top lift position, or for the
bottom, center and top lift position. Pneumatic valves are
not included in the delivery.
The pneumatic valves are designed so that the rest position

acts as an exhaust position, moving the lift transverse units
to the center position in case of a pressure drop. In the
center position, the workpiece pallets are stopped by the
lift transverse unit. This function provides increased safety
and ensures easier commissioning.


EQ 2/TR electric transverse conveyors 5-6 1

160 x 160 ... 800 x 480 30
2
EQ 2/TR-90 electric transverse conveyors 5-11 4

160 x 160; 240 x 160 30
5
EQ 2/T electric transverse conveyors 5-15

7
160 x 160 ... 800 x 480 30
60 kg
8
EQ 2/TE electric transverse conveyors 5-20

10
160 x 160 ... 800 x 480 30
60 kg
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

EQ 2/TR electric transverse conveyor

30
▶▶ Complete macro module for connecting two parallel

longitudinal sections at a short distance from each other
▶▶ In tandem design with RS 2 roller section at a distance
of a = 45 … 135 mm
▶▶ Size 2 with two lifting cylinders from ≥ 480 x 480 mm
an EPA)
▶▶ Pneumatic equipment for 2 (top, center) or 3 (top,
center, bottom) lift positions
▶▶ Suitable for mounting on an ST 2 section with a profile
width of 45 mm or an ST 2/…-H section with a profile
width of 50 mm
▶▶ Suspended motor mounting only. Other motor mounting
variants available on request
▶▶ Can be combined with WT 2/E, WT 2 and WT 2/F
Note:
Accessories Recommended accessories

Required accessories ▶▶ DA 2/60 damper (see p. 8-62) for outfeeding workpiece
▶▶ 1x M12x1 sensor with rated sensing range SN = 4 mm pallets at vN > 9 m/min
for each (top/bottom) position sensing location, ▶▶ WI 2 rockers (see p. 8-139ff), WI/M (see p. 8-133),
see p. 8-106 DA 2/60 (see p. 8-62), DA 2/100-C dampers for BG 2
(see p. 8-71) for infeeding workpiece pallets
Delivery notes
▶▶ Incl. fastening material ▶▶ HQ 2/O and HQ 2/T lift transverse unit assembled
▶▶ Pneumatic equipment for two or three positions ▶▶ Connection kit
▶▶ Kit for electrical position inquiry (2x sensors) ▶▶ Motor mounting kit, drive motor enclosed
▶▶ Housing element ▶▶ Roller section with roller elements
▶▶ Housing elements: not assembled

1
2) Material number 3842999894
bQ (mm) Track width in the 160; 240; 320; 400; 480; 2
transverse conveyor 640; 800
1) bL (mm) Track width in the 160; 240; 320; 400; 480 3
longitudinal conveyor
bQ x bL Combination options BG 1:
4
bQ
(mm x mm) 160 x 160; 240; 320
240 x 160: 240; 320; 400
320 x 160; 240; 320; 400 5
400 x 240; 320; 400; 480
480 x 320; 400
6
BG 2:
480 x 480
640 x 400; 480 7
800 x 400; 480
a
AO Installation location, 0; 1; 2 8
profile
L
b
0 = profile 45x80
1 = profile 45x100 9
*
2 = profile 50x100
*
PN Pneumatic equipment 21 ; 32 10
28909 * = AO
1 = intermediate section with roller: U (V) Voltage See motor data, p. 11-24ff 11
Applies when a = 45 f (Hz) Frequency See motor data, p. 11-24ff
Applies when a = 90 and bL = 240 mm AT Motor connection S; K
2 = roller section:
12
S = cable/plug
Applies when a = 90 and bL > 240 mm K = terminal box
Applies when a = 135 and bL ≥ 320 mm 13
a (mm) Distance between 45; 903; 1353
conveyors
1 14
PN = 2: Upper and middle lift position
2
PN = 3: Upper, middle and lower lift position
3
a = 90 mm only when bL ≥ 240 mm; a = 135 mm only when bL ≥ 320 mm 15
Technical data 16
Load 17
Features 18
ESD Yes
Design 19
Size BG BG 1; BG 2
Required compressed air connection p bar 4 ... 6
Pneumatic connector Ø mm 6 21
22
23
24

Dimensions
bL + 15 a bL + 15
bL bL
10
14
-4
-11
180
7
Hub/
286,4
stroke
100
Ø121
4
9 1
5
6
7 8
3
bQ + 120
Q
bQ
222,5
30
L L
3842999894
00116077
00116077
L Longitudinal conveyor transport direction 6 Drive kit

Q Transport direction of transverse conveyor 7 Intermediate section with roller elements and housing
1 HQ 2/O lift transverse unit 8 Housing element for HQ 2/O lift transverse unit combined with
2 Connecting kit HQ 2/T
3 Motor mounting kit 9 Housing element for HQ 2/T lift transverse unit
4 Drive motor
5 HQ 2/T lift transverse unit

Circuit diagram for unit with pneumatic equipment for Circuit diagram for unit with pneumatic equipment for
1
two positions (PN = 2), BG 1 three positions (PN = 3), BG 1
2
D6 D6
D6 D6 5
6
D6 D6
7
D6 D6
8
2 2
4 2 4 2 9
1 3 1 3
5 13 5 13
10
00116555 1 00116556 1
11
1 Not included in delivery 1 Not included in delivery
12
PN = 2 PN = 3
13
14
15
358 731-37 358 731-43

16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

PN = 2 PN = 2 PN = 3 PN = 3
D6 D6 D6 D6 D6 D6
D6 D6 D6 D6 D6 D6
2 2
4 2 4 2
1 3 1 3
51 3 51 3
31533 1 31534 1

EQ 2/TR-90 electric transverse conveyor
EQ 2/TR-90 electric transverse conveyor 1

30
2
3
▶▶ Complete macro module for connecting two parallel
longitudinal sections at a distance of 90 mm from
4
each other
▶▶ With driven intermediate sections
5
▶▶ Modular unit with three lifting cylinders
6
an EPA)
center, bottom) lift positions 7
▶▶ Suitable for mounting on an ST 2/... section with a
profile width of 45 mm or an ST 2/…-H section with 8
a profile width of 50 mm
▶▶ Can be combined with WT 2 and WT 2/E 9
Note: 10
▶▶ Accumulation operation not permitted 11
12
Accessories 13
▶▶ 1x M12x1 sensor with rated sensing range SN = 4 mm ▶▶ DA 2/60 damper (see p. 8-62) for outfeeding WT 2 and 14
for each (top/bottom) position sensing location, WT 2/E workpiece pallets at vN > 9 m/min
see p. 8-106 ▶▶ WI 2 rocker (see p. 8-131) WI/M rocker (see p. 8-133) and 15
DA 2/60-C damper (see p. 8-62) for infeeding WT 2 and
WT 2/F workpiece pallets 16
17
Delivery notes
▶▶ Incl. fastening material ▶▶ HQ 2/O and HQ 2/T lift transverse unit assembled
▶▶ Pneumatic equipment for two or three positions ▶▶ Drive kit, assembled 19
▶▶ Kit for electrical position inquiry (2x sensors) ▶▶ Motor mounting kit, drive motor enclosed
▶▶ Connection kit ▶▶ Connection kit included
20
▶▶ Housing element ▶▶ Protective housing, not assembled
21
22
23
24

bQ (mm) Track width in the 160; 240
transverse conveyor
bQ
bL (mm) Track width in the 160
bQ x bL Combination options 160 x 160

(mm x mm) 240 x 160
AO Installation location, 0; 1; 2
profile
0 = profile 45x80
1 = profile 45x100
2 = profile 50x100
a PN Pneumatic equipment 21 ; 32
L
b

*
*
S = cable/plug
K = terminal box
28910 * = AO 1
2
Technical data
Load
Features
ESD Yes
Dimensions
Distance between conveyors a mm 90
Pneumatic connector Ø mm 6

Dimensions
1
AO = 0 referenced
2
bL + 15 90 bL + 15
bL bL
3
4
14
-4
-11
5
180
7
Hub/ 6
100
stroke
281,8
7
395
2
7 8
4 9
Ø121
185 10
7 5 6 1 3
11
30
12
13
14
bQ + 120
Q
bQ
15
16
222
17
6 18
30
L L
3842998289 437 19
00125237
20
L Longitudinal conveyor transport direction

Q Transport direction of transverse conveyor 21
1 HQ 2/O lift transverse unit
2 Connecting kit 22
3 Motor mounting kit
4 Drive motor
5 HQ 2/T lift transverse unit 23
6 Drive kit
7 Housing element
24

two positions (PN = 2) three positions (PN = 3)
D6 D6
D6 D6 D6
D6 D6 D6
D6 D6
1 3 4 2
1 5 13 1
00125238 00125252
PN = 2 PN = 3
358 731-37 358 731-43

EQ 2/T electric transverse conveyor
EQ 2/T electric transverse conveyor 1

30 50
60 kg
2
3
▶▶ Pre-assembled module for connecting two parallel
longitudinal sections
4
▶▶ Tandem design with driven belt section for greater
distances from 320 mm
5
▶▶ Size 2 from ≥ 480 x 480 mm with two lifting cylinders
per lift transverse unit
6
an EPA)
▶▶ Pneumatic equipment for 2 (top, center) or 3 (top, 7
▶▶ Suitable for mounting on an ST 2/... section with a 8
profile width of 45 mm or an ST 2/…-H section with
a profile width of 50 mm 9
▶▶ Can be combined with WT 2, WT 2/E and WT 2/F
10
Note:
▶▶ Reversible operation possible 11
▶▶ Accumulation operation not permitted on the lift
transverse units. 12
Accessories 13
▶▶ 1x M12x1 sensor with rated sensing range SN = 4 mm ▶▶ DA 2/60 damper (see p. 8-62) for outfeeding workpiece 14
for each (top/bottom) position sensing location, see p. pallets at vN > 9 m/min
8-108/8-110 ▶▶ WI/2 (see p. 8-131ff) or WI/M (see p. 8-133) rocker, 15
DA 2/60 (see p. 8-62) or DA 2/100-C dampers for BG 2
(see p. 8-71) for infeeding workpiece pallets 16
17
Delivery notes
18
▶▶ Incl. fastening material ▶▶ Pre-assembled in modular units
▶▶ 2x HQ 2/O 19
▶▶ 1x BS 2/T tandem belt section
▶▶ 2x connection kit
20
▶▶ 2x SK 2/B housing element
▶▶ Pneumatic equipment for two or three positions
21
▶▶ Kit for electric position sensing
22
23
24

bQ (mm) Track width in the 160; 240; 320; 400; 480;
bQ
bL (mm) Track width in the 160; 240; 320; 400; 480
l
(mm x mm) 160 x 160; 240; 320
240 x 160; 240; 320; 400
320 x 160; 240; 320; 400
400 x 240; 320; 400; 480
480 x 320; 400
BG 2:
480 x 480
640 x 400; 480
800 x 400; 480
L
b
l (mm) Length 320 ... 6000

*
profile
*
0 = profile 45x80
1 = profile 45x100
2 = profile 50x100
00012788 * = AO
PN Pneumatic equipment 21; 32
S = cable/plug
K = terminal box
R = right
L = left
M = center
1
2
3
MA = M when bQ ≧ 320 mm
Technical data
Load
operation
Max. total weight of workpiece pallet mG kg BG 1: 30
BG 2: 50
Features
ESD Yes
Design
Size BG BG 1; BG 2

Dimensions
1
Iges = I + 2 (bL + 15) 2

bL I bL
3
10
14
4
-4
-11
5
180
7
Hub/
100
stroke 6
352,5
7
4 4
8
Ø136 9
200
10
11
237
bL + 15 bL + 15
12
13
134
1 1
2
14
15
bQ + 60
bQ
Q
16
17
3 3
18
L L
3842999895 19
00116078
00116078
20

Q Transport direction of transverse conveyor 21
2 BS 2/T tandem belt section 22
3 Connecting kit
4 Housing element
23
24

D6 D6
D6 D6
D6 D6
D6 D6
2 2
4 2 4 2
1 3 1 3
5 13 5 13
00116555 1 00116556 1
PN = 2 PN = 3
358 731-37 358 731-43

1
PN = 2 PN = 2 PN = 3 PN = 3 2
4
D6 D6 D6 D6 D6 D6
D6 D6 D6 D6 D6 D6
8
2 2
4 2 4 2
9
1 3 1 3
51 3 51 3
10
31533 1 31534 1
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

EQ 2/TE electric transverse conveyor

30
60 kg
▶▶ Pre-assembled assembly for branching off into a

transverse section in which the second end does not
lead to a further transverse section (dead end)
▶▶ Size 2 from ≥ 480 x 480 mm with two lifting cylinders
per lift transverse unit
an EPA)
Note:
▶▶ Accumulation operation on the lift transverse unit is
not permitted
Accessories
▶▶ 1x M12x1 sensor with rated sensing range SN = 4 mm ▶▶ DA 2/60 damper (see p. 8-62) for outfeeding WT 2,
for each (top/bottom) position sensing location, see p. WT 2/F, WT 2/H or WT 2/F-H workpiece pallets at
8-108/8-110 vN > 9 m/min
▶▶ WI 2 (see p. 8-131ff) or WI/M (see p. 8-133) rocker and
Delivery notes
▶▶ 1x HQ 2/O lift transverse unit ▶▶ HQ 2/O lift transverse unit, assembled
▶▶ 1x BS 2/TE belt section ▶▶ BS 2/TE belt section, assembled
▶▶ 1x connection kit ▶▶ Connection kit included
▶▶ 1x SK 2/B housing element ▶▶ Protective housing, not assembled

1
bL (mm) Track width in the 160; 240; 320; 400; 480 3

bQ
4
(mm x mm) 160 x 160; 240; 320
240 x 160; 240; 320; 400
320 x 160; 240; 320; 400 5
400 x 240; 320; 400; 480
480 x 320; 400
6
L
b
BG 2:
480 x 480
*
640 x 400; 480 7

800 x 400; 480
*
l (mm) Length 240 ... 6000 8

profile
9
0 = profile 45x80
1 = profile 45x100
2 = profile 50x100 10
00012796 * = AO
PN Pneumatic equipment 21 ; 32
S = cable/plug
K = terminal box 13
MA Motor mounting R; M3; L

14
R = right
L = left
M = center 15
1
2
16
3
17
Technical data
Load
operation
20
Features
ESD Yes
21
Design
Size BG BG 1; BG 2
22
23
24

Dimensions
Iges = I + bL + 15
bL I
10
14
-4
-11
180/200*)
7
Hub/
100
stroke
352,5
Ø136
200
237
bL + 15 134
2
bQ + 60
bQ
3
1
3842999896 L
00116082
00116082

Q Transport direction of transverse conveyor
2 BS 2/TE belt section
3 Connecting kit
4 Housing element
*
180 mm for 80 mm profile height, 200 mm for 100 mm profile height

1
7
D6
D6 D6
2 8
4 2
1 3 9
5 1 3
10
1 1
30110 30109
11
12
PN = 2 PN = 3
13
14
15
358 731-37 358 731-43

16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

PN = 2 PN = 3
D6 D6 D6
D6 D6 D6
2
4 2
1 3
51 3
31536 1 31535 1


10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

HQ 2 lift transverse units
The lift transverse units have to: ▶▶ Spring-centered middle position

▶▶ Move the workpiece pallets from a longitudinal section (basic position, 4 mm below transport level).
to a transverse section It serves as the transport position when the lug cam
▶▶ Move the workpiece pallets from a transverse section is lowered and as the locked position when the lug cam
onto a longitudinal section is raised
▶▶ Transverse conveying position
Lift transverse units for overall workpiece pallet weights up (10 mm above transport level of longitudinal conveyor)
to 240 kg are available for the TS 2plus transfer system. ▶▶ Lower transport position
(11 mm below conveying level).
All lift transverse units have one thing in common – vertical In this low position a workpiece pallet is also released
pneumatic movement and horizontal transportation action. onto a longitudinal conveyor section when the lug cam
Vertical movement can be set in three positions: is raised


HQ 2/S lift transverse units 5-28 1

160 x 160 ... 800 x 480 30 50
2
HQ 2/O lift transverse units 5-33 4

160 x 160 ... 800 x 480 30 50
5
HQ 2/T lift transverse units 5-48

7
160 x 160 ... 800 x 480 30 50
8
HQ 2/U lift transverse units 5-56

10
160 x 160 ... 400 x 400; 480 x 320 30
11
12
HQ 2/U2 lift transverse units 5-60
400 x 400 ... 800 x 640 13
50
14
15
HQ 2/U-H lift transverse units 5-64
240 x 240 ... 640 x 640 128 16
17
18
HQ 2/C-H lift transverse units 5-71
480 x 640 ... 1200 x 1200 240 19
20
21
22
23
24

HQ 2/S lift transverse unit

30 50
▶▶ Lift transverse unit for feeding out from a longitudinal

section into a transverse section and vice versa
▶▶ Low height with motor mounted on side. It is therefore
suitable for the operation of double-deck conveyor
sections
▶▶ In two sizes with one or two lifting cylinders
an EPA)
profile width of 45 mm or an ST 2/…-H section with a
profile width of 50 mm
Note: Reversible operation possible
Vertical movement is delivered by pneumatic cylinders. Two Size 2 (BG 2) for total weights (workpiece pallet + load) up
sizes are available: to 50 kg by two lifting cylinder for workpiece pallet
Size 1 (BG 1) for total weights (workpiece pallet + load) up dimensions from 400 x 480 mm.
to 30 kg by one lifting cylinder.
Accessories
▶▶ 1x M12x1 sensor with SN ≥ 4 mm rated sensing range for ▶▶ DA 2/60 damper (see p. 8-62) for outfeeding workpiece
each position sensing location, see p. 8-108/8-110 pallets at vN > 9 m/min
▶▶ SK 2. protective housing, see p. 5-40 ▶▶ WI 2/… rockers (see p. 8-139ff), WI/M (see p. 8-133)
DA 2/60 (see p. 8-62), DA 2/100-C dampers for BG 2
(see p. 8-71) for infeeding the workpiece pallet
Delivery notes
▶▶ Incl. fastening material ▶▶ Pre-assembled in modular units
▶▶ Pneumatic equipment for two or three positions ▶▶ Protective housing, not assembled

1
b transverse conveyor 640; 800
Q

4
(mm x mm) 160 x 160; 240; 320
240 x 160; 240; 320; 400
320 x 160; 240; 320; 400 5
400 x 240; 320; 400
480 x 320
6
BG 2:
400 x 480
480 x 400; 480 7
L
b
640 x 400; 480

800 x 400; 480
8
*
9
*
profile
0 = profile 45x80
1 = profile 45x100
* = AO 2 = profile 50x100
10
00012789
S = cable/plug 13
K = terminal box
1
PN = 2: Upper and middle lift position 14
2
15
Technical data
Load
Max. total weight of workpiece pallet mG kg BG 1: 30 17
BG 2: 50
Features 18
ESD Yes
Design 19
Size BG BG 1; BG 2
22
23
24

Dimensions
bL + 15
bL
+10
14
-4
-11
180/200*)
7
281,8
Hub/
100
stroke
5 3
2 Ø121
1
bL – 30 4
bL – 75
37
bQ + 48
bQ + 60
Q
bQ
222,5
L
3842999888
00116035
00116035
L Transport direction of longitudinal conveyor section

Q Transport direction of transverse conveyor section
1 HQ 2/S lift transverse unit
2 Drive motor
3 Connecting kit
4 Motor mounting kit
5 Housing element
*

Circuit diagram for unit with pneumatic equipment for Circuit diagram for unit with pneumatic equipment
1
two positions (PN = 2), BG 1 for three positions (PN = 3), BG 1
7
D6
D6 D6
2 8
4 2
1 3 9
5 1 3
10
1 1
30110 30109
11
12
PN = 2 PN = 3
13
14
15
358 731-37 358 731-43

16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

PN = 2 PN = 3
D6 D6 D6
D6 D6 D6
2
4 2
1 3
51 3
31536 1 31535 1

HQ 2/O lift transverse unit
HQ 2/O lift transverse unit 1

30 50
2
3
▶▶ Lift transverse unit without built-in drive for outfeeding
from a longitudinal section into a transverse section and
4
vice versa
▶▶ Drive by toothed belt coupling
5
▶▶ The low height is suitable for the operation of double-
deck conveyor sections
6
▶▶ Suitable for use in special designs
▶▶ Conveyor medium: Toothed belt (suitable for use in 7
an EPA)
▶▶ Pneumatic equipment for 2 (top, center) or 3 (top, 8
▶▶ Suitable for mounting on an ST 2/... section with 9
a profile width of 45 mm or an ST 2/…-H section with
a profile width of 50 mm 10
11
12
The HQ 2/O does not have a built-in drive. Driven by a Two sizes are available: 13
toothed belt coupled with a BS 2/T, BS 2/TE belt section or Size 1 (BG 1) for total weights (workpiece pallet + load) up
by a separate drive motor. It is a part of all EQ 2 electric to 30 kg by one lifting cylinder. 14
transverse conveyors and can also be used in special Size 2 (BG 2) for total weights (workpiece pallet + load) up
system designs. Vertical movement is delivered by to 50 kg by two lifting cylinder for workpiece pallet 15
pneumatic cylinders. dimensions from 400 x 480 mm.
16
Accessories 17
▶▶ 1x M12x1 sensor with SN ≥ 4 mm rated sensing range for ▶▶ DA 2/60 damper (see p. 8-62) for outfeeding workpiece 18
▶▶ BS 2/T belt section (see p. 5-42), BS 2/TE belt section ▶▶ WI 2 (see p. 8-139ff) or WI/M (see p. 8-133) rocker and 19
(see p. 5-45) for driving DA 2/60 (see p. 8-62) or DA 2/100-C dampers for BG 2
▶▶ HQ 2/T (see p. 5-48) in the tandem version (see p. 8-71) for infeeding workpiece pallets
20
▶▶ Connection belt set for HQ 2/O drive (see p. 5-38) via a
belt section
21
▶▶ SK 2/B protective housing, see p. 5-54
22
Delivery notes
23
▶▶ Incl. fastening material ▶▶ Fully assembled
24

bQ (mm) Track width in the 160; 240; 320; 400; 480;
bL (mm) Track width in the 160; 240; 320; 400; 480

bQ
(mm x mm) 160 x 160; 240; 320
240 x 160; 240; 320; 400
320 x 160; 240; 320; 400
400 x 240; 320; 400
480 x 320
L
b BG 2:
400 x 480
*
480 x 400; 480

640 x 400; 480
*
800 x 400; 480
profile
0 = profile 45x80
1 = profile 45x100
21631 * = AO 2 = profile 50x100
1
2
Technical data
Load
Max. total weight of workpiece pallet mG kg BG 1: 30
BG 2: 50
Features
ESD Yes
Design
Size BG BG 1; BG 2

Dimensions
1
bL + 15 2
bL
+10 3
1
14
21
4
-4
-11
5
7
180/200*)
Hub/ 6
stroke
7
100
9
3
2 10
bL - 30 11
bL - 75 4
12
13
14
Q
bQ + 48
bQ + 36
bQ + 60
15
bQ
L
16
17
18
19
bL + 12
3842998113
21625 20

Q Transport direction of transverse conveyor section 21
1 Stroke
2 Housing element 22
3 Toothed belt for drive
4 Attachment for BS 2/T
*
180 mm for 80 mm profile height, 200 mm for 100 mm profile height 23
24

D6
D6 D6
2
4 2
1 3
5 1 3
1 1
30110 30109
PN = 2 PN = 3
358 731-37 358 731-43

1
PN = 2 PN = 3 2
4
D6 D6 D6
D6 D6 D6
8
2
4 2
9
1 3
51 3
10
31536 1 31535 1
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Connection belt for HQ 2/O
If the HQ 2/O lift transverse unit is driven via a belt section, or BS 2/T using the connection belt set. The bQ and bL
a connection belt set is required. parameters are decisive for selection of the connection
The HQ 2/O (BG 1 or BG 2) can be combined with BS 2/TE belt set.
Material number 3842328196 3842328197
bQ x bL HQ 2/O combination possibilities BG 1: BG 2:
(mm x mm) 160 x 160; 240; 320 400 x 480
240 x 160; 240; 320; 400 480 x 400; 480
320 x 160; 240; 320; 400 640 x 400; 480
400 x 240; 320; 400 800 x 400; 480
480 x 320
Technical data
Material number 3842328196 3842328197
Design
Size BG BG 1 BG 2

00116034
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

SK 2/B housing element
▶▶ Housing element for HQ 2/O and HQ 2/S
Product designation bQ x bL (mm) Material number
SK 2/B housing element 160 x 160 3842338750

Technical data
1
Material number 3842338750 3842338757 3842338763 3842338768 3842338776
3842338751 3842338758 3842338764 3842338771 3842338777
3842338752 3842338760 3842338766 3842338773 3842338779 2
3842338755 3842338761 3842338767 3842338775 3842338781
3842338756 3842338762
3
Features
4
PA66; black
5
Dimensions
bL bQ 7
10
178/1981)
11
12
100
13
14
14
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
28918
23
28917
1

BS 2/T belt section
BS 2/T belt section

60 kg
▶▶ Ready-to-use conveyor section with drive for transverse

conveyance between parallel conveyor sections
▶▶ Additional toothed gears to drive an HQ 2/Q lift
transverse unit each on both ends
an EPA)
▶▶ Can be combined with WT 2/E, WT 2, WT 2/F, WT 2/H
and WT 2/F-H
Additional toothed gears to drive an HQ 2/Q lift transverse Position of the gears depends on the size of the HQ 2/O.
unit each on both ends.
Accessories
▶▶ Connection kit (3842525110, see p. 3-237) for installing
the belt section between the ST 2 conveyor sections
▶▶ HQ 2/O lift transverse unit, see p. 5-33
Delivery notes

BS 2/T belt section
1
direction of transport 640; 800
l (mm) Length 320 ... 6000 3

4
l f (Hz) Frequency See motor data, p. 11-24ff
5
S = cable/plug
K = terminal box
6
R = right
b+
L = left 7
15 M = center
8
UB1 Connection belt 1; 2
UB = 1
UB = 2 9
1
UB: Connection belt for Size BG 1 (bQ x bL ≤ 480 x 320 mm) or BG 2 HQ
2/O (bQ x bL ≥ 400 x 480 mm) 10
00016779
2
11
Technical data
Load
operation
Features 14
ESD Yes
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

BS 2/T belt section
Dimensions
l b
130 130
102
10
95
15
3842525110
352,5
200 Ø136
237
MA = L
134
46,5 (UB=2)
26 (UB=1)
b – 100
b + 40
b – 75
b + 15
3842999722
00116829
00116829

BS 2/TE belt section
BS 2/TE belt section 1

60 kg
2
3
▶▶ Ready-to-use conveyor section with drive for transverse
conveyance into a dead end
4
▶▶ Additional toothed gear to drive an HQ 2/O lift
transverse unit
5
6
an EPA)
and WT 2/F-H 7
10
11
12
Accessories 13
▶▶ Connection kit (3842525110, see p. 3-237) for installing 14
the belt section between the ST 2 conveyor sections
▶▶ SZ 2 leg sets, see p. 6-2 15
16
Delivery notes
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

l (mm) Length 240 ... 6000

l AT Motor connection S; K
S = cable/plug
K = terminal box
R = right
b L = left
M = center
UB1 Connection belt 1; 2

UB = 1
UB = 2
1
UB: Connection belt for Size BG 1 (bQ x bL ≤ 480 x 320 mm) or BG 2 HQ
00016780 2/O (bQ x bL ≥ 400 x 480 mm)
2
Technical data
Load
operation
Features
ESD Yes

Dimensions
1
l b 3
30 130
10
102
95
5
3842525110
15
352,5
7
200 Ø136 9
10
237
11
MA = L
12
134
13
14
b – 100
b – 75
b + 15
b + 40
15
b
16
17
18
3842999723
00116828
19
00116828
20
21
22
23
24

HQ 2/T lift transverse unit

30 50
▶▶ Lift transverse unit without built-in drive for outfeeding

from a longitudinal section into a transverse section
with a roller section and vice versa
▶▶ Used in tandem with the HQ 2/O
▶▶ Drive by toothed belt coupling
▶▶ Suitable for use in special designs
an EPA)
▶▶ Suitable for mounting on an ST 2/... section with
a profile width of 45 mm or an ST 2/…-H section with
Vertical movement is delivered by pneumatic cylinders. Two Size 2 (BG 2) for total weights (workpiece pallet + load) up
sizes are available: to 50 kg by two lifting cylinder for workpiece pallet
Size 1 (BG 1) for total weights (workpiece pallet + load) up dimensions from 400 x 480 mm.
to 30 kg by one lifting cylinder.
Accessories
▶▶ SK 2 protective housing, see p. 5-54 ▶▶ WI 2 (see p. 8-131ff) or WI/M (see p. 8-133) rocker and
Delivery notes
▶▶ Incl. drive kit (required to drive an HQ 2/T)

1
bQ
HQ 2/O longitudinal conveyor
HQ 2/T
4
(mm x mm) 160 x 160; 240; 320
240 x 160; 240; 320; 400
320 x 160; 240; 320; 400 5
400 x 240; 320; 400
L
b
480 x 320
6
a
BG 2:
400 x 480
480 x 400; 480 7
*
640 x 400; 480

800 x 400; 480
8
*
profile 9
0 = profile 45x80
1 = profile 45x100
* = AO 2 = profile 50x100
10
00117855a
1
2
12
Technical data
Load
Max. total weight of workpiece pallet mG kg BG 1: 30 14
BG 2: 50
Features 15
ESD Yes
Design 16
Size BG BG 1; BG 2
19
20
21
22
23
24

Dimensions
bL + 15 a
bL
+10
1
Hub/
21
stroke
10
-4
14
-11
7
180/200*)
3
100
bL – 30
bL – 75
bQ + 120
bQ + 108
bQ + 95
Q
bQ
L
bL + 12
3842998114
00116041
00116041

1 Stroke
2 Housing element
3 Drive kit for HQ 2/O‑HQ 2/T
*

3
a
bL bL 4
HQ 2/O 1 HQ 2/T 10
11
12
13
14
00117854
15
1 Drive kit
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

D6
D6 D6
2
4 2
1 3
5 1 3
1 1
30110 30109
PN = 2 PN = 3
358 731-37 358 731-43

1
PN = 2 PN = 3 2
4
D6 D6 D6
D6 D6 D6
8
2
4 2
9
1 3
51 3
10
31536 1 31535 1
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

SK 2 housing element
▶▶ Housing element for HQ 2/T
Product designation bQ x bL (mm) Material number
SK 2 housing element 160 x 160 3842345100

Technical data
1
Material number 3842345100 3842345107 3842345113 3842345118 3842345126
3842345101 3842345108 3842345114 3842345121 3842345127
3842345102 3842345110 3842345116 3842345123 3842345129 2
3842345105 3842345111 3842345117 3842345125 3842345131
3842345106 3842345112
3
Features
4
PA 66; black
5
Dimensions
bL bQ
7
9
178/1981)
10
11
100
12
7
13
7
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
28917
23
28917
1

HQ 2/U lift transverse unit

30
▶▶ Lift transverse unit for outfeeding from a longitudinal

▶▶ Use in tight spaces by means of suspended drive motor
(outside dimensions must be no wider than the section)
▶▶ Drive by toothed belt coupling is not possible because
of the compact design
an EPA)
Accessories
▶▶ WI 2 (see p. 8-139ff) or WI/M (see p. 8-133) rocker and
Delivery notes
▶▶ Pneumatic equipment for two or three positions ▶▶ Kit for electric position sensing included
▶▶ Housing element

1
bQ (mm) Track width in the 160; 240; 320; 2
b transverse conveyor 400; 480
Q
bL (mm) Track width in the 160; 240; 320; 400 3

bQ x bL Combination options 160 x 160; 240; 320

4
(mm x mm) 240 x 160; 240; 320; 400
320 x 160; 240; 320; 400
400 x 240; 320; 400 5
480 x 320
6
profile
0 = profile 45x80 7
bL
1 = profile 45x100
2 = profile 50x100
8
*

*
9
10
00016587 * = AO
S = cable/plug
K = terminal box 11
1
2
PN = 3: Upper, middle and lower lift position 12
Technical data 13
Load 14
Features 15
ESD Yes
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Dimensions
bL
1 1
+10
21
80/1001)
-4
21
-11
11
90
5**
Hub/
21
stroke
60
14
536,3
7
bL/2 + 3,5 bL/2 + 3,5 bQ + 30
bL – 30
Q
bQ + 44
bQ
L
3842999903
00116036
00116036

1 Stroke
2 Housing element
** Only for bL = 160 mm
1
Profile height

1
7
D6 D6 D6
2 8
4 2
1 3 9
5 13
10
30111 30112
11
12
PN = 2 PN = 3
13
14
15
358 731-37 358 731-43

16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

HQ 2/U2 lift transverse unit

50

▶▶ Use in tight spaces by means of suspended drive motor
(outside dimensions must be no wider than the section)
▶▶ Reinforced version of HQ 2/U with two lift cylinders for
large workpiece pallet dimensions
▶▶ Drive by toothed belt coupling is not possible because
of the compact design
an EPA)
WT 2/F-H
Accessories
▶▶ 1x M12x1 sensor with SN ≥ 4 mm rated sensing range for ▶▶ DA 2/100-B (see p. 8-67) damper for outfeeding WT 2,
each position sensing location, see p. 8-108/8-110 WT 2/F, WT 2/H or WT 2/F-H workpiece pallets, required
when vN > 12 m/min or total weight of the workpiece
pallet ≥ 30 kg
▶▶ WI 2 (see p. 8-139) or WI/M (see p. 8-133) rocker and
DA 2/100-C damper (see p. 8-71) for infeeding WT 2
and WT 2/F workpiece pallets
Delivery notes
▶▶ Pneumatic equipment for two or three positions ▶▶ Kit for electric position sensing included
▶▶ Kit for electric position sensing ▶▶ Kit for housing element included

1
bQ (mm) Track width in the 400; 480; 640; 800 2
transverse conveyor
bL (mm) Track width in the 400; 480; 640 3

b
Q
bQ x bL Combination options 400 x 400; 480; 640

4
(mm x mm) 480 x 400; 480; 640
640 x 400; 480; 640
800 x 400; 480; 640 5
profile 6
0 = profile 45x80
1 = profile 45x100
7
2 = profile 50x100
PN Pneumatic equipment 21; 32
L
b
8
9
*
S = cable/plug 10
00116588 * = AO
K = terminal box
1
2
12
Technical data
Load
Features
ESD Yes 15
Required compressed air connection p bar 4 ... 6 16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Dimensions
"X"
bL bQ
1
21
+10
1)
80/100
-4
-11
11
Hub/
stroke "X"
100
14
195
7
bL + 12 bQ + 36
3842525733
L
3
3842999843
00116066
00116066

1 Stroke
2 Housing element
3 Damped stop
1
Profile height

1
4
D6 D6 D6
D6 D6 D6
8
2
4 2
9
1 3
5 1 3
1 1 10
00116549 00116550
11
12
PN = 2 PN = 3
13
14
15
358 731-37 358 731-43

16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

HQ 2/U-H lift transverse unit

128

▶▶ Use for high total weights up to 2 kg/cm on the smallest
side of the workpiece pallet
▶▶ Sensor mounting for speed control during infeeding
possible
▶▶ Lifting movements through two to four block cylinders
according to size
▶▶ Conveyor medium: Duplex chain (suitable for use in
an EPA)
▶▶ The lateral guides can be mounted on either the left or
the right depending on the conveying situation
WT 2/F-H
In combination with HQ 2/U-H, only PE wear pads are Note:

recommended for use on the workpiece pallets. ▶▶ Reversible operation possible
▶▶ Lateral guides of different heights allow for a fixed stop
when outfeeding on the HQ
Accessories
▶▶ 1x M12x1 sensor with rated sensing range SN = 4 mm for ▶▶ DA 2/150-E (see p. 45 mm8-79)) or DA 2/100-E
each (top/bottom) position sensing location, (see p. 8-75) damper for outfeeding WT 2, WT 2/F,
see p. 8-108/8-110 WT 2/H or WT 2/F-H workpiece pallets; required when
▶▶ Adapter plate (available on request) required to mount a vN > 9 m/min or total weight of the workpiece pallet
VA 2/D-130 perpendicular to the main direction of > 30 kg/cm
transport ▶▶ WI 2/... (see p. 8-139ff) or WI/M (see p. 8-133) rockers
and DA 2/100-C (see p. 8-71) damper for infeeding
WT 2 and WT 2/F workpiece pallets
Delivery notes
▶▶ Incl. fastening material ▶▶ Pre-assembled incl. pneumatic equipment
▶▶ Pneumatic equipment for two or three positions ▶▶ Protective housing, not assembled

1
b Material number 3842998750
Q
bQ (mm) Track width in the 240; 320; 400; 480; 640 2
transverse conveyor

4
(mm x mm) 240 x 240; 320; 400
320 x 240; 320; 400; 480;
400 x 240 5
BG 2:
400 x 320; 400; 480; 640; 6
480 x 320; 400
L
b
640 x 400
7
*
BG 3:
480 x 480; 640
8
*
640 x 480; 640
9
AO1 Installation location, 0; 1; 2
profile
0 = profile 45x80 10
* = AO
22884
1 = profile 45x100
2 = profile 50x100
PN Pneumatic equipment 22 ; 33 11
vN (m/min) Nominal speed 6; 9; 12; 15; 18
U (V) Voltage See motor data, p. 11-24ff 12
AT Motor connection S; K 13
S = cable/plug
K = terminal box
14
1
Only required when bQ = 240 mm
15
2
3
16
Technical data
Load
Features
ESD Yes 19
Required compressed air connection p bar 4 ... 6 20
Pneumatic connector Ø mm BG 1, 2, 3: 6
Number of lifting cylinders1 BG 1: 2
21
BG 2: 3
BG 3: 4
22
1
See also p. 5-67
Note:
Adapter plate for mounting a VA 2/D-130 slide stop on the HQ 2/U-H perpendicular to the main direction of transport available on request. 23
24

Dimensions
"X"
bL
bL – 75
bQ bL – 80
+ 10
–4
– 11
40
SP – 100 = 665
14
525 + 25
Hub/
stroke
"X"
7
SP – 80 = 645
bQ + 24 bL + 7
bQ + 15
bL – 80
3842548585 DA 2/100-E
bL
3842548644 DA 2/150-E
bQ + 44
24000
3842998750
24000

Cylinder arrangement
1
Schematic of the cylinder arrangement according to size
2
bQ 240 bQ 320 bQ 400 bQ 480 bQ 640
bL 240 2 cylinders 2 cylinders 2 cylinders

5
Load 48 48 48
8
bL 320 2 cylinders 2 cylinders 3 cylinders 3 cylinders
Load 48 64 64 64
9
10
11
bL 400 2 cylinders 2 cylinders 3 cylinders 3 cylinders 3 cylinders
Load 48 64 80 96 96 12
13
14
15
bL 480 2 cylinders 3 cylinders 4 cylinders 4 cylinders
Load 64 80 96 96 16
17
18
19
bL 640 3 cylinders 4 cylinders 4 cylinders
Load 80 96 128 20
21
22
23
24

Pneumatic diagram
PN = 2 Use pneumatic diagram:
A (for pneumatic equipment PN = 2) if you want to transfer
the WT from the longitudinal section to the transverse
section (TFE 1) or from the transverse section to the
TFE 1, TFE 2
longitudinal section (TFE 2).
358 731-27
B (for pneumatic equipment PN = 3), if you want to outfeed

PN = 3
the WT from the longitudinal section to the transverse
section (TFE 3) or infeed from the transverse section to the
TFE 3, TFE 4 longitudinal section (TFE 4).
358 731-28
Pneumatic diagrams, BG 1, 2 cylinders
two positions (PN = 2), BG 1, bL < 320 mm three positions (PN = 3), BG 1, bL < 320 mm
A B
D6 D6
D6
2 D6
1 3 4 2
5 13
31538 1 31539 1

1
two positions (PN = 2), BG 1, bL ≥ 320 three positions (PN = 3), BG 1, bL ≥ 320
A B 2
7
D6
8
2
D6
9
1 3
4 2
10
5 13
31540 1 31560 1
11
Pneumatic diagrams, BG 2, 3 cylinders 12
Circuit diagram for unit with pneumatic equipment for Circuit diagram for unit with pneumatic equipment for 13
A B 14
15
16
17
18
D6
19
D6
20
2
D6 21
1 3
4 2
22
5 13
1 1
31558 31561
23
24

Pneumatic diagrams, BG 3, 4 cylinders
A B
D6
D6
D6
2
D6 D6
1 3
4 2
5 13
31559 1 31562 1

HQ 2/C-H lift transverse unit
HQ 2/C-H lift transverse unit 240 1
3
4
▶▶ Use for high total weights up to 2 kg/cm on the smallest
side of the workpiece pallet and up to 240 kg
5
▶▶ Flat design permits system layouts on several levels
▶▶ Synchronized lifting movement of the four block
6
cylinders for uniform and parallel lifting movement
▶▶ Suitable for mounting on an ST 2 section with a profile 7
width of 50 mm 8
▶▶ Depending on the installation, height-adjustable lateral
guides can be used as a fixed stop for exporting or as a 9
lateral guide when changing workpiece pallets
▶▶ Fixed stops in the form of adjustable/movable lateral 10
guides made of strip steel
▶▶ Can be combined with WT 2, WT 2/F, WT 2/H and 11
WT 2/F-H
12
Note:
Accessories ▶▶ Reversible operation possible 13
Required accessories ▶▶ Accumulation operation not permitted
▶▶ M12x1 sensor for position sensing, see p. 8-108/8-110 14
▶▶ Dampers for outfeeding and infeeding workpiece pallets,
see p. 8-60 15
▶▶ DA 2/100-E (see p. 8-75) and DA 2/150-E (see p. 8-79) ▶▶ A fixed stop (included in delivery) or a DA 2/100-C
dampers or a fixed stop (included in delivery) can be damper can be used for infeeding WT 2 and WT 2/F 17
used for outfeeding WT 2, WT 2/F, WT 2/H and WT 2/F-H workpiece pallets. This is also possible in combination
workpiece pallets. The DA 2/100-C (see p. 8-71) with a WI 2 rocker (see p. 8-139), WI 2/X rocker (see p. 18
damper can be used at the belt end for outfeeding 8-143), WI 2/D rocker (see p. 8-145) or a WI 2/M rocker
a WT 2 or WT 2/F workpiece pallet. (see p. 8-133).
19
▶▶ DA 2/100-H (see p. 8-82) or DA 2/250-H (see p. 8-85) ▶▶ DA 2/100-H and DA 2/250-H dampers can be used for
damper for outfeeding a WT 2/H or WT 2/F-H workpiece infeeding WT 2/H and WT 2/F-H workpiece pallets.
20
pallet
21
Delivery notes
22
▶▶ Switch holder for 12 mm sensor for position sensing ▶▶ Kits for lateral guides included
23
▶▶ Lateral guide kit for bl ≤ 640 mm (3842549567) or for
24
bl > 640 mm (3842549568)

bQ (mm) Track width in the 480; 640; 800; 1040; 1200
transverse conveyor 480 … 12001)
b bL (mm) Track width in the 640; 800; 1040; 1200
Q
longitudinal conveyor 640 … 12001)
bQ x bL Combination options 480 … 1200 x 640 … 1200
(mm x mm)

S = cable/plug
K = terminal box
L
b
R = right
L = left
M = center
1
29412
Technical data
Load

Dimensions
1
70,5 2
47,6
97
4
69
5
232
303,6
294
7
63
8
102
Ø136 9
bQ + 33
10
+ 10
0 11
12
+ 10
0 13
14
15
262
16
344
334
314
17
18
19
3842999002
33429
20
21
22
23
24

Circuit diagram
D8 D8
5 4
1
3 2
D8 D8
29410
1
1 Not included in delivery

BS 2/130 belt section
BS 2/130 belt section 1

30 kg
2
3
▶▶ Fully mounted belt section for transverse workpiece
pallet conveyance between parallel conveyor sections at
4
a distance of a = 135 mm
▶▶ With built-in drive
5
▶▶ Use with two HQ 2 lift transverse units
6
an EPA)
▶▶ Suitable for mounting on an ST 2 section with a profile 7
width of 50 mm 8
and WT 2/F-H 9
10
11
12
Accessories 13
▶▶ 2x HQ 2 for transverse conveyance, see p. 5-26 14
Delivery notes 15
▶▶ Incl. fastening material ▶▶ Fully assembled 16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

0
3
1
l=
of transport 640; 800; 1040; 1200
b
b (mm) Track width in direction 160 ... 1200
of transport

S = cable/plug
K = terminal box
R = right
L = left
30133
Technical data
Load
operation
Features
ESD Yes
Dimensions
Length l mm 130

Dimensions
1
2
130
10
3
102
4
43
5
302,3
6
8
Ø121
185
9
10
222,5
11
121,5
12
13
14
b – 100
b + 40
15
b
16
17
a = 135
18
3842999743
19
00117866
00117866
20
21
22
23
24

Use: To connect the TS 2plus module on a transverse

conveyor laterally (end-to-section), the following are also
required: Lift transverse unit
ST 2/B ST 2/C-H
SP 2/B ST 2/R-H
ST 2/B-100 ST 2/R-V
ST 2/C-100
ST 2/R-100
Transverse conveyor
AS 2/B-150, 3842518828 –
AS 2/B-250
AS 2/C-100, 3842528192 3842528192

AS 2/C-250
AS 2/C-400, 3842518828 3842518828

AS 2/C-700
AS 2/R-300, 3842528 192 3842528192

AS 2/R-700
AS 2/R-1200, 3842518828 3842518828

AS 2/R-2200
UM 2/B 3842518828 –
UM 2/C-60, UM 2/C-170, 3842528192 3842528192
UM 2/R-60, UM 2/R-170,
BS 2 3842525110 –
BS 2/C (drive side and return side) 3842528192 3842528192
BS 2/R (drive side and return side)
BS 2/C-H (drive side) 3842518828 3842518828

BS 2/R-H (drive side)
BS 2/C-H (return side) 3842528192 3842528192

BS 2/R-H (return side)
KU 2 (drive side and return side) 3842528192 3842528192
3842518828 3842528192 3842525110
M8x20 M8x60
(4x) M8x40 M8x25 (4x) M8x25
(4x) (4x) (6x)
10 (12x)
(4x)
(4x) (4x)
3
ISO 4017 (4x)
M8x8 M8
M8x25 10
(4x) (8x)
(4x) (4x) M8x40
M8 (8x) (2x)
21448 21453
21449

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Roller sections
Roller sections in conjunction with two lift transverse units

permit workpiece pallets to be conveyed between parallel
conveyor sections.


Intermediate section with roller 5-82 1
RS 2 roller section 5-84 4
RE roller elements 5-86

7
RB 2/UM 2 roller track set 5-88

10
11
12
RS 2/H roller section 5-90
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Intermediate section with roller
▶▶ Unmounted roller section for transverse workpiece

a distance of a = 45 to 135 mm
▶▶ Without built-in drive
▶▶ Conveyor medium: Rollers made of galvanized steel
width of 50 mm
WT 2/F-H
Installation between two ST 2 conveyor units or BS 2 belt

sections.
Alternatively, use as an inclined passive conveyor section.
Delivery notes
▶▶ Incl. fastening material ▶▶ Not assembled
Intermediate section with roller a = 45 3842553814

Dimensions
1
bQ 3
81
7
48
9
75
10
11
12
20,5
13
14
15
16
17
a
18
19
20
21
22
00116487
23
24
00126487

RS 2 roller section
RS 2 roller section
▶▶ Unmounted roller section for transverse workpiece

a distance of a = 90 to 200 mm
▶▶ Use as an inclined passive conveyor section is possible
▶▶ Conveyor medium: PA6 rollers
width of 50 mm
WT 2/F-H
Installation between two ST 2 conveyor units or BS 2 belt

sections.
Alternatively, use as an inclined passive conveyor section.
Delivery notes
RS 2 roller section a = 90 3842522140

RS 2 roller section
Technical data
1
bQ
4
a
7
L
b
00116086
10
Dimensions
11
b – 75
12
13
14
43
15
13,5
42 16
87
17
18
19
20
21
a
22
23
24
00116042

RE roller element
RE roller element
▶▶ Assembled roller elements for the manual transportation

of workpiece pallets
▶▶ Use as an inclined passive conveyor section is possible
▶▶ Conveyor medium: PA66 rollers
and WT 2/F-H
Roller elements can be clipped into SP 2/B section profiles The number of roller elements is calculated based on the
instead of driven belts. Roller sections constructed in this section length. The remaining measurement < 45 mm has to
way are an economical solution for moving workpiece be distributed by spacing the roller elements accordingly.
pallets or other similar pallets manually on a transfer
system.
Accessories
▶▶ SP 2/B section profile, see p. 3-4
Delivery notes
RB 39 roller element 10 3842520000
ESD RE 39 roller element1 10 3842538245
RB 45 roller element 100 3842319501
ESD RE 45 roller element1 100 3842538064
RE 45 roller element 100 3842319500
ESD SK RE 45 roller element1 100 3842538065
1
Version with conductive material in accordance with DIN EN 61 340-5-1, suitable for ESD-sensitive areas.

RE roller element
Technical data
1
Material number RE 39 3842520000 3842538245
RE 45 3842319501 3842538064 2
RE 45SK 3842319500 3842538065
Features 3
ESD No Yes
Material specification RE 39, RE 45, RE 45SK: RE 39, RE 45, RE 45SK:
4
Rollers: PA66 Rollers: PA66
Housing: PA6 Housing: PA6
RE 39: RE 39: 5
Bearing: Steel bolt Bearing: Steel bolt
6
Dimensions
7
RE 39
8
F = 40N
9
9
5
23,5
3,5
10
39 6
43
11
00109808
00109808 12
RE 45
F = 20N
13
14
2
3,5
22
15
45 43
16
00109807
00109807
17
RE 45 SK 18
F = 20N
19
2
13,5
20
30
3,5
21
45 6
43
22
00109805
00109805
23
24

RB 2/UM 2 roller track set
▶▶ Mounted roller section for mounting on AS 2/B or UM

2/B for transverse conveying
▶▶ Additional workpiece pallet support on the front
transition from AS 2/B to UM 2/B or from AS 2/B or
UM 2/B to a lift transverse unit
▶▶ One set is required for each AS 2/B or UM 2/B
▶▶ Required for workpiece pallet lengths of 160 mm;
recommended for longer lengths
▶▶ Without drive
▶▶ Can be combined with WT 2/E, WT 2, WT 2/F
Delivery notes
▶▶ Set (containing 2x roller track, 2x guide profile, ▶▶ Fully assembled
2x fastening kit)
RB 2/UM 2 roller track set Set 3842558657
Technical data
Features
Material specification Track: Aluminum
Rollers: Steel

9
30267
10
Dimensions
11
12
Ø13 13
14
25
15
11,3
16
40,5 7,5 7,5
47 33,0 17
18
22,3
9,5 19
20
21
22
23
52,0
24
29408

RS 2/H roller section
RS 2/H roller section St
▶▶ Mounted roller section for transverse workpiece pallet

conveyance between parallel conveyor sections at a
distance of a = 90 to 690 mm
▶▶ Conveyor medium: Accumulation roller chain with steel
accumulation rollers and small parts protection
width of 50 mm
and WT 2/F-H
Installation between two ST 2/…-H conveyor units or transverse unit. Alternatively, use as an inclined conveyor
BS 2/…-H belt sections with HQ 2/U-H or HQ 2/C-H lift section is possible.
Accessories
▶▶ Note on QV cross connectors: When conveyor section
distances a > 90 mm, we recommend stabilizing the
RS 2/H roller section using QV cross connectors, see
p. 5-92
Delivery notes
▶▶ Section, incl. accumulation roller chain with steel ▶▶ Fully assembled
accumulation rollers and small parts protection
▶▶ Incl. fastening material
Product designation a (mm) bl (mm) Material number
RS 2/H roller section 90 480; 640; 800; 1040; 1200 3842998744
290 640; 800; 1040; 1200 3842998744
490 800; 1040; 1200 3842998744
690 1040; 1200 3842998744

Technical data
1
Features 2
Material specification Section profile: Aluminum, natural; anodized
Accumulation roller chain: Steel accumulation
rollers and small parts protection 3
Dimensions
4
a (mm) Roller section length 90 ... 690
8
a
10
11
12
13
30050
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Dimensions
10
43
a
110
50
b Q – 75
b Q + 25
a = 90 a = 290 a = 490/690
QV QV
29407
a (mm) Number of QVs QV material number

90 ‒ ‒
290 1 3842993052/b = bQ
490 2 3842994635/b = bQ
690 2 3842994635/b = bQ

Leg sets | TS 2plus 7.0 6-1

Leg sets
1
Selection of leg sets 6-2 6
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

6-2 TS 2plus 7.0 | Leg sets
Selection of leg sets
New leg set height H
Defines the height of the leg sets with the new parameter
b
H, measured from floor to top of the conveyor medium
(= conveying level).
In addition, the height of the section profile is specified as

an additional order parameter (AO).
H
The height of the leg set to lower edge of section profile

hsz
(= hSZ) is calculated as follows: hSZ = H ‒ AO.

85
23734
H (AO = 100)
H (AO = 80)
30137


SZ 2 leg sets 6-4 1
SZ 2–ST 2 reinforcement 6-26

6
10
Foundation bracket, floor dowel, T-bolt, flange nut, bracket caps 6-28
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

SZ 2/… leg sets
Leg sets
Leg sets support the conveyor section. They have to be

mounted directly next to the drive and return units, and
underneath section joints. Conveyor units have to be
supported with extra leg sets at equal distances of
max. 2000 mm.
Fastening material
Leg sets must be anchored to the floor with foundation

brackets (3842146848) and floor dowels (3842526560)..
Bracket caps are not included in delivery for all leg sets.
Leveling feet
The height-adjustable leveling feet (incl. fastening material)

are included in delivery. The engagement depth of the
leveling feet must be at least 30 mm for all leg sets.
35
85
130
00126885
00126885
≥ 30 !
30138


SZ 2 leg set 6-6 1
SZ 2/H leg set 6-8

4
SZ 2/U leg set 6-10

7
SZ 2/U-H leg set 6-13

10
11
12
SZ 2/T leg set 6-16
13
14
15
SZ 2/T-H leg set 6-18
16
17
18
SZ 2/K-90, SZ 2/K-180 leg set 6-20
19
20
21
HD 2/H leg set 6-24
22
23
24

SZ 2 leg set
SZ 2 leg set
▶▶ Leg set for single-track conveyor sections on a single

conveying level
▶▶ Standard version
The leg sets support one belt section or one conveyor unit.
Accessories
▶▶ Foundation bracket (3842146848, see p. ) 6-28 ▶▶ Bracket caps, see p. 6-33
▶▶ Floor dowel (3842526560, see p. ) 6-30
Delivery notes
▶▶ Incl. height-adjustable leveling foot ▶▶ Assembled (MT = 1)
▶▶ Incl. all fastening material to mount on conveyor section, ▶▶ Not assembled (MT = 0)
drive module or return unit

SZ 2 leg set
1
b (mm) Track width in 160 … 1200 2
b direction of transport
H (mm) Transportation height ST 2/B-50: 350 … 2000 3

H = hSZ*+ AO Lift gate: 355 … 2000
ST 2/B: 375 … 2000
4
ST 2/B-100: 395 … 2000
AO Installation location 55; 60; 80; 100
5
H
SP 2/B-50: AO = 55
Lift gate: AO = 60
hsz
ST 2/B; SP 2/BH 6
BS 2; BS 2/M: AO = 80
ST 2/B-100; ST 2/C-100;
ST 2/R-100; ST 2/C-H; 7
ST 2/R-H; ST 2/R-V;
BS 2/C; BS 2/C-H;
BS 2/R; BS 2/R-H; 8
BS 2/R-V; CS/C: AO = 100
85
9
MT Kit 0; 1
0 = not assembled
23734 1 = assembled 10
23734
*hSZ = leg set height

Technical data 11
Features 12
ESD Yes
13
Dimensions
14
b
15
16
60
17
H
hsz
18
19
60
20
85
b–
45
21
75
b+
15
min.
22
130
00116811
23
24

SZ 2/H leg set
SZ 2/H leg set
▶▶ Leg set for heavy-duty single-track conveyor sections on

one conveying level
▶▶ Standard version
The leg sets support one belt section or one conveyor unit belt sections and conveyor units with SP 2/...-H section
with high loads. They are particularly suitable for BS 2/...-H profile.
Accessories
▶▶ Floor dowel (3842526560, see p. ) 6-30
Delivery notes

SZ 2/H leg set
1
b

H = hSZ*+ AO ST 2/B: 435 … 2000
ST 2/B-100: 455 … 2000
4
SP 2/B-50: AO = 55
5
H
ST 2/B; SP 2/BH;
hsz
BS 2; BS 2/M: AO = 80
6
ST 2/B-100; ST 2/C-100;
ST 2/R-100; ST 2/C-H; 7
ST 2/R-H; ST 2/R-V;
BS 2/C; BS 2/C-H;
BS 2/R; BS 2/R-H; 8
BS 2/R-V; CS/C: AO = 100
85
9
MT Kit 0; 1
0 = not assembled
1 = assembled 10
23736

11
Technical data
Features
ESD Yes 13
Dimensions 14
15
b
16
45
17
H
18
hsz
0
9
19
20
21
45
b–
22
min.
75
85
160
b+
15
23
00125218
24

SZ 2/U leg set
SZ 2/U leg set
▶▶ Leg set for single-track conveyor sections on two

conveying levels
The leg sets support two belt sections or two conveyor

units side by side, e.g. for a workpiece return.
Accessories
▶▶ Floor dowel (3842526560, see p. ) 6-30
Delivery notes

SZ 2/U leg set
1
b
H = hSZ*+ AO1)
ST 2/B: 525 … 2000
ST 2/B-100: 565 … 2000
60
4
H1 (mm) ST 2/B-50: 245 … 1770
H
H1 = hSZ1**+ AO12) ST 2/B: 270 … 1745

5
hsz
ST 2/B-100: 290 … 1725

AO1) Installation location 55; 80; 100
SP 2/B-50: AO = 55
6
H1
ST 2/B; SP 2/BH; 7
BS 2; BS 2/M: AO = 80
hsz1
ST 2/B-100; ST 2/ 8
C-100;
85
ST 2/R-100; ST 2/C-H;
ST 2/R-H; ST 2/R-V; 9
BS 2/C; BS 2/C-H;
23735 BS 2/R; BS 2/R-H;
10
BS 2/R-V; CS/C: AO = 100
AO12 Installation location 55; 80; 100
SP 2/B-50: AO1 = 55 11
ST 2/B; SP 2/BH;
BS 2; BS 2/M: AO1 = 80 12
ST 2/B-100; ST 2/
13
C-100;
ST 2/R-100; ST 2/C-H;
ST 2/R-H; ST 2/R-V; 14
BS 2/C; BS 2/C-H;
BS 2/R; BS 2/R-H;
BS 2/R-V; CS/C: AO1 = 100 15
MT Kit 0; 1
0 = not assembled 16
1 = assembled
*hSZ = leg set height at upper conveying level 17

** hSZ1 = leg set height at lower conveying level
1
Upper conveying level
2
Lower conveying level 18
Technical data
19
Features 20
ESD Yes
21
22
23
24

SZ 2/U leg set
Dimensions
60 b
H
hsz
H1
60
45
min.
b+
130
16
85
b+
10
6
00116810

SZ 2/U-H leg set
SZ 2/U-H leg set 1
3
▶▶ Leg set for heavy-duty single-track conveyor sections on
two conveying levels
4
10
11
12
The leg sets support two belt sections or two conveyor particularly suitable for BS 2/...-H belt sections or conveyor 13
units side by side, e.g. for a workpiece return. They are units with SP 2/...-H section profile.
14
Accessories
▶▶ Floor dowel (3842526560, see p. ) 6-30 16
Delivery notes 17
▶▶ Incl. height-adjustable leveling foot ▶▶ Assembled (MT = 1) 18
drive module or return unit 19
20
21
22
23
24

SZ 2/U-H leg set
b (mm) Track width in 400 … 1200
b direction of transport
H (mm) Transportation height ST 2/B-50: 535 … 2000

H = hSZ*+ AO1
ST 2/B: 585 … 2000
ST 2/B-100: 625 … 2000
H1 (mm) ST 2/B-50: 275 … 1740
H
H1 = hSZ1**+ AO1 2
ST 2/B: 300 … 1715
hsz
ST 2/B-100: 320 … 1695

AO 1
Installation location 55; 80; 100
SP 2/B-50: AO = 55
H1
ST 2/B; SP 2/BH;
hsz1
BS 2; BS 2/M: AO = 80
ST 2/B-100; ST 2/
C-100;
85
ST 2/R-100; ST 2/C-H;
ST 2/R-H; ST 2/R-V;
BS 2/C; BS 2/C-H;
23737 BS 2/R; BS 2/R-H;
BS 2/R-V; CS/C: AO = 100
AO1 2
Installation location 55; 80; 100
SP 2/B-50: AO1 = 55
ST 2/B; SP 2/BH;
BS 2; BS 2/M: AO1 = 80
ST 2/B-100; ST 2/
C-100;
ST 2/R-100; ST 2/C-H;
ST 2/R-H; ST 2/R-V;
BS 2/C; BS 2/C-H;
BS 2/R; BS 2/R-H;
BS 2/R-V; CS/C: AO1 = 100
MT Kit 0; 1
0 = not assembled
1 = assembled
*hSZ = leg set height at upper conveying level

*hSZ1 = leg set height at lower conveying level
1
Upper conveying level
2
Lower conveying level
Technical data
Features
ESD Yes

SZ 2/U-H leg set
Dimensions
1
3
b
5
45
6
H
7
hsz
8
0
9
H1
10
45
11
b+
min.
85
26 12
175
b+ 45
11
6
13
14
00125220
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

SZ 2/T leg set
SZ 2/T leg set
▶▶ Leg set for double-track conveyor sections on one

conveying level
The leg sets support two belt sections or two conveyor

units side by side.
Accessories
▶▶ Foundation bracket (3842146848, see p. 6-28) ▶▶ Bracket caps, see p. 6-33
▶▶ Floor dowel (3842526560, see p. ) 6-30
Delivery notes

SZ 2/T leg set
1
b a
b
H = hSZ*+ AO ST 2/B: 375 … 2000
ST 2/B-100: 395 … 2000
4
H
SP 2/B-50: AO = 55
5
hsz
ST 2/B; SP 2/BH;
BS 2; BS 2/M: AO = 80
6
ST 2/B-100; ST 2/C-100;
ST 2/R-100; ST 2/C-H; 7
ST 2/R-H; ST 2/R-V;
BS 2/C; BS 2/C-H;
BS 2/R; BS 2/R-H; 8
BS 2/R-V; CS/C: AO = 100
9
MT Kit 0; 1
85
0 = not assembled
1 = assembled 10
23738

conveyors 11
Technical data 12
Features 13
ESD Yes
14
Dimensions
15
b
a
16
b
17
18
H
hsz
19
20
21
min.
85
130
2(
b+
15
2( )+ 22
b+ a– 45
15 90
)+
a 23
00116813
24

SZ 2/T-H leg set
SZ 2/T-H leg set
▶▶ Leg set for heavy-duty double-track conveyor sections on

one conveying level
The leg sets support two belt sections or two conveyor BS 2/...-H belt sections or conveyor units with SP 2/...-H
units side by side. They are particularly suitable for section profile.
Accessories
▶▶ Floor dowel (3842526560, see p. ) 6-30
Delivery notes

SZ 2/T-H leg set
1
b a b (mm) Track width in 160 … 480 2
b H (mm) Transportation height ST 2/B-50: 410 … 2000 3
H = hSZ*+ AO ST 2/B: 435 … 2000
ST 2/B-100: 455 … 2000
4
SP 2/B-50: AO = 55
H
5
hsz
ST 2/B; SP 2/BH;
BS 2; BS 2/M: AO = 80
6
ST 2/B-100; ST 2/C-100;
ST 2/R-100; ST 2/C-H; 7
ST 2/R-H; ST 2/R-V;
BS 2/C; BS 2/C-H;
BS 2/R; BS 2/R-H; 8
BS 2/R-V; CS/C: AO = 100
9
MT Kit 0; 1
0 = not assembled
85
1 = assembled 10
23739

conveyors 11
Technical data 12
Features 13
ESD Yes
14
Dimensions
15
b a
16
b
17
H
18
hsz
19
0
9
20
21
2(
b+
25
2( )+ 22
b+ a–
90
min.
25
85
160
)+
a 45 23
24
00125222

SZ 2/K-90 leg set
SZ 2/K-90 leg set
▶▶ Leg set for K...-90 curves
The leg sets support a 90° curve.
Accessories
▶▶ Floor dowel (3842526560, see p. ) 6-30
Delivery notes
▶▶ Incl. all fastening material for mounting on the KE 2/90 ▶▶ Not assembled (MT = 0)
curve

SZ 2/K-90 leg set
1
H (mm) Transportation height 376 … 2000 2
H = hSZ*+ AO
AO Installation location 91 3
MT Kit 0; 1
0 = not assembled
1 = assembled 4

5
7
hsz
8
H
9
85
10
23742
Technical data 11
Features 12
ESD Yes
13
Dimensions
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
hsz
21
22
85
23742
23
24

SZ 2/K-180 leg set
SZ 2/K-180 leg set
▶▶ Leg set for K...-180 curves
The leg sets support a 180° curve.
Accessories
▶▶ Floor dowel (3842526560, see p. ) 6-30
Delivery notes
▶▶ Incl. all fastening material for mounting on the KE 2/180 ▶▶ Not assembled (MT = 0)
curve

SZ 2/K-180 leg set
1
H (mm) Transportation height 376 … 2000 3

H = hSZ*+ AO
AO Installation location 91
4
MT Kit 0; 1
0 = not assembled
1 = assembled 5
a (mm) Distance between 90; 135

b
conveyors
6
a

7
b
8
hsz
9
85
10
23740
Technical data 11
Features 12
ESD Yes
13
Dimensions
14
15
16
H
17
hsz
18
b
19
a
85
b
20
45
a x4
1=
5
2x
b
T–
60 21
+a
min.
130
22
23
00116817
24

HD 2/H leg set
HD 2/H leg set
▶▶ Leg sets for HD 2/H lift rotate unit

▶▶ For Size 2 over 50 kg (Size 2)
▶▶ For Size 3 generally (Size 3)
Accessories
▶▶ Foundation bracket (3842146848, see p. 6-28) ▶▶ Bracket caps, see p. 6-33
▶▶ Floor dowel (3842526560, see p. 6-30)
Delivery notes
▶▶ Incl. fastening material ▶▶ Not assembled (MT = 0)

HD 2/H leg set
1
HD 2/H leg set, Size 21

H (mm) Transportation height 595 … 2000
AO
H = hSZ*+ AO 3
DW (°) Rotation angle 90; 180
MT Kit 0; 1 4
0 = not assembled
1 = assembled
5
H
1
For Size 2 over 50 kg
*hSZ = leg set height 6
hsz
HD 2/H leg set, Size 32 7

55
85
H (mm) Transportation height 625 … 2000

H = hSZ*+ AO
9
DW (°) Rotation angle 90; 180
Y
MT Kit 0; 1
Z 10
31564 0 = not assembled
1 = assembled
Dimensions 11
2
For Size 3 generally
12
Size 2, Size 2, Size 3, Size 3,
AO
DW = 90° DW = 180° DW = 90° DW = 180° 13

AO 331 226 362 257
Y 235 235 480 480 14
Z 325 325 570 570
15
H
16
hsz
17
18
55
85
19
Y
20
Z
31564
21
22
23
24

SZ 2–ST 2 reinforcement
For absorbing horizontal forces from the sections.

Installation at the end of the section
Delivery notes
Scope of delivery
22,5
l (mm) Length 300 ... 2000
38
38
W
KD
=
L
38
38
23741

Technical data
1
10
00127904
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

210x90x42 foundation bracket
Foundation brackets are used for securing frames to the The hole for the floor dowel can be drilled out without
floor. removing the foundation bracket
Accessories
▶▶ Floor dowel (3842526560, see p. ) 6-30
▶▶ M8x25 T-bolt (3842528718, see p. ) 6-31
▶▶ M8 flange nut (3842345081, see p. ) 6-32
210x90x42 foundation bracket 20 3842146848
Technical data
Features
Material specification Plate steel; galvanized, transparent chromated

Dimensions
1
2
22,5
9,5
3
31
l2
4
L
l1
6
4
9
7
42
8
31
13 9
90
00109462
10
Length Length Dimension

11
l1 l2 L
(mm) (mm) (mm) 12
91 54.5 210
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

M8x80-15 floor dowel
M8x80-15 floor dowel
▶▶ For anchoring foundation brackets to the floor
M8x80-15 floor dowel 100 3842526560
Technical data
Features
Dimensions
D
l2
L
l1
D
00109714
l2 = maximum value
Length Length Dimension Dimension

l1 l2 L D
(mm) (mm) (mm)
65 15 80 M8

HS10-M8x25 T-bolt
HS10-M8x25 T-bolt 1
Accessories 8
▶▶ M8 flange nut (3842345081, see p. 6-32) 9

M8x25 T-bolt 100 3842528718
11
Technical data 12
Features 13
ESD Yes
Material specification Steel; galvanized 14
Thread size M8x25
Dimensions 15
Length l mm 19
16
Dimensions
M 17
18
b
19
L
20
00109380
21
Dimension Dimension Dimension 22

b l L
00109380 (mm) (mm) (mm)
23
19 19 25
24

M8 flange nut
M8 flange nut
Accessories
▶▶ M8x25 T-bolt (3842528718, see p. 6-31)
M8 flange nut 100 3842345081
Technical data
Features
ESD Yes
Thread size M8
Dimensions
Ø21
8
00109379
00109379

Bracket caps
Bracket caps 1
90/90 4
5
45/45
8
45/90
10
11
12
45x45 cap; signal gray 100 3842548862 14
45x45 cap; black 100 3842548863
45x90 cap; signal gray 100 3842548864 15
45x90 cap; black 100 3842548865
90x90 cap; signal gray 20 3842548868 16
90x90 cap; black 20 3842548869
17
Technical data
Material number 3842548862 3842548863 3842548864 3842548865 3842548868 3842548869 18
Features
ESD No Yes No Yes No Yes 19
Material specification Polypropylene Polypropylene Polypropylene Polypropylene Polypropylene Polypropylene
20
Dimensions
21
45/45 45/90 90/90
22
90
90
45
23
45 90 90
24
30296

Leg set combination matrix
Leg set/bracket/cap combination matrix

Bracket Number of bracket caps (black or signal gray)
45x45 45x90 90x90 45x45 45x90 90x90
Black Black Black Signal gray Signal gray Signal gray
3842548863 3842548865 3842548869 3842548862 3842548864 3842548868
Leg set SZ 2 45x45 8 8

3842996320
SZ 2/H 45x90 4 4
3842996321 90x90 4 4
SZ 2/U 45x45 12 12
3842996322
SZ 2/U-H 45x45 8 8
3842996323 90x90 4 4
SZ 2/T 45x45 12 12
3842996324
SZ 2/T-H 45x45 4 4
3842996325 45x90 4 4
90x90 4 4
SZ 2/K-90 45x45 2 2
3842996326
SZ 2/K-180 45x45 4 4
3842996327
Leg set HD 2/H Size 2 45x45 4 4

3842993324
HD 2/H Size 3 45x45 4 4

3842993325

Positioning and orientation | TS 2plus 7.0 7-1

Positioning
1
and orientation 3
Selection of positioning units 7-2 6
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

7-2 TS 2plus 7.0 | Positioning and orientation
Selection of positioning units
In order to process and maintain manufacturing tolerances, Intended use

workpiece pallets must be stopped and positioned in the
processing station. ▶▶ A VE 2 stop gate (see p. 8-6) is sufficient for use with a
Depending on the design, the positioning unit can move the manual workplace that has low requirements for
workpiece pallets with an accuracy of ±0.05 mm. positioning accuracy and if no forces act upon the
Vertical process forces of up to 100 kN can be taken up. workpiece pallet
▶▶ Transverse positioning accuracy can be improved using
a workpiece pallet inner guide (see p. 7-5)
▶▶ To lift the workpiece pallet from the conveyor medium:
PE 2 (see p. 7-8) and PE 2/X (see p. 7-14)
▶▶ For larger lifting distances: HP 2 (see p. 7-27) and
HP 2/L (see p. 7-18)
▶▶ For high forces, e.g., in presses or in riveting machines:
PE 2/XP, see p. 7-36
▶▶ For process force decoupling: PE 2/XX, see p. 7-44
▶▶ To change the workpiece pallet orientation:
HD 2 lift rotate unit (see p. 7-52) and HD 2/H lift rotate
unit (see p. 7-60)

Positioning and orientation | TS 2plus 7.0 7-3

Workpiece pallet inner guide ±0,5mm 7-5 1
PE 2 positioning unit ±0,1mm 300 N 7-8 4

30 F
5
PE 2/X positioning unit ±0,1mm 3500 N 7-14

7
100 F
HP 2/L lift positioning unit ±0,05mm 400 N 7-18

10
40 F
11
12
HP 2 lift positioning unit ±0,05mm 100 N 7-27
F 13
110
14
15
PE 2/XP positioning unit ±0,05mm 100 kN 7-36
20 30 F 16
17
18
PE 2/XX process force decoupling 7-44
∞ 19
20
21
HD 2 lift rotate unit 7-52
16 22
23
24

PE 2/H positioning unit 7-56

±0,1mm 3500 N
240 F
HD 2/H lift rotate unit 7-60
240

Positioning and orientation | TS 2plus 7.07-5
Workpiece pallet inner guide
Workpiece pallet inner guide ±0,5mm

1
3
▶▶ Easy mounting on conveyor sections
▶▶ Positioning with the guide groove on the WT 2
4
workpiece pallet
▶▶ Can be combined with all WT 2, WT 2/F and WT 2/E
5
workpiece pallets
10
11
12
Using a workpiece pallet inner guide and a VE 2 stop gate, positioned at the repeat accuracy (±0.5 mm), i.e., for 13
a workpiece pallet with low requirements can be manual assembly processes.
14
Accessories
▶▶ VE 2/… stop gate, see p. 8-4
16
Delivery notes
▶▶ Including fastening material for installation on the ST 2 ▶▶ Not assembled
conveyor section or BS 2 belt section. 18
19
Product designation Length l (mm) Material number
Workpiece pallet inner guide 45 3842525634 20
Workpiece pallet inner guide 150 0842601001
Workpiece pallet inner guide 450 0842601004
23
24

Technical data
Material number 0842601001 0842601003 0842601004 0842601006 3842525634
Features
ESD Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Material specification Steel; Steel; Steel; Steel; Steel;
stainless stainless stainless stainless stainless
Dimensions
Length l mm 150 300 450 600 45
Repeat accuracy mm ±0.5 ±0.5 ±0.5 ±0.5 ±0.5
00116109

Dimensions
1
5
60
l 1,5
8
23753 10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

PE 2 positioning unit
PE 2 positioning unit 30
±0,1mm 300 N
F
▶▶ To position a workpiece pallet in a manual/automatic

processing station
▶▶ For high positioning accuracy requirements up to
±0.1 mm
▶▶ Can be combined with all WT 2 and WT 2/F workpiece
pallets up to 400 x 400 mm
Accessories
▶▶ VE 2/… stop gate, see p. 8-4 ▶▶ Position sensor kit for PE 2, see p. 7-12
▶▶ Pneumatic equipment, connectors
Delivery notes

1
Product designation Positioning unit Material number
w x ld
(mm) 2
PE 2 positioning unit 160 x 160 3842504706 3

PE 2 positioning unit 160 x 240 3842504707
4
5
6
7
8
9
Technical data
10
Material number 3842504706 3842504712 3842504716
3842504707 3842504713 3842504717
3842504708 3842504714 3842504718 11
3842504710 3842504715 3842504719
3842504711
12
Load
13
Features
ESD Yes
14
Required compressed air connection p bar 4…6
15
Pneumatic connector 1
Ø mm G1/8"
WT lift above conveying level mm 2.5
16
Repeat accuracy mm ±0.1
Permissible vertical process forces2 N 300
1
17
Connector for G1/8" thread must be attached by customer
2
Incl. WT 2
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Dimensions
±0 2,5
±0
1
8
106
~132
16
~52
157 61
= bL
56
bWT – 80
1
R1
80
lT = 160: lT + 65
lT > 160: lT – 15
00116777a
00116777a

Circuit diagram
1
G 1/8" 2
3
G 1/8"
4
4 2 8
51 3 9
1 10
31597
1 Not included in delivery 11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Position sensor kit for PE 2
▶▶ For position sensor for PE 2 positioning unit
Accessories
▶▶ PE 2 positioning unit, see p. 7-8
▶▶ M12x1 sensor with SN= 4 mm rated sensing range, see
p. 8-108
Position sensor kit for PE 2 3842508933

Technical data
1
10
00116123
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

PE 2/X positioning unit
PE 2/X positioning unit 100

±0,1mm 3500 N
F
▶▶ To position a workpiece pallet in a manual/automatic

processing station
▶▶ Positioning accuracy up to ±0.1 mm when assembled on
a separate machine frame
▶▶ WT lift above transportation level, approx. 9 mm
▶▶ Positioning via the PE 2 positioning pins and the
positioning bushings on the WT 2 workpiece pallet
▶▶ Mounting holes on lift frame as an optional fastening
point for a separate machine frame
▶▶ Suitable for mounting on an ST 2/… section with a
▶▶ Can be combined with WT 2 and WT 2/F workpiece
pallets
Accessories
▶▶ VE 2/… stop gate, see p. 8-4
Delivery notes
▶▶ Switch bracket for mounting M12 sensors for top
position sensing

1
b (mm) Track width in direction 480; 640; 800; 1040; 1200 2
b of transport 480 … 12001
lT (mm) Length in direction of 480; 640; 800; 1040; 1200 3
transport 480 … 12001
w x ld Combination options 480 x 480; 640; 800
4
T
l
(mm x mm) 640 x 480; 640; 800

800 x 480; 640; 800;
1040; 1200 5
1040 x 640; 800; 1040;
1200;
1200 x 800; 1040; 1200 6
480 … 1200 x 480 … 1200
7
1)
10
00126893
Technical data 11
Load 12
Features 13
ESD Yes
WT lift above conveying level mm 9
Repeat accuracy1 mm ±0.1 16
1
When assembled on a separate machine frame 17
2
Incl. WT 2
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Dimensions
"X"
Ø12
1)
0
38,6
40
35,6
132,8
3)
19,6
1)
2)
33 4)
0
9
4,4
"X" ST 2
IT – 66
00125225
00125225
1) ST 2 conveyor level
2) PE 2/X, lower position: 4.4 mm below ST 2 conveyor level
3) PE 2/X, upper position: 9 mm above ST 2 conveyor level
4) Total stroke 33 mm

Dimensions
1
IT – 36 2
IT – 194
bT – 299
6
b – 261
b – 115
b – 75
7
IT – 232 9
IT – 66
10
00125226 00125227
Circuit diagrams 11
12
13
14
15
16
17
5 4
1 18
3 2
19
1
20
00013098
21
22
23
24

HP 2/L lift positioning unit
HP 2/L lift positioning unit 40

±0,05mm 400 N
F
▶▶ Positions a workpiece pallet in a processing station with

high positioning accuracy requirements
▶▶ Positioning with exchangeable positioning pins in the
HP 2/L and positioning bushings in the WT 2 workpiece
pallet
▶▶ Lifting cylinder Ø 40 mm with damping for the lower and
upper end position
▶▶ Exchange of lifting cylinder possible without
disassembling the lift plate
▶▶ 5 lift ranges h0 from 0 ... 240 mm, continuously
adjustable central lift height within the lift range
▶▶ Optional lifting cylinder for b = 240 mm, center (HA = 0)
or offset (HA = 1).
Space-saving arrangement made possible by inner
WT stop
▶▶ Adjustment time at H = 50 mm without load:
Upward stroke = 0.5 s, downward stroke = 0.5 s
(= lift range from 0 to 28 mm)
▶▶ Can be combined with workpiece pallets WT 2, WT 2/F,
WT 2/E
Accessories
▶▶ Position sensor set for SA lifting cylinder, see p. 7-22
▶▶ Position sensor set with RA turret stop, see p. 7-26
▶▶ HP 2/L housing element, see p. 7-18
Delivery notes
▶▶ Incl. throttle non-return valve

1
b (mm) Track width in direction of 160; 240; 320 2
transport
b
lT (mm) Length in direction of trans- 160; 240; 320 3
port
w x ld Combination options 160 x 160; 240; 320
4
lT
(mm x mm) 240 x 160; 240; 320

320 x 160; 240; 320
5
hN (mm) Nominal stroke 50; 100; 160; 200;
250
AO Installation location UB; AT; O

6
Under the conveyor section
(AO = UB) 7
On the machine table
(AO = AT)
For custom design 8
(AO = O)
HA Lift arrangement 0; 11 9
Centered (HA = 0)
Eccentric (HA = 1)
10
23764
1
HA = 1 only when b = 240 mm
Technical data 11
Load 12
Features 13
ESD Yes
Repeat accuracy 1
mm ±0.05
Permissible vertical process forces2 N 400 16
1
Applies only to strokes of up to 204 mm
2
Incl. WT 2 17
Lift range 18
Nominal stroke WT lift above conveying level
hN h0
19
(mm) (mm)
50 0 ... 28 20
100 35 ... 78
160 95 ... 138 21
200 135 ... 178
250 185 ... 228
22
23
24

Dimensions
240 x 240
(40)
(2)
H1
(22)
(22)
2
(125±0,5)
H2
H3
10,5
27656
Compressed air Lifting force

(bar) (N)
4 350
5 450
6 550

Offset lifting cylinder (HA = 1)

1
40
2
5
00127925
Circuit diagrams 6
D8
8
9
D8
10
11
12
13
4 2
14
5 13
1 15
27657
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

SA cylinder position sensor
▶▶ Cylinder switch with clamping holder for lifting cylinder

position sensing
Note: Position sensor can only be mounted on the side
Accessories
▶▶ Connection cable with plug
Delivery notes
Scope of delivery
▶▶ 2x SN2 series cylinder switch (cube)
▶▶ 2x clamping holder for cylinder switch
SA cylinder position sensor 2 3842536974
Technical data
SN2 series cylinder switch (cube)
Features
Connector M8x1, without cable
Function indicator LED

Additional
information
Contact type Reed, 3-conductor
Operating voltage AC 12-30, DC 12-36 V

9
00127913
10
Circuit diagrams
11
1
+/-/~
3
-/+/~ 12
4
RL
13
14
M8x1
3 1
4 3
26843 15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

HP 2/L housing element
▶▶ Housing element for HP 2/L lift positioning unit
Product designation Nominal stroke hN Length L Material number
(mm) (mm)
HP 2/L housing element 50 315 3842536977


Dimensions
1
205 4
145
7
10
11
L
12
13
14
15
16
17
28904
18
19
28904
20
Length L Material number 21

(mm)
315 3842536977 22
353 3842536960
715 3842536962
23
24

RA position sensor set
RA position sensor set
▶▶ Position sensor for HP 2/L special design with turret

stop
For use with a turret stop (e.g., Somatec), the HP 2/L can switch to sense the upper positions on the turret stop (RA
be ordered with longer guide rails as a modification. position sensor set).
An accompanying sensor is used instead of the cylinder
Delivery notes
Scope of delivery
▶▶ 1x SN 2 series cylinder switch (cube) ▶▶ 1x switch bracket for mounting on the base plate
▶▶ 1x clamping holder for cylinder switch
▶▶ 1x M12x1 sensor with SN= 8 mm rated sensing range,
length 50 mm (3842557633), see p. 8-108
RA position sensor 3842536975
Circuit diagrams
1 E2
+/-/~ 1/BN
L+
3
-/+/~ I 4/BK
4
RL
3/BU
L-
2
M12 x1
M8x1
3 1 3 1
4 4 6
26843
3 00127928

HP 2 lift positioning unit
HP 2 lift positioning unit 110

±0,05mm 1100 N
F
1
3
high positioning accuracy requirements and higher
4
workpiece pallet weights.
▶▶ Positioning via the HP 2 positioning pins and the
5
▶▶ Lifting cylinder with adjustable top-end and bottom
stop-end damping 6
▶▶ Top-end damping takes effect only under full lift.
▶▶ Continuously adjustable lift height in 8 lift ranges hN of 7
0 ... 404 mm
▶▶ Can be combined with workpiece pallets WT 2, WT 2/F, 8
WT 2/E
9
10
11
12
Damping at the top end of the cylinder takes effect only fixing the workpiece pallet while the HP 2 is in the highest 13
under full lift. With larger lifts, we recommend separately position in order to improve positioning accuracy.
14
Accessories
▶▶ VE 2 stop gate, see p. 8-4 ▶▶ Damping kit (3842211355) to set the WT on the
▶▶ Throttle non-return valve, exhaust air, G3/8", diameter conveyor medium without any shocks 16
d = 6 mm ▶▶ HP 2 housing element, see p. 7-34
17
Delivery notes
▶▶ Switch bracket for mounting of M12 sensors for top and 19
bottom lift position sensing
20
21
22
23
24

b
b (mm) Track width in direction 160; 240; 320; 400; 480
of transport
lT (mm) Length in direction of 01; 160; 240; 320; 400;

transport 480; 640; 800
lT
w x ld Combination options 160 x 01; 160; 240; 320;

(mm x mm) 400; 480
240 x 01; 160; 240; 320;
400; 480
320 x 01; 160; 240; 320;
400; 480
400 x 01; 320; 400; 480;
640; 800
480 x 01; 320; 400; 480;
640; 800
hN (mm) Nominal stroke 55; 100; 150; 200; 250;

300; 350; 400
AO Installation location UB; AT; O

Under the conveyor sec-
tion (AO = UB) On the
machine table (AO = AT)
23756 For custom design with-
out fastening material
(AO = O)
1
If the value is "0", HP 2 will be delivered with a lift plate (3842516048, see
p. 7-31) instead of the lift position plate for custom designing of the lift
positioning plate.
Technical data
Load
Features
ESD Yes
Pneumatic connector 2
d mm 6
Repeat accuracy mm ±0.05
1
Incl. WT 2
2
Throttle non-return valve, exhaust air with connector, diameter d = 6 mm, for thread G 3/8" must be attached by the customer

Lift range
1
Cylinder total lift Nominal stroke WT lift above conveying level
hG hN h0
(mm) (mm) (mm) 2
80 55 0 ... 59
3
125 100 60 ... 104
175 150 105 ... 154
4
225 200 155 ... 204
275 250 205 ... 254
5
325 300 255 ... 304
375 350 305 ... 354
6
425 400 355 ... 404
7
Dimensions
8
9
b – 80
max.
10
F 110 kg 40*
(LT=160)
2
11
ho
23
1
20 (AO = UB)
25 (AO = AT)
12
A = 20
100
100
13
50
14
h2 = hG + 389
h2 = hN + 389
80
15
434,3
1
461,3
260
300 16
325
hG 17
18
19
230
160 20
21
00116006
00116006
22
* Eccentric position for WT LT = 160 mm

1 Fastening kit (UB or AT) 23
2 Positioning plate
h0 WT lift above transportation level
24
hG total cylinder lift

b – 80
max. 40*
F 110 kg
(LT=160)
2
ho
8,3
20 (AO = UB)
25 (AO = AT)
A = 20
100
100
50
h2 = hG + 389
h2 = hN + 389
80
434,3
461,3
453
260
300
325
hG
230
160
33020
00116006
* Eccentric position for WT LT = 160 mm

1 Fastening kit (UB or AT)
2 Positioning plate
h0 WT lift above transportation level
hG total cylinder lift

1
3 3842516048
200±0,02 (b = 160, 320, 400, 480)

164±0,02 M8 2
12
15
3
165±0,02
M6
130±0,02 (b = 240)
150
10
( 25H7)
4
80
15
40
( 8K8)
20 140±0,02 8H7 (4x) 5

180 115 70
300 6
25
325±0,4
7
00116007
8
3 Lift plate
9
Circuit diagrams
10
G 3/8" 11
2
12
G 3/8"
13
14
15
16
17
4 2
5 13 18
1
00116560a 19

2 Adjustable top-end damping
20
21
22
23
24

Kit for lower end damping
▶▶ Fasten each switching tappet (1) to the metal bracket

3842211355
"X" with two cylinder head screws M6x20 (3), lock
washers (6) and hexagon nuts (7)
▶▶ Fasten each valve (2) to the limit switch holder "Y" with
three cylinder head screws M6x35 (4) lock washers (5)
washers (6) and hexagon nuts (7)
5x
2x 3x
Kit for bottom-end damping 3842211355

10
11
UE 1) GT 2 2) OE 3)
12
4) 5x 13
2x 3x
14
15
16
A B
17
R S
18
P
19
1 Lower end position

2 Tappet
20
3 Upper end position
4 Damping (adjustable) 21
22
23
24

HP 2 housing element
▶▶ Housing element for HP 2 lift positioning unit
Product designation Nominal stroke hN Length L Material number
(mm) (mm)
HP 2 housing element 55 267 3842510157


Dimensions
1
2
L 144
211
6
10
11
12
13
14
29402 15
Length L Material number 16

(mm)
17
29402
267 3842510157
312 3842510158
362 3842510159 18
412 3842510160
462 3842532409 19
512 3842532410
562 3842532411 20
612 3842532412
21
22
23
24

PE 2/XP positioning unit
PE 2/XP positioning unit ±0,05mm 100 kN

F
30

especially high vertical process force requirements
(100 kN/60 kN), such as those needed for press-fit or
riveting work.
▶▶ Mounting in force cells, positive force introduction
▶▶ Can be combined with WT 2 workpiece pallets
Note: Maximum total workpiece pallet weight mG, incl. anvil

plate or positioning plate for BG 1, is: mG = 20 kg and BG 2:
mG = 30 kg.
Accessories
▶▶ Anvil plate for standard sizes from 160 x 160 mm to ▶▶ VE 2/… stop gate, see p. 8-4
320 x 240 mm, see p 7-40 ▶▶ 2x M12x70 and M12x67 sensor with rated sensing range
▶▶ Anvil plate for 320 x 240 mm workpiece pallets, see p. SN = 4 mm, can be installed flush, see p. 8-108/8-110
7-39
▶▶ Positioning pins, round and flat-sided
h = 30 mm for standard anvil plate
h = 21 mm for special designs
Delivery notes
Product designation Size Width of workpiece pallet Material number
(mm)
PE 2/XP positioning unit BG 1 160 3842242350

PE 2/XP positioning unit BG 2 240 3842242351

Technical data
1
Material number 3842242350 3842242351
Load 2
Max. total workpiece pallet weight mG kg 20 30
Features 3
ESD Yes Yes
Design
4
Size BG BG 1 BG 2
5
Repeat accuracy mm ±0.05 ±0.05
Permissible vertical process forces1 kN 60 100
6
WT lift above conveying level mm 3 3
1)
Incl. WT 2
7
Dimensions
1 PE 2/XP 8
3 2 1 4
2 Anvil plate
20 C
3 Positioning pin, round
F
SD8
9
4 Positioning pin, flat-sided
3
30
10
118
11
53
45
10 G
12
D
A B
13
14
30
15
94
45
16
1
17
=
E
F
18
8H7 8H7
9 9
19
3842242390 3842242395
30 30 20
3 4
21
39 39
22
00139119
23
24

Dimensions
Size Workpiece Workpiece A B C D E F G
pallet size lT pallet size b
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
BG 1 160 160 322 142 222 270 80 40±0.2 78.5

BG 1 240 160 322 142 222 270 80 40±0.2 118.5
BG 2 160 240 405 146 298 350 160 100±0.3 78.5
BG 2 240 240 405 146 298 350 160 100±0.3 118.5
BG 2 320 240 405 146 298 350 160 100±0.3 158.5
Circuit diagrams
D8
D8
4 2
5 13
00127886.eps
Not included in delivery

Use of PE 2/XP positioning unit with workpiece pallets

1
larger than LT = 320 mm x b = 240 mm
The PE 2/XP positioning unit, designed to absorb forces,
2
can also be used with workpiece pallets with large
dimensions if the process forces are applied at certain
1 PE 2/XP 3
BG 2 (10000 kg) points.
4
The PE 2/XP must then be arranged in such a manner that
it can absorb the forces directly.
5
The forces may be applied off-center.
b = 400
160
However, where process forces are applied must be within

WT the area of the upper part of the PE 2/XP. 6
300
7
lT = 560 ST2
00116145
10
1 Anvil plate, example:
Process forces applied at center of workpiece pallet 11
Design notes 12
When the unit is used with workpiece pallets larger than
lT x b = 320 x 240 mm, a special anvil plate with a thickness 13
3 1 4 2 of 21 mm and a positioning plate with a thickness of 9 mm
WT 2 must be designed. 14
3
9 21
The positioning plate must also receive the positioning 15

pins. The anvil plate should support the WT carrying plate.
16
The anvil plate can also be replaced with several domes for
workpiece pallet support and power transmission. Benefits: 17
125
Weight reduction.
ST2/… PE 2/XP 18
The maximum total workpiece pallet weight mG, incl. anvil
plate or positioning plate, is as follows for the following
19
sizes:
BG 1: mG = 20 kg
20
BG 2: mG = 30 kg
00116145
21
1 Anvil plate
2 Positioning pin, round 22
3 Positioning pin, flat-sided
4 Positioning plate 23
24

Anvil plate
Anvil plate
▶▶ For PE 2/XP positioning unit
Product designation BG Track width in Length in direction of Material number
direction of transport transport
b (mm) lT (mm)
Anvil plate BG 1 160 160 3842242375

Anvil plate BG 2 240 160 3842242376
BG 1 160 240 3842242376
Anvil plate BG 2 240 240 3842242377
Anvil plate BG 2 240 320 3842242378
Technical data
Material number 3842242375 3842242376 3842242377 3842242378
Load
Max. total workpiece mG kg BG 1: BG 1; 2: BG 2: BG 2:
pallet weight 20 20; 30 30 30

Anvil plate
3
T
l
6
b
00116113
10
Anvil plate drilling plan
Workpiece Workpiece Type b l x y
11
pallet size pallet size lWT
bWT 12
Ø15 Ø15
10
30
160 160 a1 80 80 15 40 13
a2 80 80 65 40
160 240 a1 80 160 15 40 14
Ø9 Ø9
a2 80 160 145 40
240 160 a1 80 160 15 40 15
y a2 80 160 145 40
l±1 240 240 a1 160 160 20 80 16
a2 160 160 140 80
a1 240 320 a1 160 240 20 80 17

b±1
a2 160 240 220 80

a2
18
x
19
35156
20
21
22
23
24

Anvil plate
Drilling plan for upper part

of PE 2/XP (BG 1)
222,5
5
10
10
Ø16H7 Ø12F7 5
25
105
37
50
30
18,5 130
124
(6,5)
204
9
35157
Drilling plan for upper part

of PE 2/XP (BG 2)
298
6,5 42 20
200 0,2
0,02
65
120 0,2
62,5
0,02
0,2
160
125
130
5 x M8, 12 tief
4x 8 , 15 tief
124 0,02
204 0,02
284 0,02
00126848

Positioning pin, round
Positioning pin, round 1
3
Product designation Length Height Material number

l (mm) h (mm) 5
Positioning pin, round 30 21 3842242391

6
7
Dimensions 8
h 9
10
Ø8r6
Ø12e7
11
3
I 12
00116053
13
Positioning pin, flat-sided 14
15
16
Product designation Length Height Material number 17
l (mm) h (mm)
Positioning pin, flat-sided 30 21 3842242396 18

Positioning pin, flat-sided 38 21 3842242397
Positioning pin, flat-sided 39 30 3842242395 19
20
Dimensions
21
h
°
30
22
ø12 e7
ø8 r6
9
23
30
4,5
3
°
10
24
00116052
I

PE 2/XX process force decoupler

∞
Components
▶▶ For mounting processes with especially high demands

on vertical process forces
▶▶ To guide the belt or toothed belt near a force cell to be
constructed by the customer.
▶▶ Permissible vertical process force depending on the
construction by the customer
▶▶ Lift below conveying level approx. 1 mm.
▶▶ Prepositioning via VE (accessories)
WT 2/F-H, on which the customer must install spacer
plates under the force introduction side
The process force decoupler is assembled using the

following parts:
▶▶ Spring element in versions with 5.8 N/cm and 10 N/cm
surface load, see p. 7-46
▶▶ Transition pieces to and from the spring elements,
see p. 7-48
▶▶ Lateral guides, see p. 7-50
Accessories
▶▶ Anvil (customer force cell) to absorb process forces at
the mounting location of the positioning unit
▶▶ Substructure plate for workpiece pallets to transfer the
process forces to the anvil (provided by customer)
▶▶ VE 2 stop gate, see p. 8-4

Mode of operation
1
Vertical process forces are deflected via a force cell
constructed by the customer. In doing so, the plate of
2
the workpiece pallet is supported via the spacer blocks
on the anvil of the force cell. The guide profile is
3
replaced by spring elements near the force cell to
prevent the conveyor medium (belt or toothed belt)
4
from getting jammed between the workpiece pallet and
guide profile. The conveyor medium can thus be pushed
5
00126859
down by up to 1.5 mm.
00126860
10
11
12
13
14
00126861
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Spring element
Spring element
▶▶ For mounting in sections where the workpiece pallet is

stressed by the process forces
▶▶ For section loads of 5.8 N/cm and 10 N/cm
Delivery notes
Scope of delivery
▶▶ Set containing 2x spring element
10 N/cm spring element Set 3842536930
5.8 N/cm spring element Set 3842536931
Technical data
Material number 3842536930 3842536931
Features
ESD Yes Yes
Length of workpiece pallet Quantity required per section 5.8 N/cm section load 10 N/cm section load
profile 3842536931 3842536930
lWT X mWT max1 mWT max1
(mm) (kg) (kg)
160 2 9.3 16
240 3 14.0 23.1
320 4 18.7 31.9
400 5 23.3 40
480 6 28.0 48

Spring element
Length of workpiece pallet Quantity required per section 5.8 N/cm section load 10 N/cm section load 1
profile 3842536931 3842536930
lWT X mWT max1 mWT max1
(mm) (kg) (kg) 2
640 8 37.3 64
3
800 10 46.7 70
1040 13 60.7 70
1 4
Maximum workpiece pallet weight, incl. spacer block/base plate
10
11
12
13
30063
14
Dimensions 15
16
25,2 17
19,9
18
25,85
25,15
3
19
31,8
20
21
80
40
22
38,8
23
24
00125247

Transition piece
Transition piece
▶▶ For transitioning from guide profile to spring elements

and vice versa
▶▶ For use with the belt or toothed belt conveyor medium
Delivery notes
Scope of delivery
▶▶ Set containing 2x left transition piece, 2x right transition
piece
Transition piece for belt Set 3842536932
Transition piece for toothed belt Set 3842536933
Technical data
Material number 3842536932 3842536933
Features
ESD Yes Yes
Dimensions
Length l mm 80 80

Transition piece
Dimensions
1
42 ZR: a = 25,5 3
a GT2: a = 31
12,3
8,7
4
2,4
12
20
8,3 5
25,4
6
16,4
7
80
00125248
9
10
00125248
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Lateral guide
Lateral guide
▶▶ For laterally guiding workpiece pallets in the sections

where the spring elements are mounted
▶▶ A WT 2 stop can be positioned diagonally the stop gate
to prevent workpiece pallets from rotating and tilting
Delivery notes
Scope of delivery
▶▶ 1 set (containing 2x lateral guide), incl. fastening
material
Lateral guide Set 3842536926
Technical data
Features
ESD Yes
Material specification Sheet steel; galvanized
Dimensions
Length l mm 80

Lateral guide
Dimensions
1
3
8,5
5
60,5
6
52
15,5
7
7,5 15 1,5
80 8
10
00125249
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

HD 2 lift rotate unit

16
▶▶ Turning angles on the Z axis: 90° or 180°. The direction

of rotation of the HD 2/90° can be individually selected
for each workpiece pallet as required
▶▶ WT lift 40 mm or 90 mm above transportation level
The version with a 40 mm lift is suitable for turning
workpiece pallets directly above the conveyor section. If
there are any components mounted at the side of the
workpiece pallet, e.g., identification and data storage
modules, it may be necessary to select the version with
a 90 mm lift
▶▶ Max. permitted mass moment of inertia: 0.65 kgm2
The HD 2 lift rotate unit turns workpiece pallets to the Work on the HD 2 is permitted without additional forces.
required orientation. On circuits without curves it ensures
that the workpiece pallet always runs with the correct
orientation, i.e., front is always front.
Accessories
▶▶ VE 2 stop gate, see p. 8-4
▶▶ M12x1 sensor with rated sensing range SN ≥ 4 mm, can
be installed at 0.5 mm rather than being installed flush,
see p. 8-108
Delivery notes
Scope of delivery

Product designation b lT DW h Material number
(mm) (mm) (°) (mm) 2
HD 2 lift rotate unit 160 160 90 40 3842525847
HD 2 lift rotate unit 160 160 180 40 3842525848 3
9
10
11
12
13
14
Technical data
Material number 3842525847 3842525853 3842525859 3842525865 15
3842525848 3842525854 3842525860 3842525866
3842525849 3842525855 3842525861 3842525867
3842525850 3842525856 3842525862 3842525868
16
3842525851 3842525857 3842525863 3842525869
3842525852 3842525858 3842525864 3842525870 17
Load
Max. total workpiece pallet mG kg 16 18
weight
Features 19
ESD Yes
WT lift above conveying 40; 90
level
21
22
23
24

Dimensions
lWT
lWT – 73
1
h
15
h1 = h + 400
120
lWT – 73
f
bWT – 73
d
c
e 90
27661

Circuit diagrams
1
D8 D8 D8 D8
6
7
2 4
2
3 1 5 8
4
5 13
9
1
10
00116562
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

PE 2/H positioning unit
PE 2/H positioning unit 240

±0,1mm 3500 N
F
▶▶ For positioning a workpiece pallet in a manual/

automatic processing station
▶▶ Positioning accuracy up to ±0.1 mm when assembled on
a separate machine frame
▶▶ Positioning via the PE 2 positioning pins and the
▶▶ Mounting holes on lift frame as an optional fastening
point for a separate machine frame
▶▶ Permissible vertical process forces: 3500 N, incl. WT 2
▶▶ Can be combined with all WT 2/H and WT 2/F-H
workpiece pallets
Accessories
▶▶ VE 2/D100-H stop gate, see p. 8-33 or
VE 2/D250-H stop gate, see p. 8-37
Delivery notes
▶▶ Pneumatic elements

1
b (mm) Track width in direction 480; 640; 800; 1040; 1200 2
of transport 480 … 12001
lT (mm) Length in direction of 480; 640; 800; 1040; 1200 3
transport 480 … 12001
w x ld Combination options 480 … 1200 x 480 … 1200
4
(mm x mm)
1
lT 5
7
b
10
00112934
Technical data 11
Load 12
Features 13
ESD Yes
Pneumatic connector d mm 8 15
WT lift above conveying level mm 16
Repeat accuracy1 mm ±0.1 16
1
When assembled on a separate machine frame 17
2
Incl. WT 2
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Dimensions
b – 46
ø16 b – 432 +18

0
13
-15
0
+16
15
10
182
158
b –157
00013090
0 Transport level
Ø16 H8
0 0
18
20
12
70
12
0 0
18
20
Ø16 H8
30066

Dimensions
1
lWT – 46
lWT – 174 2
15,5 (0,5 x lWT) – 106
(0,5 x bWT) – 114,5

28
5
b – 75
b – 261
0 6
7
28
8
145,5
60
9
15,5 145,5
lWT – 345
10
00013089 00013077
Circuit diagrams 11
12
13
14
15
16
17
5 4
1
18
3 2
19
20
00013098.eps
00013098
21
22
23
24

HD 2/H lift rotate unit

240

▶▶ Available in 3 sizes (BG) for WT total weights up to
240 kg
–– BG 1 and BG 2 for use with WT 2 and WT 2/F
workpiece pallets
–– BG 3 for use with WT 2/H and WT 2/F-H workpiece
pallets
▶▶ Rotation 90° or 180°
–– For rotating quadratic workpiece pallets 90° or 180°
–– For rotating non-quadratic workpiece pallets 180°
–– For BG 1 and BG 2 at a 90° rotation, the reverse
rotation occurs below the belt Reduced cycle times
by means of reverse rotation during workpiece
pallet change
For BG 3 at a 90° rotation, the reverse rotation occurs
below the belt
–– Center position only with BG 1 and BG 2 in
90° version
The HD 2/H lift rotate unit turns workpiece pallets to the

required orientation.
Accessories
▶▶ Housing element, see p. 7-67 ▶▶ VE 2 stop gate, see p. 8-6, or VE 2/D stop gate, see p.
▶▶ Leg sets for BG 2 over 50 kg, see p. 6-24 8-24, for damped stopping of a workpiece pallet
▶▶ Leg sets for BG 3 generally, see p. 6-24 ▶▶ Recommended accessories for BG3: VE 2/D-100 or
▶▶ Cylinder switch (0830100433) for the top/center/ VE 2/D-250 stop gate
bottom lift positions, see p. 7-61
▶▶ Sensor for rotary movement at 0°/180° or 0°/90°,
see p. 7-61
Delivery notes
▶▶ 2x damper for end rotary movement positions ▶▶ Fully assembled
▶▶ Incl. fastening material for assembly on conveyor
sections
▶▶ Pneumatic elements such as fittings, throttle non-return
valves, etc. for the top/center/bottom lift positions

1
Product designation Size BG Max. total Width Length Angle of Installation Material number
workpiece pallet bWT lT rotation location
weight mG DW3 AO4 2
(kg) (mm) (mm) (°)
3
HD 2/H lift rotate unit BG 11 50 240 240; 320; 400 90; 180 0; 1 3842998760
320 240; 320; 400; 480 90; 180 0; 1 3842998760
4
400 320 180 0; 1 3842998760
HD 2/H lift rotate unit BG 21 128 400 400; 480 90; 180 0; 1 3842998761
5
480 400; 480; 640; 800 90; 180 0; 1 3842998761
640 480; 640; 800; 90; 180 0; 1 3842998761
6
1040
800 640 180 0; 1 3842998761
HD 2/H lift rotate unit BG 32 240 800 800; 1040 90; 180 0; 1 3842998762 7
1040 800; 1040; 1200 90; 180 0; 1 3842998762
1200 1200 90; 180 0; 1 3842998762 8
1 For use with WT 2 and WT 2/F-H workpiece pallets only
2 For use with WT 2/H and WT 2/F-H workpiece pallets only
9
3 Only possible for DW = 90° quadratic workpiece pallets
4 Installation location: 0 = 80 mm and 1 = 100 mm
10
Cylinder switch for top/center/bottom position sensing 0830100433
ST6-PN-M12R-030 sensor 12

Sensor, short, for rotary movement end position sensing 3842549811
IEC/EN 60947-5-2:-2004 14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Technical data
Material number 3842998760 3842998761 3842998762
WT lift above conveying level 50 50 50
BG 1
BG 2
BG 3
30067

Operating limits of the HD 2/H lift rotate unit 1

Size 1
3 Mass moment of inertia
2
Rotary movement time [s]
Note:
2,5
In the arrangement of supports and workpieces on the WT
Permissible range 3
(= workpiece carrier) it must be ensured that the center of
2
gravity of the loaded WT is within ⅓ of the length/width of
Impermissible range 4
1,5 the WT around the center of the WT.
It must also be ensured that the loading center of gravity at
5
0 height hS does not exceed ½ bWT (with bWT ≤ lWT).
0 0,5 1 1,5 2
Total mass moment of inertia Jtotal [kgm²] 6
Size 1: HD 2/H lift rotate unit, 3842998760

Size 2 7
Mass max. 50 kg; mass moment of inertia max. 1.8 kg/m²
5
4,5
Size 2: HD 2/H lift rotate unit, 3842998761 8
4
Permissible range Mass max. 128 kg; mass moment of inertia max. 15.9 kg/m²
3,5 9
3 Size 3: HD 2/H lift rotate unit, 3842998762
Impermissible range
2,5 Mass max. 240 kg; mass moment of inertia max. 57.6 kg/m² 10
2
1,5 11
0
0,0 5,0 10,0 15,0 20,0 12
Total mass moment of inertia Jtotal [kgm²]
13
Size 3
9
14
8
7 15
Permissible range
6
16
5
Impermissible range
4
17
3
0 18
0 20 40 60 80
Total mass moment of inertia Jtotal [kgm²]

19
Additional operating limits

S3 20
S2 ▶▶ Switch bracket mounting at bWT x lWT 240 mm x 240 mm
A
S2 is only possible from outside => see S2
21
▶▶ Reversible operation possible from
bWT x lWT 320 mm x 320 mm => see A and B
22
23
B
S3
24
26819

Pneumatic diagram of the HD 2/H lift rotate unit:

Rotating cylinder for Size 1/2/3, rotation angle 90° and 180°
D6
D6 D6
35158 35162

Lifting cylinder for Size 1/2, rotation angle 90° (multiple position cylinder)
D6 D6 D6 D6 D6 D6 D6
2 2 2 2 2 2
1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
35159 35162

Lifting cylinder for Size 1/2, rotation angle 180°
D6 D6 D6 D6 D6
2 2 2 2
1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
35160 35162

Lifting cylinder for Size 3, rotation angle 90° and 180°
D 12 D 12 D 12 D 12 D 12
2 2 2 2
1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3
35161 35164

Dimensions for BG 1 (3842998760)/BG 2 (3842998761)

1
BG 1
BG 2
2
DW = 180° DW = 90°
L L4
3
4
80
H3 AO = 100
AO = 100
H2 AO = 80
AO = 80
185
112
7
H7
H6
H
7
H1
H4
8
60
L1 9
H5
10
11
L5 12
13
DW = 180° DW = 90°
57 L6 14
15
L3
L3
16
L2
17
L2
18
19
30268 20
BG Width bWT H H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 H7 L L1 L2 L3 L4 L5 L6 21
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
BG 1 240 336.4 120.4 76 56 672.2 351.2 181 161 597 507 255 47.5 597 507 57 22
BG 1 320 336.4 120.4 76 56 672.2 351.2 181 161 597 507 335 87.5 597 507 57
BG 1 400 336.4 120.4 76 56 672.2 351.2 181 161 597 507 415 127.5 597 507 57
23
BG 2 400 363.5 137.5 86 66 701.9 370.9 191 171 675 585 415 84.0 675 585 57
BG 2 480 363.5 137.5 86 66 701.9 370.9 191 171 675 585 495 124.0 675 585 57
24
BG 2 640 363.5 137.5 86 66 701.9 370.9 191 171 675 585 655 204.0 725 635 82
BG 2 800 363.5 137.5 86 66 701.9 370.9 191 171 675 585 815 284 725 635 82

Dimensions for BG 3 (3842998762)
BG 3
DW = 180° DW = 90°
847 L
AO = 100
AO = 100
AO = 80
AO = 80
80
185
120
27
117
97
202
222
450
660
193
60
298
757
L1
DW = 180° DW = 90°
57 L4
B
B
A
A
L3
L3
L2
L2
D
C
A = B = C = D ±0,5 mm*
30270
*Rotation angle setting
BG Width bWT L L1 L2 L3 L4
BG 3 800 847 757 815 192.5 57.0

BG 3 1040 1040 950 1055 312.5 153.5
BG 3 1200 1190 1100 1215 392.5 228.5

HD 2/H housing element
HD 2/H housing element 1
3
▶▶ For the safety of the unit and to protect against
interference from outside below the conveying level
4
▶▶ Protection above the conveying level must be configured
individually for each application
5
10
11
12
BG Width bWT Length lWT Rotation angle DW Material number
(mm) (mm) (°) 14
BG 1 240 240 90 3842552593
BG 1 240 240 180 3842552601 15
BG 1 240 320 180 3842552602
BG 1 240 400 180 3842552603 16
BG 1 320 240 180 3842552604
BG 1 320 320 90 3842552594 17
BG 1 320 320 180 3842552605
BG 1 320 400 180 3842552606 18
BG 1 320 480 180 3842552607
BG 1 400 320 180 3842552609 19
BG 2 400 400 90 3842552595
BG 2 400 400 180 3842552611 20
BG 2 400 480 180 3842552612
BG 2 480 400 180 3842552613 21
BG 2 480 480 90 3842552596
BG 2 480 480 180 3842552614
22
BG 2 480 640 180 3842552615
BG 2 480 800 180 3842552616
23
BG 2 640 480 180 3842552617
BG 2 640 640 90 3842552597
24
BG 2 640 640 180 3842552618

BG Width bWT Length lWT Rotation angle DW Material number

(mm) (mm) (°)
BG 2 640 800 180 3842552619

BG 2 640 1040 180 3842552620
BG 2 800 640 180 3842552622
BG 3 800 800 90 3842552598
BG 3 800 800 180 3842552624
BG 3 800 1040 180 3842552625
BG 3 1040 800 180 3842552626
BG 3 1040 1040 90 3842552599
BG 3 1040 1040 180 3842552627
BG 3 1040 1200 180 3842552628
BG 3 1200 1200 90 3842552600
BG 3 1200 1200 180 3842552630
BG 1
BG 2
BG 3
26818

Housing element dimensions for BG 1 and BG 2

1
BG 1
BG 2 DW = 90° DW = 90° 2
B
3
4
4
H 8
10
11
B1 L
L1 12
DW = 180° DW = 180°
13
B
14
4
15
16
H
17
18
B1 L 19
L1
30269 20
21
22
23
24

BG Width bWT Length lWT Rotation angle H L L1 B B1 Material

DW number
(mm) (mm) (°) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
BG 1 240 240 90 699.5 297 509 257.2 157 3842552593

BG 1 240 240 180 371.5 297 423 257.2 157 3842552601
BG 1 240 320 180 371.5 297 423 257.2 157 3842552602
BG 1 240 400 180 371.5 297 423 257.2 157 3842552603
BG 1 320 240 180 371.5 297 423 337.2 162 3842552604
BG 1 320 320 90 699.5 297 509 337.2 162 3842552594
BG 1 320 320 180 371.5 297 423 337.2 162 3842552605
BG 1 320 400 180 371.5 297 423 337.2 162 3842552606
BG 1 320 480 180 371.5 297 495 337.2 162 3842552607
BG 1 400 320 180 371.5 297 423 417.2 162 3842552609
BG 2 400 400 90 729.5 375 605 441.0 249 3842552595
BG 2 400 400 180 404.5 375 501 417.2 249 3842552611
BG 2 400 480 180 404.5 375 501 417.2 249 3842552612
BG 2 480 400 180 404.5 375 501 497.2 249 3842552613
BG 2 480 480 90 729.5 375 605 553.0 249 3842552596
BG 2 480 480 180 404.5 375 501 497.2 249 3842552614
BG 2 480 640 180 404.5 375 651 497.2 249 3842552615
BG 2 480 800 180 404.5 375 811 497.2 249 3842552616
BG 2 640 480 180 404.5 375 501 657.2 249 3842552617
BG 2 640 640 90 729.5 375 779 779.0 249 3842552597
BG 2 640 640 180 404.5 375 651 657.2 249 3842552618
BG 2 640 800 180 404.5 375 811 657.2 249 3842552619
BG 2 640 1040 180 404.5 375 1051 657.2 249 3842552620
BG 2 800 640 180 404.5 375 651 817.2 249 3842552622

Housing element dimensions for BG 3

1
BG 3
2
DW = 90° DW = 90° 3
B
4
4
5
H
7
B1 L 9
L1
10
11
12
DW = 180° DW = 180°
13
B
14
4
15
H
16
17
B1 L 18
L1
19
30271 20
21
22
23
24

BG Width bWT Length lWT Rotation angle H L L1 B B1 Material

DW number
(mm) (mm) (°) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm)
BG 3 800 800 90 675.5 547 932 933.0 432 3842552598

BG 3 800 800 180 465.5 547 742 818.0 432 3842552624
BG 3 800 1040 180 465.5 547 982 818.0 432 3842552625
BG 3 1040 800 180 465.5 547 742 1058.0 432 3842552626
BG 3 1040 1040 90 675.5 547 1271 1271.0 432 3842552599
BG 3 1040 1040 180 465.5 547 982 1058.0 432 3842552627
BG 3 1040 1200 180 465.5 547 1142 1058.0 432 3842552628
BG 3 1200 1200 90 675.5 547 1497 1497.0 432 3842552600
BG 3 1200 1200 180 465.5 547 1142 1218.0 432 3842552630

Transportation control | TS 2plus 7.08-1

Transportation control
1
Transportation control selection 8-2 6
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

8-2 TS 2plus 7.0 | Transportation control

Transportation control selection
The modular units for transportation control are used to When WT 2/H and WT 2/F-H are used, the VE 2/D...-H stop
control the flow of the workpiece pallets on the transfer gates are mounted by a cross strut for central separation.
system. This involves stopping and separating pallets,
inquiring the position of workpiece pallets, controlling all All VE 2/... (without VE 2/...-H) can be used for lateral
function processes, etc. separation.
All VE 2/D...-H can be used for central separation.
When WT 2/E, WT 2 and WT 2/F workpiece pallets are
used, the VE 2/... stop gates are mounted directly on the Depending on the application and available space,
section for lateral separation. stop gates may be mounted inside or outside the
workpiece pallet.
WT 2 workpiece pallet with lateral separation
Mounting in rear right position in the direction of transport, Mounting in front left position in the direction
on the inside of the workpiece pallet surface of transport, on the outside of the workpiece
pallet surface
WT 2 WT 2
VE 2/...
VE 2/...
00126811.eps 00126810.eps
WT 2/H workpiece pallet with central separation
Mounting inside the workpiece pallet surface Mounting outside the workpiece pallet surface
VE 2/D...-H
VE 2/D...-H
WT 2/H WT 2/H
00112520.eps 00112521.eps


VE 2 stop gates 8-4 1

140 200 450
2
VE 2/D dampened stop gates 8-24 4

60 100 150 200 250
5
VA 2 slide stops 8-46

7
50 130 250
8
DA 2 dampers 8-60
10
60 100 150 250
11
12
SH 2 switch brackets 8-90
13
14
15
Sensors 8-106
16
17
18
Frequency converters 8-116
19
20
21
29383
WI 2 rockers 8-131

30 100 22
23
24

VE 2 stop gate
The VE 2 stop gates are used to stop and separate Depending on the application and available space,
workpiece pallets, e.g., in an automated station. Actuation stop gates may be mounted inside or outside the
is performed pneumatically. In an unpressurized state, the workpiece pallet.
stop gate is held in the blocking position by a spring and Stop gates have mounting areas for sensors, which are
thus contributes significantly to production safety. used to monitor whether a workpiece pallet is standing at
a stop gate or has passed it.
Stop gates are available with and without integrated shock
absorbers. Dampened stop gates are used on conveyors where shock-
sensitive and fragile parts are conveyed at speeds of up to
18 m/min.
All versions are designed as pneumatic stop gate with
infinitely adjustable damping. This reduces the force of
impact by up to 80% compared to an uncushioned stop
gate. Dampened stop gates are not suitable for
accumulation stop.

Stop gate 8-6 1

VE 2, VE 2/L, VE 2/M 200
2
VE 2/S stop gate 8-15 4

140
5
VE 2/X stop gate 8-21

7
450
8
Stop gate 8-24

10
VE 2/D-60, VE 2/D-175, VE 2/D-200 60 175 200
11
12
Stop gate 8-33
VE 2/D100-H, VE 2/D250-H 13
100 250
14
15
Return stops 8-40
VE 2/RS, VE 2/RS-H 250 16
17
18
Slide stops 8-46
VA 2/50, VA 2/D-130, VA 2/D-250 50 130 250 19
20
21
22
23
24

VE 2 stop gate
VE 2 stop gate
200
▶▶ Pneumatic stop gate

▶▶ Tilting stop gate; can be opened without causing
abrasion on the surface of the workpiece pallet stop
surface
Stops one or more accumulating workpiece pallets at the the workpiece pallet is stopped. Mounted inside the tracks,
defined stop surface of the workpiece pallet. When the directly on the conveyor section.
pressure is released the stop gate is closed by a spring and
Accessories
▶▶ VE 2/RS return stop, see p. 8-40
▶▶ SH 2 switch bracket, see p. 8-88
▶▶ Position sensor, see p. 8-18
Delivery notes
section
VE 2 stop gate 0842900300

VE 2 stop gate
Technical data
1
Load 2
Features 3
Material specification Housing: PA6
Safety catch: Brass
Lug cam: PA66 4
Operating temperature1 °C 0 … +60

5
6
Pneumatic connector d mm 4
1
High-temperature stop gate on request
7
Permitted total weight of workpiece pallet Nominal speed

mG vN 8
(kg) (m/min)
9
200 6
140 9
100 12
10
70 15
50 18 11
Dimensions 12
13
57+1 14
55
SH 2/UV SH 2/UV WT2
5,5 20 15
7,4
16
40
38
24,5
17
78
18
38
SP 2 41 19
20
21
00116067
22
00116067
23
24

VE 2 stop gate
Circuit diagrams
Opening and shutting times Circuit diagram
1
[ms]
650
4 bar 6 bar
2
600
550
500
D4
450
400
350 546
468 2
300
250
362
308
200
1 3
150
100
50 91 74
61 48
0
l=1m l=3m l=1m l=3m
1
00117860 00116563_x
l = Hose length 1 Not included in delivery

1 Close
2 Open at 4 bar

VE 2/L stop gate
VE 2/L stop gate 1

200
2
3
▶▶ Low-noise; especially quiet operation during opening
4
and closing, therefore especially suitable for manual
workstations
5
6
surface
▶▶ Can be combined with WT 2/E, WT 2 and WT 2/F 7
10
11
12
Stops one or more accumulating workpiece pallets at the the workpiece pallet is stopped. Mounted inside the tracks, 13
pressure is released the stop gate is closed by a spring and 14
Accessories 15
▶▶ VE 2/RS return stop, see p. 8-40 16
▶▶ Position sensor, see p. 8-18 17
Delivery notes 18
▶▶ Incl. all fastening material to mount on ST 2 conveyor ▶▶ Fully assembled 19
section
20
21
VE 2/L stop gate 3842530630 22
23
24

VE 2/L stop gate
Technical data
Load
Features
Safety catch: Brass
Lug cam: PA66
A-rated emission sound pressure level LPA dB(A) <60

1

mG vN
(kg) (m/min)
200 6
140 9
100 12
70 15
50 18
Dimensions
57+1
55
SH 2/UV SH 2/UV WT2
5,5 20
7,4
40
38
24,5
78
38 41
SP 2
00116067
00116067

VE 2/L stop gate
Circuit diagrams
1
[ms]
800
2
4 bar 6 bar 1
750
2 3
700
650
4
600
550
D4
5
500 532
450 442
6
400
2
350
7
300 276
250
250
1 3 8
200
150
9
230 228
100
144 162
50
1 10
0
00117858
l=1m l=3m l=1m l=3m
00116563_x
11
1 Close
12
2 Open at 4 bar
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

VE 2/M stop gate
VE 2/M stop gate

200

▶▶ Media resistant
surface
▶▶ Low-noise; especially quiet operation during opening
and closing
Stops one or more accumulating workpiece pallets at the the workpiece pallet is stopped. Mounted inside the tracks,
pressure is released the stop gate is closed by a spring and
Accessories
▶▶ Position sensor, see p. 8-18
Delivery notes
section
VE 2/M stop gate 3842531610

VE 2/M stop gate
Technical data
1
Load 2
Features 3
Safety catch: Brass
Lug cam: PA66 4
A-rated emission sound pressure level LPA dB(A) <60

5

6
7
1
8

mG vN 9
(kg) (m/min)
200 6
10
140 9
100 12 11
70 15
50 18 12
Dimensions 13
14
57+1 15
55
SH 2/UV SH 2/UV WT2 16
5,5 20
7,4
17
40
38
18
24,5
78
19
20
38 41
SP 2
21
22
00116067
23
00116067
24

VE 2/M stop gate
Circuit diagrams
[ms]
800
4 bar 6 bar 1
750
2
700
650
600
550 D4
500 532
450 442
400
2
350
300 276
250
250 1 3
200
150
230 228
100
144 162
50
1
0
00117858
l=1m l=3m l=1m l=3m 00116563_x

1 Close
2 Open at 4 bar

VE 2/S stop gate
VE 2/S stop gate 1

140
2
3
▶▶ Used on sections with possible reversible operation
4
▶▶ Pressure must not be exerted on VE 2/S by pallets
traveling in reverse
5
6
Note: Safe transition from both directions is possible by
actively (pneumatically) opening the safety catch.
7
10
11
12
Stops one or more accumulating workpiece pallets at the stop gates are needed to stop pallets coming from both 13
defined stop surface of the workpiece pallet. The VE 2/S directions, since pressure must not be exerted on the stop
can only stop workpiece pallets coming from one direction. gate by pallets traveling in reverse. Mounted inside the 14
When the pressure is released the stop gate is closed by a tracks, directly on the conveyor section.
spring and the workpiece pallet is stopped. Two VE 2/S 15
Accessories 16
▶▶ Position sensor, see p. 8-18 18
Delivery notes
19
20
section
21
22
VE 2/S stop gate 3842515844
23
24

VE 2/S stop gate
Technical data
Load
Features
Lug cam: PA66

1

mG vN
(kg) (m/min)
140 6
90 9
70 12
50 15
30 18
Dimensions
57+1
55
SH 2/UV SH 2/UV WT2
35 5,5 20
9
40
39
39
24,5
78
38 40
SP 2
00116070
00116070

VE 2/S stop gate
Circuit diagrams
1
2
1
2 3
[ms]
450
4
4 bar 6 bar
400
D4
350
5
300
6
250 368
320 2
200
7
150 200 230
100
1 3 8
50
71 61
47 37
0
l=1m l=3m l=1m l=3m 9
1 10
00117859 00116563_x
11
1 Close
12
2 Open at 4 bar
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Stop gate position sensor
▶▶ For retrofitting on the VE 2, VE 2/M, VE 2/L, or VE 2/S

stop gates
▶▶ Upper and lower position sensing possible, only suitable
for upper position sensing with VE 2/S
▶▶ Compressed air connection for double-action stop gate
operation
The stop gate position sensor is used to detect the position closing of the stop gate.
of the stop gate using sensors and/or for active pneumatic
Accessories
▶▶ VE 2, VE 2/M, VE 2/L, or VE 2/S, stop gates
▶▶ 2x M8x1 sensor with rated sensing range SN ≥ 2 mm, can
be installed flush
Delivery notes
Scope of delivery
Stop gate position sensor 3842528817

Technical data
1
Features 2
Material specification PA; black
Housing: PA6
3
4
10
11
12
13
00126900
14
Dimensions 15
SH 2/UV SH 2/UV
16
17
18
19
113
20
18,5
35
21
40,8
22
23
24
00125245

Circuit diagrams
D4 D4
2 4
1 3
00126828

VE 2/X stop gate
VE 2/X stop gate 1

450
2
3
▶▶ For high permitted total weight of the workpiece pallet
4
up to 450 kg
5
10
11
12
Stops one or more accumulating workpiece pallets at the the workpiece pallet is stopped. Mounted inside the tracks, 13
pressure is released the stop gate is closed by a spring and 14
Accessories 15
17
Delivery notes
section 19
20
VE 2/X stop gate 3842547770 21
22
23
24

VE 2/X stop gate
Technical data
Load
Features
Material specification Housing: aluminum, hard anodized
Lug cam: Steel, hardened
Operating temperature1 °C 0 ... +60

1

mG vN
(kg) (m/min)
450 6
300 9
220 12
140 15
100 18
Dimensions
21 5,5
22
9
38
21,5
28
30
38
39
ø 8,4
48
98
4xM4T6 4 x ø4,8 H12
6x1
6
6 10,5 10,5
6x1 25,5 25,5
48,5
90
10
20
50
00116776

VE 2/X stop gate
Circuit diagrams
1
2
1
2 3
4
[ms]
300
4 bar 5
250
200
D6
6
202
150
125
7
100
50 2
67,5
42,5
0
l=1m l=3m 8
1 3
9
1 10
00117861 00139052
11
1 Close
12
2 Open at 4 bar
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

VE 2/D-60 stop gate
VE 2/D-60 stop gate

60

▶▶ Optimal damping for workpiece pallet total weights up
to 60 kg
▶▶ Continuously adjustable damping
Dampened stopping of the first accumulating workpiece gate is closed by a spring and the workpiece pallet is
pallet. The stop gate stops one or more accumulating stopped. Mounted inside the tracks, directly on the
workpiece pallets at the defined stop surface of the conveyor section.
workpiece pallet. When the pressure is released the stop
Accessories
Delivery notes
section
VE 2/D-60 stop gate 3842547785

VE 2/D-60 stop gate
Technical data
1
Load 2
Min. workpiece pallet weight m kg 1
3
Features
Material specification Housing: Aluminum, hard anodized
4

5
6
1
7

mG vN 8
(kg) (m/min)
9
60 6
40 9
35 12
10
30 15
30 18 11
24 24
12
Dimensions
13
21,30 75,90
14
8 40
20
15
16
38,80
17
84
18
76
77
19
20
60 21
34282
22
* Stroke
23
34282 24

VE 2/D-60 stop gate
Circuit diagrams
[ms]
800
4 bar 6 bar 1
750
2
700
650
600 D4
550
500
450 1
400 2
350
470 550
300
250
310 360
200
2
150
100
1 3
50 90
60 80
50 1
0
00130155
l=1m l=3m l=1m l=3m
34270

1 Close
2 Open at 4 bar

VE 2/D-175 stop gate
VE 2/D-175 stop gate 1

175
2
3
▶▶ Especially sturdy all-metal design with double piston
4
damper
5
▶▶ Short damping path of 20 mm
▶▶ Short damping time
6
▶▶ Short installation dimension
7
10
11
12
Dampened stopping of the first accumulating workpiece gate is closed by a spring and the workpiece pallet is 13
pallet. The stop gate stops one or more accumulating stopped. Mounted inside the tracks, directly on the
workpiece pallets at the defined stop surface of the conveyor section. 14
workpiece pallet. When the pressure is released the stop
15
Accessories
17
Delivery notes
section 19
20
VE 2/D-175 stop gate 3842558795 21
22
23
24

Technical data
Load
Features
Material specification Housing: Aluminum; hard anodized

1

mG vN
(kg) (m/min)
175 6
160 9
145 12
110 15
90 18
50 24
35 30
Dimensions
19 30
11 20
8,5
10 Ø4,8 (4x)
31,5
38,5
38,5
80
Ø6 25 25
80 95
x xxx xxx xxx
52
xxxxx
00125250
00125250

Circuit diagram
1
4
D6
1 6
2
2
8
1 3 9
1
10
34271
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24


200

▶▶ Optimal damping for workpiece pallet total weights
between 50 kg and 200 kg
Dampened stopping of the first accumulating workpiece and the workpiece pallet is stopped. Mounted inside the
pallet. Stops one or more accumulating workpiece pallets tracks, directly on the conveyor section.
at the defined stop surface of the workpiece pallet. When
the pressure is released the stop gate is closed by a spring
Accessories
Delivery notes
section
VE 2/D-200 stop gate 3842524895

Technical data
1
Load 2
Min. workpiece pallet weight m kg 5 3
Features
4

5
6
1
7

mG vN 8
(kg) (m/min)
9
200 6
140 9
100 12
10
100 15
100 18 11
55 24
35 30 12
Dimensions 13
32 35* 117
14
15
15
47,5
9*
38,5
39
Ø8,4
16
Ø 4,8 H12
98
17
18
6x1 10,5 10,5
G 1/8" 25,5 25,5
19
56 128
20
21
22
00116072
23
* Stroke 00116072
24

Circuit diagrams
1
[ms]
650
6 bar 2
600
550 D6
500
450
400 1
491
2
350
300
348
250
200
150
2
100
145
50 114
0 1 3
l=1m l=3m
1
00117862 34272

1 Close
2 Open at 4 bar

VE 2/D100-H stop gate
VE 2/D100-H stop gate 100 1
3
▶▶ For central separation of the WT 2/H and WT 2/F-H
4
workpiece pallets
▶▶ Suitable for accumulation loads up to 1000 kg
5
▶▶ Optimal damping for workpiece pallet total weights up
6
to 100 kg
▶▶ Can be combined with WT 2/H and WT 2/F-H
7
10
11
12
Dampened stopping of the first accumulating workpiece the supplied cross connectors. When the pressure is 13
pallet. The stop gate stops one or more accumulating released the stop gate is closed by a spring and the
workpiece pallets at the defined stop surface of the workpiece pallet is stopped. 14
workpiece pallet. For central separation, the stop gate is
mounted inside the tracks on the conveyor section using 15
Accessories 16
▶▶ VE 2/RS-H return stop, see p. 8-42 17
Delivery notes 18
▶▶ Incl. all fastening material to mount on ST 2 conveyor ▶▶ Not assembled 19
sections
20
b (mm) Track width 400; 480; 640; 800; 1040; 1200
b (mm) Track width 400 … 12001) 22
1
Individual width variants possible
23
24

Technical data
Load
Features
Material specification Housing: Steel
Lug cam: Steel
Cross strut: Aluminum

1

Dimensions
1
2
b+2
3
8
0
4
3,5
77,5
6
90
22,5
132 7
ST 2/..
b/2 – 67,5
9
10
A
11
180
12
90
138
118
13
A 14
15
b – 75
16
A–A
17
18
28907
19
28907
20
0 Transport level
21
22
23
24

Characteristic curve diagram

Damping setting, accumulation roller chain µ = 0.02 Damping setting, flat top chain µ = 0.2
m
G m
G
[kg]
[kg]
100
100
1
80 Fmax dyn. 80
1
60
60
2
Fmin dyn.
40
40 2
20
3 20
0
0 3
Dmin Dmax
Dmin Dmax
00013038 000139039
1 Damping effect limited, use of a VE 2/RS-H return stop recommended 1 Damping effect limited, use of a VE 2/RS-H return stop recommended
2 Recommended range 2 Recommended range
3 Not possible 3 Not possible
Dmax/min damping setting Dmax/min damping setting
Max. permitted section load Circuit diagram
m
G
[kg] D6
1200 µ=0,02
1000 µ=0,2
800 1
2
600
400
200
2
0
6 9 12 15 18
vN [m/min]
1 3
1
00112509
34272

VE 2/D250-H stop gate 250

1
3
▶▶ For central separation of the WT 2/H and WT 2/F-H
4
workpiece pallets
▶▶ Suitable for accumulation loads up to 2250 kg
5
▶▶ Optimal damping for total weights up to 250 kg
6
10
11
12
Dampened stopping of the first accumulating workpiece the supplied cross connectors. When the pressure is 13
pallet. The stop gate stops one or more accumulating released the stop gate is closed by a spring and the
workpiece pallets at the defined stop surface of the workpiece pallet is stopped. 14
workpiece pallet. For central separation, the stop gate is
mounted inside the tracks on the conveyor section using 15
Accessories 16
▶▶ VE 2/RS-H return stop, see p. 8-42 17
Delivery notes 18
▶▶ Incl. all fastening material to mount on ST 2 conveyor ▶▶ Not assembled 19
sections
20
b (mm) Track width 400; 480; 640; 800; 1040; 1200
b (mm) Track width 400 … 12001) 22
1
Individual width variants possible
23
24

Technical data
Load
Features
Material specification Housing: Steel; coated
Lug cam: Steel; coated
Cross strut: Aluminum, natural;
anodized

1
Dimensions
b+2
8
0
3,5
77,5
22,5
127
ST 2/..
b/2 – 67,5
A
180
90
150,5
126,5
b – 75
28908
A–A
28908
0 Transport level


1
m m 3
G G
[kg] [kg]
4
250 250
200 5
200 1 1
Fmax dyn.
150
150 6
100 2 100
Fmin dyn. 7
2
50 50
3
0
3 8
0
Dmin Dmax Dmin Dmax
10
00013036 00013037
11
12
13
Max. permitted section load Circuit diagram 14
15
m
G 16
[kg] D6
2500 µ=0,02 17
µ=0,2
2000
18
1
2
1500
19
1000
20
500
2 21
0
6 9 12 15 18
vN [m/min] 22
1 3
1
23
00112512 34272
24

VE 2/RS return stop
VE 2/RS return stop

250
▶▶ Spring-loaded safety catch

▶▶ Can be used on the left or right
▶▶ Use for one direction of transport, reversible operation
not permitted
and WT 2/F-H
Note: The VE 2/RS return stop can only be installed outside

the workpiece pallet surface on the WT2/H and WT 2/F-H.
The return stop prevents the rebound impact of the the stop gate is moved into the lock position by a spring
workpiece pallet from the stop gate. The use of the VE 2/RS and the workpiece pallet overtravels the VE 2/RS in the
return stop is especially recommended when the direction of transport and is stopped against the transport
accumulation roller chain is used as conveyor medium in direction. Mounted inside the tracks, directly on the
connection with undamped stop gates. In normal condition conveyor section.
Delivery notes
section
VE 2/RS return stop 3842531696

VE 2/RS return stop
Technical data
1
Load 2
Features
4
Lug cam: PA66

5
1
Dimensions 6
8
WT2
55 20
9
8
10
40
38
24,5
11
76
12
38 41
SP 2
13
14
15
00126929
16
00126929
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

VE 2/RS-H return stop

250
▶▶ Spring-loaded safety catch

▶▶ Can be used on the left or right
▶▶ Easy fastening in the groove of the ST 2 or BS 2 section
profile
▶▶ Pneumatic version, including pneumatic cylinder to open
the safety catch. Necessary for reversible operation
WT 2/F-H
Note: The VE 2/RS-H return stop can only be installed on

the WT 2 and WT 2/F without spacers.
The return stop prevents the workpiece pallet from In normal condition the stop gate is moved into the lock
rebounding off the VE 2/D stop gate or the DA 2 damper. position by a spring and the workpiece pallet overtravels
The use of the VE 2/RS is especially recommended for high the VE 2/RS in the direction of transport and is stopped
total weights and low damping. against the transport direction. Mounted inside the tracks,
directly on the conveyor section.
Note: Reversible operation is only possible with the

pneumatic version.
Delivery notes
VE 2/RS-H return stop 3842549698
VE 2/RS-H return stop, pneumatic 3842549696

Technical data
1
Material number 3842549696 3842549698
Load 2
Max. total workpiece pallet weight mG kg 250 250
Min. workpiece pallet weight m kg 3 3 3
Features
Material specification Housing: Aluminum, hard anodized Housing: Aluminum, hard anodized
4
Lug cam: Steel, hardened Lug cam: Steel, hardened
Operating temperature1 °C 0 ... +60 0 ... +60

5
1
3842549698 10
11
12
13
14
3842549696
31566 15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

21
0 20
(38)
24 6
58
59
40
20
21
42 8 24
77
2,5
19
50
00013092
00013092

VE 2/RS-H return stop, pneumatic

1
2
21
3
0 20
2
4
38
24 6
58
5
77,5
40
6
20
42 24
8
77 8
10
11
10
19
50
12
13
14
14
31565 15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

VA 2/50 slide stop
VA 2/50 slide stop

50
▶▶ Slide stop, can be lowered pneumatically

▶▶ Removable slide stop position sensor
▶▶ Not suitable for ST 2...-H sections
The slide stop is used in a transverse section that connects slide stop is activated.
more than two longitudinal sections and that requires When depressurized, the pneumatically lowered slide stop
supplementary stops. A lift transverse unit can feed in the is extended to the upper end position. Mounted inside the
workpiece pallet onto the longitudinal section when the tracks, directly on the conveyor section.
Accessories
▶▶ 2x M8x1 sensor, see p. 8-112
Delivery notes
Scope of delivery
section
▶▶ Position sensor
VA 2/50 slide stop 3842528808

VA 2/50 slide stop
Technical data
1
Load 2
Features 3
Safety catch: PA66
Lug cam: PA66 4
Max. operating temperature °C 60

5
6
7
mG vN
(kg) (m/min) 8
50 6
9
50 9
35 12
10
25 15
20 18
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
00126910
21
22
23
24

VA 2/50 slide stop
Dimensions
40,8
68,5
55,5
41
34,5 29,5
2
2
3,1
21
40
83,6
76
138
111
4,7
4,6 55
00117864
Circuit diagrams
D4
1 3
00116563

VA 2/50 slide stop – reversible
VA 2/50 slide stop – reversible 1

50
2
3
▶▶ Slide stop, can be extended pneumatically
▶▶ Integrated switch bracket
4
▶▶ Not suitable for ST 2...-H sections
5
▶▶ Inquiry of the slide stop upper position via sensors
6
10
11
12
The slide stop is used in a transverse section that connects When depressurized, the pneumatically extended slide stop 13
more than two longitudinal sections and that requires is lowered to the lower end position. The slide stop upper
supplementary stops. A lift transverse unit can feed in the position can be detected using sensors. Mounted inside the 14
workpiece pallet onto the longitudinal section when the tracks, directly on the conveyor section.
slide stop is activated. 15
Accessories 16
▶▶ M12x1 sensor, see p. 8-108 17
Delivery notes 18
Scope of delivery
▶▶ Incl. all fastening material to mount on ST 2 conveyor 19
section
▶▶ Pivoting elbow fitting
20
21
VA 2/50 slide stop – reversible 3842191721 22
23
24

Technical data
Load
Features
Material specification Housing: Aluminum
Stop: Aluminum
Max. operating temperature1 °C 60

1

mG vN
(kg) (m/min)
50 6
50 9
35 12
25 15
20 18
00126912

Dimensions
1
160 55
2
17 2)
01) 3
41
4
48
5
75
6
47
52,5 7
35
8
20
40 9
80
00126913 10
00126913
1 Conveying level 11
2 Limit stop activated
12
Circuit diagrams
13
14
15
16
D6
17
2
18
1 3
19
20
1 21
34273
22

23
24

VA 2/D-130 slide stop

130
▶▶ Slide stop; can be lowered pneumatically, dampened

stop
▶▶ Stopping on the outside of the frame module
▶▶ Can be used in reversible operation
▶▶ Design permits installation to a = 90 mm where space
is limited
profile width of 45 mm or an ST 2/…-H section with a
profile width of 50 mm
▶▶ 4 positions, can be moved to pneumatically:
–– Upper, lower position and latch in the extended and
retracted state
▶▶ 3 positions can be detected:
–– Top, bottom and extended stop rail
–– Can be combined with WT 2, WT 2/F, WT 2/H and
WT 2/F-H
more than two longitudinal sections and that requires The pneumatically adjustable slide stop is extended to the
supplementary stops. A lift transverse unit can feed in the upper end position when the system is depressurized.
workpiece pallet onto the longitudinal section when the Mounted inside the tracks, directly on the conveyor section.
Accessories
▶▶ M12x1 sensor (3842549814) with SN ≥ 4 mm rated
sensing range, length 45 mm, see p. 8-108
▶▶ Clamping holder, see p. 8-55
Delivery notes
section
▶▶ Right-angle connector for the Quickfix air connections
VA 2/D-130 slide stop 3842559001

Technical data
1
Load 2
Features
4
Latch: Steel
Max. operating temperature °C 60

5
6
Minimum width for mounting between sections bL mm 320
7
8
mG vN
(kg) (m/min) 9
130 6
110 9
10
110 12
100 15 11
100 18
12
Possible installation location for VA2/D-130
13
14
15
16
30055 30056 17
As a node point During outfeeding on parallel

18
section
19
20
21
22
23
24

Dimensions
160
146
125
90
8,7
63,5
103,5
180,5
84,4
5
34284
Circuit diagram
4 2
D6 D6
5 13
D6
D6
1 3
30139
1

Clamping holder
Clamping holder 1
3
▶▶ Clamping holder for sensor for screwing into VA 2/D-130
slide stop, d = 12 mm
4
▶▶ Adapter for variable positioning of the sensor

9
Clamping holder 1 3842545974
Technical data 10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
34283 19
20
Dimensions
19,5 14,5 21
2,1
22
M16x1
23
ø12
24
4
31592 SW22 SW22


250
▶▶ Slide stop, pneumatically lowered, dampened stop for

use with HQ 2/C-H only (minimum longitudinal width
from bQ = 480 mm, minimum transverse width from
bL = 640 mm)
▶▶ Stopping on the inside of the WT frame module
▶▶ When the pressure is released by a spring into the
lock position
more than two longitudinal sections and that requires The pneumatically adjustable slide stop is extended to the
supplementary stops. A lift transverse unit can feed in the upper end position when the system is depressurized.
workpiece pallet onto the longitudinal section when the Mounting inside the HQ 2/C-H lift transverse unit.
Delivery notes
▶▶ Incl. all fastening material to mount on ST 2 conveyor ▶▶ Not assembled
section
▶▶ Right-angle connector for the Quickfix design air
connection
bL (mm) Track width in the longitudinal conveyor 640; 800; 1040; 1200
bL (mm) Track width in the longitudinal conveyor 640 ... 1200
bQ (mm) Track width in the transverse conveyor 480; 640; 800; 1040; 1200;
480 ... 1200

Technical data
1
Load 2
Features 3
Stop: Steel, hardened
4
Operating temperature1 °C -20 ... +80
Dimensions
5
Minimum length of workpiece pallet lwt 400
6
1
7
Possible installation location for VA 2/D-250 8
10
11
12
30058
13
During outfeeding on parallel 14

section
15
When attaching inside an HQ 2/C-H, the VA 2/D-250 must
be positioned on the opposite side of the hexagonal shaft 16
in each case.
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Dimensions
A–A A
22,5
34
50
115,5
74
A
L
136
30132
30132
Track width in the longitudinal conveyor Dimension L

bL (mm)
(mm)
640 519
800 679
1040 919
1200 1079


1
m m 3
G G
[kg] [kg]
4
250 250
200 5
200 1 1
Fmax dyn.
150
150 6
100 2 100
Fmin dyn. 7
2
50 50
3
0
3 8
0
Dmin Dmax Dmin Dmax
10
00013036 00013037
11
Circuit diagram
12
13
14
D6
15
1
2 16
17
18
2
19
1 3
20
1
34272 21
22
23
24

Damper
DA 2 dampers are used to cushion the impact of workpiece

pallets when they are moved from a transverse conveyor
section into a longitudinal conveyor section or vice versa.

DA 2/60 damper 8-62 1

60
2
DA 2/100, DA 2/100-C, 8-67

4
DA 2/100-E damper 100
5
DA 2/150-E damper 8-79

7
150
DA 2/100-H, DA 2/250-H damper 8-82

10
250
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

DA 2/60 damper
DA 2/60 damper
60
▶▶ For permitted total weight of workpiece pallets up to 60

kg
▶▶ Pneumatic damper
▶▶ Continuously adjustable
▶▶ Optimal damping at a ratio of 2:1 between heavy and
light workpiece pallets
and WT 2/F-H
▶▶ Installation location: ST 2 section, BS 2 belt section and
HQ 2 lift transverse unit
▶▶ Not suitable for HQ 2/U2 and HQ 2/...-H
The damper cushions the impact of workpiece pallets when occurs as the stop gate opens, which permits the
they are moved from a transverse conveyor section into a workpiece pallet to move toward the damper.
longitudinal section and vice versa. The pneumatic return
Delivery notes Condition on delivery

Scope of delivery ▶▶ Not assembled
▶▶ Includes fastening material for mounting on an ST 2 or a
BS 2, and EQ 2 or HQ 2/U, HQ 2/T, HQ 2/S or HQ 2/O
▶▶ DA 2/60 damper with two different stops for optional
use infeeding or outfeeding use
DA 2/60 damper 3842557983

DA 2/60 damper
Technical data
1
Load 2
Features
Material Housing: Aluminum, hard anodized
4

5
1
6
High-temperature damper on request
7
mG vN
(kg) (m/min) 8
60 6
9
40 9
35 12
30 18
10
24 24
18 30 11
10 36
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

DA 2/60 damper
Dimensions
DA 2 ‒ SP 2
WT 2 21,3*) 40
10**)
36,5
DA 2/..
38
40
30,5
43,5
SP 2 70 81
20
70
00116075
* = Stroke of damper
** = Stroke of WT 2

DA 2/60 damper
1
DA 2 ‒ HQ 2
5
21,3*)
81
16 6
9,5
21**)
14,5
7
DA 2/..
38
43,5
8
22
9
5
HQ 2/.. 10
11
95,5
12
13
40
14
20,5
15
16
17
00116076
18
19
00116076 20
21
* = Stroke of damper
** = Stroke of HQ 2
*** = Center HQ 2 22
23
24

DA 2/60 damper
Circuit diagrams
D4
1 3
23767

DA 2/100-B damper
DA 2/100-B damper 100

1
3
▶▶ For permitted total weight of workpiece pallets up to
100 kg
4
5
▶▶ Before outfeeding via an HQ 2/U2 lift transverse unit
6
▶▶ Can be combined with WT 2, WT 2/F, WT 2/H and WT
2/F-H 7
▶▶ Installation location: HQ 2/U2 lift transverse unit
8
10
11
12
The damper cushions the impact of the arriving workpiece permits the workpiece pallet to move toward the damper. 13
pallet. The DA 2/100 is suitable for outfeeding via an Mounted at the end or in the transverse conveyor directly
HQ 2/U2 lift transverse unit. on the conveyor section, since the damper is not 14
The pneumatic return occurs as the stop gate opens, which traversable.
15
Delivery notes
▶▶ DA 2/100-B damper for outfeeding the WT 2, WT 2/F, 17
WT 2/H or WT 2/F-H workpiece pallets, via an HQ 2/U2,
required at vN > 12 m/min or total weight of the 18
workpiece pallet > 1 kg/cm
19
DA 2/100-B damper 3842525733
21
22
23
24

DA 2/100-B damper
Technical data
Load
Features

1

mG vN
(kg) (m/min)
100 6
100 9
100 12
95 15
55 18
Attachment plate
35170

DA 2/100-B damper
Dimensions
1
4
85
70 8,5
4
5
9
22
22
6
30
46
52
43
87,5
6
8
54 6 30
62 9 45 9
34 54
45,5
10
63
75,5
11
115,5
138
147 12
13
14
15
16
17
18
28923
19
28923
20
21
22
23
24

DA 2/100-B damper
Circuit diagrams
D6
1 3
00116565

DA 2/100-C damper
DA 2/100-C damper 1
100
2
3
100 kg
4
5
▶▶ During infeeding in a longitudinal section
6
▶▶ Can be combined with WT 2, WT 2/F, WT 2/H and WT
2/F-H 7
▶▶ Installation location: ST 2 section or BS 2 belt section
8
10
11
12
The damper cushions the impact of the arriving workpiece The pneumatic return occurs as the stop gate opens, which 13
pallet. The DA 2/100-C is suitable for infeeding from a permits the workpiece pallet to move toward the damper.
transverse section into a longitudinal section. It is mounted The damper is not traversable. 14
directly on the section profile of the longitudinal section.
15
Delivery notes
▶▶ DA2/100-C damper for infeeding the WT 2 and WT 2/F 17
workpiece pallets
18
DA 2/100-C damper 3842525734
20
21
22
23
24

DA 2/100-C damper
Technical data
Load
Features

1

mG vN
(kg) (m/min)
100 6
100 9
100 12
95 15
55 18

DA 2/100-C damper
Dimensions
1
3
102
34,5
82 (77)*
4
65 70
56 30 5
10
7
46
44
22
8
121 (126)*
133
36
9
77
10
11
38
45 12
60 6
13
14
15
16
17
18
28922
19
28922
20
* Dimension in brackets apply to mounting on ST 2/...-H section profile

21
22
23
24

DA 2/100-C damper
Circuit diagrams
D6
1 3
00116565

DA 2/100-E damper
DA 2/100-E damper 1
100
2
3
100 kg
4
5
6
WT 2/F-H
▶▶ Installation location: HQ 2/C-H or HQ 2 lift 7
transverse unit
8
10
11
12
The damper cushions the impact of the arriving workpiece stop gate, which permits the workpiece pallet to move 13
pallet. The DA 2/100-E is suitable for outfeeding via an HQ towards the damper. The damper is traversable.
2/U-H. The pneumatic return is parallel to opening of the 14
Delivery notes 15
▶▶ Incl. fastening material ▶▶ Not assembled 16
▶▶ DA 2/100-E damper for outfeeding the WT 2, WT 2/F,
WT 2/H or WT 2/F-H workpiece pallets via an HQ 2/U-H 17
18
DA 2/100-E damper 3842548585
20
21
22
23
24

DA 2/100-E damper
Technical data
Load
Features

1

mG vN
(kg) (m/min)
100 6
100 9
100 12
95 15
55 18

DA 2/100-E damper
Dimensions
1
3
A–A
(155,5)
4
34,5
62
5
44
66
7
63
9
(68)
10
11
(2)
12
(138)
13
60
54
A A
14
(2)
15
16
28925
17
18
19
28925
20
21
22
23
24

DA 2/100-E damper
Circuit diagrams
D6
1 3
00116565

DA 2/150-E damper
DA 2/150-E damper 1
150
3
▶▶ Hydraulic damper with closed damping system
▶▶ Before outfeeding via an HQ 2/U-H lift transverse unit
4
▶▶ For permitted total weight of workpiece pallets up
to 130 kg with belts, toothed belts or flat top chains
5
▶▶ For permitted total weight of workpiece pallets up
to 150 kg with accumulation roller chains
6
WT 2/F-H
▶▶ Installation location: HQ 2/C-H or HQ 2 lift 7
transverse unit
8
10
11
12
The damper cushions the impact of the arriving workpiece workpiece pallet to move towards the damper. The damper 13
pallet. The DA 2/150-E damper is suitable for outfeeding a is traversable.
workpiece pallet via an HQ 2/U-H. The pneumatic return is 14
parallel to opening of the stop gate, which permits the
15
Delivery notes
▶▶ DA 2/150-E damper for outfeeding the WT 2, WT 2/F, 17
WT 2/H or WT 2/F-H workpiece pallets via an HQ 2/U-H
18
19
DA 2/150-E damper 3842548644 20
21
22
23
24

DA 2/150-E damper
Technical data
Load
Max. total workpiece pallet weight mG kg Belt, toothed belt, flat top chain
130
Accumulation roller chain 150
Min. workpiece pallet weight m kg Belt, toothed belt, flat top chain 15
Accumulation roller chain 40
Features

1
22885.eps
22885
Belt, toothed belt, or flat top chain Accumulation roller chain

Permitted total weight of Nominal speed Permitted total weight of Nominal speed
workpiece pallet workpiece pallet
mG vN mG vN
(kg) (m/min) (kg) (m/min)
130 6 150 6
130 9 150 9
130 12 150 12
130 15 150 15
130 18 150 18

DA 2/150-E damper
Dimensions
1
34,5 156,5
2
7,5
4
7
45
40
61
5
8
(183,5)
61 9
10
11
138
84
63
50
12
13
14
19,5 ±0,5 1)
22886 15
1 Stroke
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

DA 2/100-H damper
DA 2/100-H damper
100

100 kg
▶▶ Installation location: HQ 2/C-H lift transverse unit
The damper cushions the impact of workpiece pallets when workpiece pallet to move toward the damper. For
they are moved from a transverse conveyor section into a installation in a HQ 2/C-H lift transverse unit. The damper is
longitudinal section and vice versa. The pneumatic return traversable.
occurs as the stop gate opens, which permits the
Delivery notes
▶▶ DA 2/100-H damper for infeeding or outfeeding the WT
2/H or WT 2/F-H workpiece pallets via an HQ 2/C-H
bL (mm) Track width in the longitudinal conveyor 480, 640, 800, 1040, 1200

DA 2/100-H damper
Technical data
1
Load 2
Features
Material specification Housing: Aluminum; hard anodized
Stop: Steel; hardened Section 4
profile: Aluminum, natural;
anodized 5

6
1
7
Dimensions
70,5
8
9
67
60
10
30
11
42 56
56
A 12
13
63
14
70,5
15
16
17
56 56
A
18
19
63
135,5
20
30
60
21
80
B
28921
28921
22
23
24

DA 2/100-H damper
Track width in the longitudinal conveyor Dimension A

bL
(mm) (mm)
480 359
640 519
800 679
1040 919
1200 1079
Track width in the longitudinal conveyor Dimension B

bL
(mm) (mm)
480 149.5
640 229.5
800 309.5
1040 429.5
1200 509.5

m
G m
G
[kg]
[kg]
100
100
1
80 Fmax dyn. 80
1
60
60
2
Fmin dyn.
40
40 2
20
3 20
0
0 3
Dmin Dmax
Dmin Dmax
00013038 000139039

DA 2/250-H damper
DA 2/250-H damper 1
250
2
3
250 kg
4
5
▶▶ Installation location: HQ 2/C-H lift transverse unit
6
10
11
12
The damper cushions the impact of workpiece pallets when workpiece pallet to move toward the damper. For 13
they are moved from a transverse conveyor section into a installation in a HQ 2/C-H lift transverse unit. The damper is
longitudinal section and vice versa. The pneumatic return traversable. 14
occurs as the stop gate opens, which permits the
15
Delivery notes
▶▶ DA 2/100-H damper for infeeding or outfeeding the WT 17
2/H or WT 2/F-H workpiece pallets via an HQ 2/C-H
18
19
bL (mm) Track width in the longitudinal conveyor 480, 640, 800, 1040, 1200 20
21
22
23
24

DA 2/250-H damper
Technical data
Load
Features
Stop: Steel; hardened Section
profile: Aluminum, natural;
anodized

1
Dimensions
70,5
67
60
30
42 56
56
A
63
70,5
56 56
A
135,5
63
30
75
108
B
28920
28920

DA 2/250-H damper
Track width in the longitudinal conveyor Dimension 1

bL A
(mm) (mm)
2
480 359
640 519
3
800 679
1040 919
4
1200 1079
5
Track width in the longitudinal conveyor Dimension
bL B
(mm) (mm) 6
480 149.5
7
640 229.5
800 309.5
8
1040 429.5
1200 509.5
9
Damping setting, accumulation roller chain µ = 0.02 Damping setting, flat top chain µ = 0.2 10
11
m m
G G 12
[kg] [kg]
250 13
250
1 200
200 1 14
Fmax dyn.
150 150
15
100 2 100
Fmin dyn.
2
50 50 16
3
0
3
0 17
Dmin Dmax Dmin Dmax
18
19
00013036 00013037
20
3 Not possible 3 Not possible 21
22
23
24

SH 2/… switch bracket
There are five types of sensor switch brackets available for

use in the TS 2plus transfer system.

SH 2/S, SH 2/ST, SH 2/S-H switch bracket 8-90 1
SH 2/U, SH 2/UV, SH 2/U-H switch bracket 8-96

4
SH 2/SF switch bracket 8-102

7
SH 2/EP switch bracket 8-104

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

SH 2/S switch bracket
▶▶ For fastening a sensor

▶▶ Suitable for lateral sensing of the workpiece pallet
position
▶▶ Mounted in the upper groove on the side of a
conveyor section
The switch bracket can be used to fix an M12x1 sensor in

place for lateral sensing of the workpiece pallet position.
Accessories
▶▶ M12x1 sensor with SN ≥ 4 mm rated sensing range,
length 50 mm, see p. 8-108
Delivery notes
▶▶ Incl. all fastening material to mount on ST 2 conveyor ▶▶ Not assembled
sections
SH 2/S switch bracket 3842168830
Technical data
Features
Material specification Housing: PA 6; black
Switch cover: PA 6; black
Dimensions
Length l mm 30

Dimensions
1
30 40
2
79,85
55,3
65,3
5
10
7
5,25
8
24
9
10
11
12
13
14
00012825
00012825 15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

SH 2/ST switch bracket

▶▶ Switch cover to protect switches and cables
▶▶ Suitable for lateral sensing of the workpiece pallet
position
▶▶ Mounted in the upper groove on the side of a conveyor
section

Accessories
▶▶ M12x1 sensor with SN ≥ 4 mm rated sensing range,
length 70 mm, see p. 8-108
Delivery notes
SH 2/ST switch bracket 3842168850
Technical data
Features
Material specification Housing: PA 6; black
Switch cover: ABS; transparent
Dimensions
Length l mm 90

Dimensions
1
4
90
40
30
12 5
Ø
18
55,3
79,85
65,3
8
18 10
5,25
11
24
12
00012826
13
14
00012826
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

SH 2/S-H switch bracket

▶▶ Especially sturdy metal design
▶▶ Able to bear loads of up to 100 kg
▶▶ Centering lugs for pre-positioning and quick assembly in
the profile groove
▶▶ Integrated stop for 12 mm sensor
▶▶ Integrated cable guide
▶▶ Mounting on the outer profile groove of the section
profile.

Accessories
p. 8-108
Delivery notes
SH 2/S-H switch bracket 3842537280
Technical data
Features
Material specification Die-cast aluminum

00125174
10
Dimensions
11
12
13
35
80
14
15
15
16
55,3
17
65,3
79,85
18
10
19
20
21
24
22
00125239
23
24
00125239

SH 2/U switch bracket

▶▶ Installation location in the upper groove on the side of a
conveyor section
▶▶ For sensing of the workpiece pallet position from below
The switch bracket is used for fastening an M12x1 sensor

for inquiry of the workpiece pallet position from below.
Accessories
p. 8-108
Delivery notes
SH 2/U switch bracket 3842168820
Technical data
Features
Material specification PA6

23761
10
Dimensions
11
12
13
14
15
54,25
55,25
16
15,25
17
18
19
20
21
22
21,8
31,1
23
40
24
00012823
00012823

SH 2/UV switch bracket

▶▶ Installation location on the VE 2 stop gate
▶▶ For sensing of the workpiece pallet position from below

for inquiry of the workpiece pallet position from below.
Accessories
▶▶ M12x1 sensor with SN= 4 mm rated sensing range,
see p. 8-108
Delivery notes
SH 2/UV switch bracket 3842168600
Technical data
Features

23762
10
Dimensions
11
12
13
14
40
28 15
16
22
30
17
18
19
9,3
20
18,6
21
22
23
00012824
24
00012824

SH 2/U-H switch bracket

▶▶ For sensing the workpiece pallet position from below
▶▶ Especially sturdy metal design
▶▶ Able to bear loads of up to 100 kg
▶▶ Centering lugs for pre-positioning and quick assembly in
the profile groove
▶▶ Installation location on the inner profile groove of the
section profile
▶▶ Integrated stop for 12 mm sensor

for detecting the workpiece pallet position from below.
Accessories
p. 8-108
Delivery notes
SH 2/U-H switch bracket 3842537289
Technical data
Features
Material specification Die-cast aluminum

00125176
10
Dimensions
11
12
13
14
39
55,25
15
55
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
21,8
33
23
35 24
00125240

SH 2/SF switch bracket
▶ For fastening a sensor with special flat design

▶ Installation in the upper groove on the side of a
conveyor section
The switch bracket is used for fastening a sensor with Note: Not suitable for use in heavy duty profiles and
special flat design for lateral inquiry of the workpiece pallet sections with a profile width of 50 mm, for example
position. ST 2/C-H, ST 2/R-H, BS 2/R-H, BS-2/C-H
Accessories
▶ Sensor with special flat design, rated sensing range
SN ≤ 4 mm, e.g., Balluff BES 516-347-SA-2-03
Delivery notes
▶ Incl. fastening material ▶ Not assembled
SH 2/SF switch bracket 3842168840
Technical data
Features

Dimensions
1
3
15
2,43 40
25,5
4
5,2
10 25
10
5
50,5
50
82
53
14
9
16,60
10
11
12
13
00012827
14
00012827
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

SH 2/EP switch bracket

▶▶ For sensing the workpiece carrier at the end of the
line, not traversable
▶▶ Installation location on the inner or outer profile
groove of the section profile
SH 2/EP switch bracket 8981022903
2
ø1
33857

Technical data
1
Features 2
Material specification Steel; PA66
3
Dimensions
4
4 x M5
5
19,05
7
12,4
24
8
40,4
52
9
60
10
11
12
9,5 x 15,5
80
13
45
14
25
15
15
9,8 4,83
28,3 5
16
38,1
17
33858
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Sensors
M12 and M8 inductive sensors with M12 or M8 connector

for workpiece pallet detection, position sensing for lift/
transverse units, positioning units, and rotate units.


M12 inductive sensors with M12 connector 8-108 1
M12 inductive sensors with M8 connector 8-110

4
M8 inductive sensors with M8 connector 8-112

7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

M12 sensors with M12x1 connector
Workpiece pallet position detection, lift/transverse unit, lift position unit and lift transverse unit position detection.
Accessories
▶▶ Switch bracket, see p. 8-90
M12x50 sensor 3842557633
M12x45 sensor 3842549814
M12x70 sensor 3842501548

Technical data
1
Material number 3842557633 3842549814 3842501548
Features 2
IP rating IP 68 IP 67 IP 68
Material specification Housing: CuZn; active Housing: CuZn; active Housing: Stainless 3
surface has nickel- surface has nickel- steel, rustless
free coating: LCP free coating: LCP Active surface: LCP
4
Max. T °C -25 ... +70 °C -25 … +70 °C -40 … +85 °C
operating temperature
5
Dimensions mm M12 x 45 M12 x 45 M12 x 70
Connector M12x1 M12x1 M12x1
6
Rated sensing range SN mm 8 4 4
7
Switching frequency Hz 500 300 2500
Operating current mA 200 200 200
8
Mechanical installation Not flush Flush Not flush
Function indicator LED LED LED
9
Switching output PNP PNP PNP
Switching function Normally open (NO) Normally open (NO) Normally open (NO)
Operating voltage V DC 10 ... 30 10 ... 30 10 ... 30
10
Approvals CE, UL, CSA, EAC CE, UL, CSA CE, UL, CSA, EAC
Conformity with standards IEC 60947-5-2 IEC 60947-5-2 IEC 60947-5-2 11
Circuit diagrams 12
13
14
15
E2
1/BN
L+ 16
I 4/BK
17
3/BU
L-
18
2 19
M12 x1
3 1 20
4 6 21
00127928
22
23
24

Workpiece pallet position detection, lift/transverse unit, lift position unit and lift transverse unit position detection.
Accessories
▶▶ Switch bracket, see p. 8-90
M12x44 sensor 3842549813
M12x67 sensor 3842549812
M12x44 sensor 3842549811

Technical data
1
Material number 3842549813 3842549812 3842549811
Features 2
IP rating IP 67 IP 67 IP 67
Material specification Housing: CuZn; active Housing: CuZn; active Housing: CuZn; 3
surface has nickel- surface has nickel- active surface has
free coating: PBT free coating: LCP nickel-free
Active surface: LCP 4
Max. T °C -25 ... +70 °C -25 ... +70 °C -25 ... +70 °C
operating temperature
5
Dimensions mm M12 x 44 M12 x 67 M12 x 44
Connector M8x1 M8x1 M8x1
6
Rated sensing range SN mm 8 4 4
7
Switching frequency Hz 800 2500 2500
Operating current mA 200 200 200
8
Mechanical installation Not flush Flush Flush
Function indicator LED LED LED
9
Switching output PNP PNP PNP
Switching function Normally open (NO) Normally open (NO) Normally open (NO)
10
Operating voltage V DC 10 … 30 10 … 30 10 … 30
Approvals CE, UL, CSA CE, UL, CSA CE, UL, CSA
Conformity with standards IEC 60947-5-2 IEC 60947-5-2 IEC 60947-5-2 11
Circuit diagrams 12
13
14
L
15
1/BN
L+ 16
I 4/BK
17
3/BU
L-
18
4 19
1 3 20
M8 x1
6 21
24014
22
23
24

For VE 2, VE 2/L, VE 2/M or VE 2/S position sensing in position sensing or for chain tensioner sensing with
connection with 3842528817 (see p. 8-18). For VA 2/50 AS/BS 2/C-100, -250, AS/BS 2/R-300, -700, KU 2
M8x30 sensor 3842551761

Technical data
1
Features 2
IP rating IP 68
Material specification Housing: Stainless steel, rustless 3
Active surface: PBT
Operating temperature T °C -25 ... +70 °C

4
Dimensions M8 x 30
Connector M8x1
5
Rated sensing range SN mm 2
6
Switching frequency Hz 1500
Operating current mA 200
7
Mechanical installation Flush
Function indicator LED
8
Switching output PNP
Switching function Normally open (NO)
9
Operating voltage V DC 10 ... 30
Approvals CE, cULus
10
Conformity with standards IEC 60947-5-2
Circuit diagrams 11
12
13
L
14
1/BN
L+ 15
I 4/BK
16
3/BU
L-
17
4 18
1 3 19
M8 x1
6 20
24014
21
22
23
24

Sensors, combination possibilities
Sensor application matrix
Diameter with Sensor

connector
M12 with M12 3842557633 3842501548 3842549814
M12 with M8 3842549813 3842549812 3842549811
M8 with M8 3842551761
Position sensor AS 2/C-100, AS 2/C-250 X
AS 2/R-300, AS 2/R-700 X
BS 2/R-300, BS 2/R-700 X
BS 2/C-100, BS 2/C-250 X
EQ 2/TR X
EQ 2/TR-90 X
EQ 2/T X
EQ 2/TE X
HQ 2/S X
HQ 2/O X
HQ 2/T X
HQ 2/U X
HQ 2/U2 X
HQ 2/H X X
HQ 2/U-H X X
HQ 2/C‑H X
HD 2 X
HD 2/H X X
KU 2 X
PE 2 X X
PE 2/X, PE 2/H, PE 2/XP X
RA (HP 2/L) X
HP 2 X X
VE 2 position indication X
VA 2/D-130/clamping holder X
WT position sensing SH 2/S X
SH 2/ST X
SH 2/S-H X
SH 2/U X
SH 2/UV X
SH 2/U-H X
WI/M X
WI 2 X
WI 2/H X
WI 2/D X
HQ 2/U-H X X

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

FU frequency converter
U/f mode A frequency converter is a power converter that adjusts the

frequency and amplitude of AC voltage in order to directly
power three-phase motors.
▶▶ VFCplus: U/f open loop, linear and quadratic

▶▶ SLVC: Sensorless vector control (torque/speed)
U
▶▶ VFC eco (energy-saving function)
UN U
1)
MN
M
2)
f
fN
1 M = const. M = torque
2 Field weakening mode MN = nominal torque
35167 f = frequency U = voltage
fN = nominal frequency UN = nominal voltage
Operating modes
U/f mode, U/f characteristic curve Field-oriented controller

The converter regulates motor voltage and keeps the The vector controller, also called the field-oriented
frequency constant. Frequency and voltage are proportional controller, is a speed regulator that is based on an
to each other. Due to the inductive nature of the motor, this underlying current regulator.
results in a constant torque over an extensive range without The instantaneous active and reactive current components
overloading the motor. are regulated. In an electronic motor model saved in the
In U/f mode, the speed of the connected motor varies converter, the motor parameters can be saved or, if
depending on the load. necessary, automatically detected and adapted. The
For this reason, U/f mode is only adequate when speed instantaneous current is the only returned value used
does not need to be constant at all times and there is no for control.
heavy starting. This value and voltage phasing is used to determine all
necessary motor states (speed, slip, torque and thermal
dissipation loss).
This makes very high speed and torque calibration
ranges possible.

FU frequency converter
Drive range of motors with frequency Principle circuit diagram

1
converters (FU)
3
MN(%)
X1 BD2 BD1 L1 L2 L3 Rb2 Rb1 U V W T2 T1 4

100
460 V
5
– +
95
>
400 V M 6
3
90 K PTC
7
M
F1 F3 3
85 8
PE
N
L1
L2 9
80 L3
15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 3/N/PE AC 400V
F (Hz)
10
34242
26844
11
Technical information: Circuit diagram for moltec 8400
At rotating field frequencies of ≥ 15 Hz, the motor can be 12
1 Minimum wiring required for operation
operated under normal operating conditions without an
----*)---- 2 Additional wiring to change direction of rotation
external fan. The motor's thermal conditions should be 13
considered at rotating field frequencies of ≤ 20 Hz. In the
range 20 … 50 Hz, the full torque is available. In order to operate a drive with a frequency converter (FU), 14
the user needs to work out the minimum wiring required
for the internal and external voltage supply (see terminal 15
assignment plan).
16
Technical data
Note: The speed range of the frequency converter is based (By accepting a resulting loss of power, a higher bandwidth 17
on the base speed of the motor. can be covered.)
18
Base speed of motor Min. Max. Max.
at 50 Hz at max. 80%
19
(m/min) (m/min) (m/min) (m/min)
4 2* 4.5 6 20
6 2* 6 8
9 3.5 10 13 21
12 4 13 17
15 5 15 20 22
18 6 18.5 25
* Additional measures may be necessary
23
24

Frequency converter selection guide
Frequency converter selection guide
FU/motec 8400 frequency converter

▶▶ Decentralized frequency converter for motor wall
mounting
▶▶ U/f controller motor control, sensorless vector control
▶▶ Communication via field buses: ASInterface, CANopen,
EtherCAT, PROFIBUS, PROFINET, Ethernet I/P
▶▶ Built-in brake chopper
▶▶ IP 65 rating
▶▶ Output: 0.55 kW
EFC 3610 and EFC 5610 frequency converters

▶▶ Frequency converters for control cabinet installation
▶▶ U/f controller and SVC motor control (only possible with
EFC 5610)
▶▶ Multi-Ethernet interface (sercos III, EtherCAT, Ethernet
I/P, PROFINET, Modbus TCP, CAN, PROFIBUS)
▶▶ Built-in brake chopper (max. 22 kW)
▶▶ Removable control panel for quick and easy start-up
▶▶ I/Os: Analog voltage/current input/output switching
▶▶ IP 20 rating
▶▶ Output: 0.44 kW; 0.75 kW

FU/motec 8400 frequency converter 8-120 1
29383
3
FU frequency converter: power unit 8-121 4

Communication module
5
29384
6
29385
Connection unit 8-122

7
Attachment kit
Connection cable
8
29426
29386
29387
Hand-held control panel, Switching/potentiometer unit 8-123

MIN MAX 10
0
2
11
29416 29417
12
EFC 3610, EFC 5610 frequency converters 8-126
13
14
15
Option cards 8-127
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

In order to operate a gear motor with adjustable speed, the

motor needs to be retrofitted with a frequency converter
(FU). The frequency converter has a modular design so that
it can be easily mounted on a leg set and connected to the
motor by cable.
▶▶ Connected load: 0.55 kW
▶▶ (Connected voltage: 400 V ± 10% … 460 V/480 V ± 10%)
▶▶ Speed (vN) depends on the base speed of the gear
motor used
Complete frequency converter (FU) consisting of the

following modules:
–– Frequency converter power unit
–– Communication module
–– Connection unit
–– Attachment kit
–– Optional: Connection cable for the plug-in connection
to the gear motor (AT = S)
The individual modules can be ordered separately and are

easy to connect with the screws supplied with the scope of
delivery. For the internal and external voltage supply, the
modules must be wired by the user.
▶▶ Manual control unit, see p. 8-123
▶▶ Switching/potentiometer unit, see p. 8-123

FU frequency converter: power unit
FU frequency converter: power unit 1
3
▶▶ Power unit: 0.55 kW
(400 V ± 10% … 460 V/480 V ± 10%)
4
▶▶ Easy start-up via hand-held control panel
▶▶ Easy-to-replace memory module
5
▶▶ Large LED status indicator

7
29384 Frequency converter: 0.55 kW power unit 3842553447
Communication module 9
10
11
▶▶ Used to control the frequency converter
▶▶ Cable connection options 12
Standard I/O communication module 3842553449 14
AS-I communication module 3842553453
CANopen communication module 3842553454 15
29385 EtherNet/IP communication module 3842553451
EtherCAT communication module 3842553459 16
Depending on their function, the individual communication PROFIBUS communication module 3842553452
modules are provided with the corresponding connections. PROFINET communication module 3842553450 17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Connection unit
Connection unit
▶▶ Power grid connection options
29386 Connection unit 3842553445
Attachment kit
▶▶ For the simple attachment of the frequency converter to

the AL leg set (grooves of a 60 mm or 80 mm strut
profile)
29387 Attachment kit 3842553457
Connection cable
▶▶ For connecting the gear motor to the frequency

converter (length: 1 m)
29426 Connection cable 3842553512

Hand-held control panel
Hand-held control panel 1
3
▶▶ For the parameterization of drives with frequency
converters
4
▶▶ For controlling (e.g., block and release)
▶▶ For displaying operating data
5
▶▶ For infinitely variable control of the transport speed
on drives
▶▶ For transferring parameter sets to other base units 6
7
29416
Delivery notes 8
Scope of delivery
▶▶ Incl. 2.5 m connection cable 9

Hand-held control panel 3842552821
11
12
Switching/potentiometer unit 13
14
15
MIN MAX
0
2
16
17
18
29417 19
The switching/potentiometer unit is used to fine tune the Note: It is imperative that the direction in which the chain
20
transport speed within a range that has been preset with conveyor is running is checked prior to start-up.
the manual control unit. The switching/potentiometer unit
21
is connected to the frequency converter by a cable. The Delivery notes
drive can be started or stopped with the rotary switch. Scope of delivery
22
▶▶ Incl. 2.5 m connection cable
23
24
Switching/potentiometer unit 3842553184

Technical data
Connection conditions
Motor connection
4-pin ASM motor cable PaN kW 0.55
No. phases 3
Motor cable length m < 20 (system cable, shielded)
Control
Control method VFCplus: U/f control (linear or quadratic),
SLVC: sensorless vector control (torque/speed);
VFCplus eco: energy-efficient U/f control
Switching frequency kHz 4; 8; 16

Torque response
Max. torque when rated motor output = rated 1.5 x MN for 60 s;
controller output 2.0 x MN for 3 s
Sensorless vector control (speed)

Min. output frequency Hz 0.5 (0 … MN)
Accuracy in 3 … 50 Hz speed range % ±0.5
Concentricity in 3 … 50 Hz speed range Hz ±0.1
Output frequency
Range Hz -300 … +300
Absolute resolution Hz 0.2
Standardized resolution % Parameter data: 0.01;
Process data: 0.006 (= 214)
Grid 3 PE/AC
Line voltage ULN V 320 -0% … 528 +0%
Line frequency range f Hz 45 -0% … 65 +0%
Output voltage ULN 0 … line voltage
Output frequency f Hz 0 … 300
Line current at IaN IAN A 1.8
Note:
The max. output voltage possible is approx. 88% of the line
voltage.

Safety technology 1
STO SIL 3, PLe Cat.4
Drive unit IP rating IP 65 2
Certifications CE, UL, CSA, EAC
Climate conditions 3
In operation °C -30 … +55
Derating %/K 2.5
4
Digital inputs Digital outputs Relay outputs Analog inputs

5
No. No. No. No.
I/O modules
6
Basic I/O 2 ‒ 1 ‒
Standard I/O 5 1 1 1
7
Extended I/O 8 1 1 2
8
Dimensions
9
10
b a
11
12
13
e
14
15
16
17
34281
18
Dimension Dimension Dimension Mass 19

a b e m
(mm) (mm) (mm) (kg)1 20
161 109 241 2.6
1
For the Basic I/O version without cable gland 21
22
23
24

EFC 3610, EFC 5610 frequency converters
EFC 3610, EFC 5610 frequency converters
FU for control cabinet installation

▶▶ No control panel (-NN-)
▶▶ 7-segment display (7 digits) (-7P-)
▶▶ LCD display (extra option)
▶▶ Languages: DE, EN, FR, ES, IT, PT, KR, RU, ZH
Optional module with two slots:

Multi-Ethernet interface (sercos III, EtherCAT, Ethernet I/P,
PROFINET, Modbus TCP, CAN, PROFIBUS)
I/O extension
▶▶ Relay module (250 V AC, 3 A/30 V DC, 3 A)
▶▶ Standard I/O extension:
–– 4 digital inputs (24 V DC, 8 mA/12 V DC, 4 mA)
–– 1 digital output (24 V DC/50 mA)
–– 1 relay output (250 V AC, 3 A/30 V DC, 3 A)
–– 1 analog input (-10 … 10 V/0[2] … 10 V/0[4] …
20 mA)
–– 1 analog output (0[2] … 10 V/0[4] … 20 mA)
EFC 5610)
▶▶ Output: 0.44 kW; 0.75 kW
You can find more detailed information on both frequency

converters in the "EFC 3610/EFC 5610 frequency
converter" catalog.
Material number
DE R999000429
EN R999000430
PL R999001226
TW EFC/VFC x610

EFC 3610, EFC 5610 frequency converters 1
▶▶ FU for control cabinet installation

3
EFC 5610)
4
▶▶ Loadable, application-specific firmware (ASF)
▶▶ Integrated line filter
5
▶▶ Built-in brake chopper (max. 22 kW)
▶▶ Removable control panel for quick and easy start-up
6
▶▶ I/Os: Analog voltage/current input/output switching
▶▶ EFC 5610: STO, Cat. 4 SIL3 PLe safety function
▶▶ IP 20 rating 7

EFC 3610 0.4 kW, 3 AC 380 … 480 V, 50/60 Hz, 1.3 A, LED display R912005717 10
EFC 3610 0.75kW, 3 AC 380 … 480 V, 50/60 Hz, 2.3A, LED display R912005718
EFC 5610 0.4kW, 3 AC 380 … 480 V, 50/60 Hz, 1.3A, LED display R912007272 11
EFC 5610 0.75kW, 3 AC 380 … 480 V, 50/60 Hz, 2.3A, LED display R912007273
12
13
Option cards 14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Description Material number 21

Option terminal base R912006052
Relay card R912006051
22
I/O card R912006050
I/O plus extension R912007257
23
CANopen interface R912006133
PROFIBUS interface R912006132
24
Multi-Ethernet interface R912006134

Technical data
EFC 3610 EFC 5610
(3P 380 … 480 V AC -15%/+10%) Max. rated current Rated motor output Max. rated current Rated motor output
(A) (kW) (A) (kW)
EFC3610-0K40-3P4-…/EFC5610-0K40-3P4-… 1.3 0.4 1.3 0.4

EFC3610-0K75-3P4-…/EFC5610-0K75-3P4-… 2.3 0.75 2.3 0.75
Type
Line voltage V 3 AC 380 … 480 (-15%/+10%)
Line frequency Hz 50 … 60 (±5%)
Rated motor voltage V 3-phase, 0 … line voltage
Output voltage V 0 … line voltage
Output frequency Hz 0 … 400
Overload capacity, heavy-duty mode 150% for 60 s, 200% for 1 s
Functions
Control technology U/f U/f or SVC (sensorless vector control)
Pulse width modulation (PWM) 1 … 15 kHz, adjustable in 1 kHz increments
Speed control range 1:50
Starting torque U/f 100% at 1,5 Hz; 150% at 3 Hz
SVC Not available 200% at 0.5 Hz
Frequency resolution Analog 1/1000 of output frequency
Digital Hz 0.01
Frequency setting accuracy Analog % 0.1
Digital % 0.01
U/f characteristic curve Linear, quadratic, openly definable
Acceleration and brake ramps Linear, S-curve
DC brake Starting Hz 0 … 50
frequency
Brake time s 0 … 10
Integrated controller Integrated stepping mechanism
Controller PID
Bus systems On-board: Modbus/Ext. Options: PROFIBUS, CANopen, multi-Ethernet
No. digital 24 V DC inputs 5 (with 1x 50 kHz pulse train)
No. digital 24 V DC/50 mA outputs 1 (32 kHz pulse train)
No. 230 V AC/30 V DC/3 A relay outputs 1
No. analog 0 ... 10 V or 0 ... 20 mA inputs 2
No. analog 0 ... 10 V or 0 ... 20 mA outputs 1
Display Dust cover with 5 diagnostic LEDs; 5-point LED (optional); LCD (optional)
Status LED Direction of rotation and operating state
Brake
Brake chopper Internal up to 22 kW
Brake resistor External
Motor cable length
Internal C3 filter 0.4 kW ... 4 kW m 15
External C3 filter 0.4 kW ... 4 kW m 30
Ambient conditions
Ambient temperature (during operation) -10 ... 45 °C (derating 1.5% of output per 1° from 45 … 55 °C)
Relative humidity % < 90 (no condensation)
IP rating IP20
Certifications CE, UL, cUL, EAC, RCM

Dimensions
1
W D
3
w ØH d
H h 6
8
ØH
10
Type Dimen- Dimen- Dimen- Dimen- Dimen- Dimen- Dimen- Mass

11
sion sion sion sion sion sion sion
W w H h D d dH 12
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (kg)
EFC3610-0K40-3P4-.../EFC5610-0K40-3P4-... 95 66 166 156 167 159 4.5 1.5 13
EFC3610-0K75-3P4-.../EFC5610-0K75-3P4-... 95 66 166 156 167 159 4.5 1.5
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Circuit diagram
External brake resistor
Main switch
EMC filter*
Digital multi-function inputs
External PPN supply Internal PPN supply
Analog output
Open collector or pulse

output
Relay output
Analog voltage/current input
Communication
Analog voltage/current input
interface
Power supply Signal supply Shielded cable required

2
WI/M, WI 2/… rockers
3
Rocker functions
6
Area monitoring
The stop rail leans slightly to one side and, 7
together with a sensor, signals the presence of a
workpiece pallet in the area of this rail. The length 8
of the monitored area depends on the length of
the stop rail. 9
The sensor for the stop rail is damped when the
rocker is deactivated. For WI/M, the sensor is 10
dampened when the rocker is activated.
11
Stop
At the end of a lift transverse unit the workpiece 12
pallet is stopped by the slide stop or by the rocker
in its capacity as a stop. 13
Dampened WI 2/D rockers are recommended for
total workpiece pallet weights of > 35 kg. 14
15
Rockers are used for the following areas: Workpiece pallet detection
–– For area monitoring If a WI 2 rocker is fitted with a second sensor, not 16
–– As a stop for transverse conveying of workpiece only can an area be monitored, but the position of
pallets a WT 2 workpiece pallet – in position on the lift 17
–– For workpiece pallet detection transverse unit – can also be detected. This is
necessary, for example, if rockers are used 18
Depending on the desired function, the WI/M, WI 2/… together with EQ 2 reversible lift transverse units.
rockers should be fitted with either one (WI/M) or two The second sensor, which can be fitted later
19
(WI 2) sensors (see p. 8-114). whenever required, is attenuated if the workpiece
pallet is positioned centrally in front of the
20
activated rocker.
21
22
23
24

WI/M rockers 8-133
WI 2 rockers 8-139
30
WI 2/X rockers 8-143

100
WI 2/D rockers 8-145

100

WI/M rocker
WI/M rocker 1
3
▶▶ For area monitoring
▶▶ For workpiece pallet detection
4
▶▶ For accumulation pressure control
▶▶ Simple and compact construction
5
6
WT 2/F-H 7
10
11
12
The WI/M rocker is used for area monitoring on transfer engages a sensor to enable detection. Alternatively, 13
systems. The WI/M rocker is unsuitable for use as a stop for a pneumatic cylinder switch can be used to convert the
workpiece pallets arriving from the transverse conveyor. In rocker activation directly into a pneumatic signal. Simple, 14
addition, a stop or damper must be installed to absorb the purely pneumatic accumulation pressure regulation can be
impact pulse corresponding to the workpiece pallet weight. established in conjunction with a VE 2 stop gate. 15
The spring-mounted rocker switch physically detects
workpiece pallets. The metal element in the rocker switch 16
Accessories Delivery notes 17

Recommended accessories Scope of delivery
▶▶ M12x1 sensor with SN ≥ 4 mm rated sensing range, ▶▶ Including fastening material for installation on ST 2 18
length 70 mm, see p. 8-108 conveyor sections or BS 2 belt sections.
▶▶ Pneumatic cylinder switch, see p. 8-136 19
20
WI/M rocker 3842530797 21
Technical data
22
Features
23
Monitoring range mm 60
24

WI/M rocker
Dimensions
Mounting on ST2/... Mounting on ST2/...-H
37,5 2)
42,5 2)
31,5 3)
WT 2 WT 2 36,5 3)
19
19
37
37
28
28
1) 1) 1) 1)
(91)
(91)
10,5
10,5
40
40
14
14
40
60
WI /M WI /M
29
ST 2/B
29
ST 2/C-H
65
60
60
60
00012816
1 Conveying level
2 Limit stop not activated
3 Limit stop activated
Note: Rocker activated, electrical sensor dampened

WI/M rocker
Circuit diagrams
1
2
VE 1 VE 2/...
5
R
6
Ø 4 mm Ø 4 mm
2 7
8
1 3 1 3
9
4-6 bar 4-6 bar
10
30060
Installation locations on ST 2 or ST 2/…-H 11
12
13
14
15
WI/M (ST 2/B) 16
17
18
19
WI/M (ST 2/C-H)
20
30061
21
22
23
24

Pneumatic cylinder switch
The pneumatic cylinder switch is used for direct conversion established in conjunction with a VE 2 stop gate.
of the slide activation into a pneumatic signal. Simple,
purely pneumatic accumulation pressure regulation can be
Pneumatic cylinder switch 3842532151
Note: Rocker not activated, pneumatic cylinder switch in operating position.
Circuit diagrams
1 3
30060_x

WI/M protective cover
WI/M protective cover 1
10
11
12
The protective cover enables the WI/M rocker to be used in 13

harsh industrial environments.
14
Delivery notes
16
WI/M protective cover 3842537855
18
Technical data
Features
Material specification Sheet steel; corrosion-resistant 20
21
22
23
24

Dimensions
36
WT 2
41,5
28
01) 01)
97
40
44
40
ST 2
100
125
73
00125241
00125241
1 Conveying level

WI 2 rocker
WI 2 rocker 1
30
2
3
4
▶▶ As a stop for transverse transportation of workpiece
pallets
5
6
▶▶ Suitable for use in an EPA 7
10
11
12
One basic rocker element for workpiece pallet lengths of Two basic rocker elements for workpiece pallet lengths of 13
≤ 480 mm ≥ 640 mm
14
Delivery notes
▶▶ Including fastening material for installation on the ST 2
conveyor section or BS 2 belt section. 16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

WI 2 rocker
WI 2 rocker bQ = 160 3842348780
WI 2 rocker bQ = 240 3842348781
WI 2 rocker bQ = 320 3842348782
WI 2 rocker bQ = 400 3842348783
WI 2 rocker bQ = 480 3842348784
WI 2 rocker bQ = 640 3842348786
WI 2 rocker bQ = 800 3842348788
Technical data
Material number 3842348780 3842348781 3842348782 3842348783
Load
Max. total workpiece mG kg 30 30 30 30
pallet weight1
Min. workpiece pallet m kg 1.5 1.5 1.5 1.5

weight2
Features
ESD Yes Yes Yes Yes
Monitoring range mm 165 270 350 430
Dimensions
Length l mm 320 320 400 480
Material number 3842348784 3842348786 3842348788
Load
Max. total workpiece mG kg 30 30 30
pallet weight1
Min. workpiece pallet m kg 1.5 3.0 3.0

weight2
Features
ESD Yes Yes Yes
Monitoring range mm 510 670 830
Dimensions
Length l mm 560 720 880
1
Max. total WT weight applies when feeding from a transverse section into a main section; for area monitoring, only the max. system weight of 240 kg
cannot be exceeded.
2
Min. WT weight applies per rocker

WI 2 rocker
For workpiece pallet lengths of ≤ 480 mm

1
20
2
1,5
85
4
10 125
6
10
11
12
43
13
l
20619
20619 14
15
l
a b
16
c 25
17
13
34
43
18
40 105 0,2 28 0,2 46
19
20620
20620
Track width in the Dimension Dimension Dimension Dimension 20

transverse conveyor a b c l
bQ
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) 21
160 165 155 105 320 22

240 165 155 25 320
320 245 155 25 400 23
400 292 188 25 480
480 332 228 25 560 24

WI 2 rocker
Dimensions
For workpiece pallet lengths of ≥ 640 mm
20
1,5
85
10 125 125
l 43
21600
21600
l
155 155
34
43
28+0,2 46
21601 40 105+0,2 105+0,2
21601
Track width in the transverse conveyor Dimension

bQ l
(mm) (mm)
640 720
800 880

WI 2/X rocker
WI 2/X rocker 1
100
2
3
▶▶ Fixed stop for workpiece pallet in the transverse
conveyor
4
5
▶▶ For permitted total weight of workpiece pallets > 30 kg
6
▶▶ Can be combined with WT 2 and WT 2/F 7
8
10
11
12
Accessories 13
▶▶ Round M12 sensor with a rated sensing range ▶▶ Additional MS rocker extension with second rocker and 14
SN ≥ 4 mm, see p. 8-108 connecting strip for installation of a rocker positioned
between the start and end of the conveyor section. 15
Delivery notes 16
Scope of delivery
▶▶ Including fastening material for fastening to ST 2 17
conveyor sections or BS 2 belt sections.
18
WI 2/X rocker 3842524447
MS rocker extension lwt = 400 3842524449 20
MS rocker extension lwt = 480 3842524450
MS rocker extension lwt = 640 3842524451 21
MS rocker extension lwt = 800 3842524452
MS rocker extension lwt = 1040; 1200 3842524453 22
23
24

WI 2/X rocker
Technical data
Load
Max. total workpiece pallet weight1 mG kg 100
Min. workpiece pallet weight2 m kg 1.5
Features
ESD Yes
Monitoring range mm 430 … 1230
1
cannot be exceeded.
2
MS rocker extension
Material number 3842524449 3842524450 3842524451 3842524452 3842524453
Dimensions
Length of workpiece pallet lWT mm 400 480 640 800 1040; 1200
Features
Monitoring range mm 430 510 670 830 1230
Dimensions
1,5
125
56,5
MS
8
35
00116775
00116775
MS Additional rocker extension

WI 2/D rocker
WI 2/D rocker 1
100
2
3
▶▶ As a dampened stop for workpiece pallets in the
transverse conveyor
4
5
▶▶ For permitted total weight of workpiece pallets > 35 kg
6
▶▶ Can be combined with WT 2 and WT 2/F 7
8
10
11
12
Accessories 13
▶▶ Round M12 sensor with a rated sensing range ▶▶ Additional MS rocker extension with second rocker and 14
SN ≥ 4 mm, see p. 8-108 connecting strip for installation of a rocker positioned
between the start and end of the conveyor section from 15
a monitoring range of 400 mm.
16
Delivery notes
▶▶ Incl. DA 2/100 damper 18
19
WI 2/D rocker 3842524448 20
21
22
23
24

WI 2/D rocker
Technical data
Load
Max. total workpiece pallet weight1 mG kg 100
Min. workpiece pallet weight2 m kg 5
Features
ESD Yes
Monitoring range mm 430 … 1230
1
cannot be exceeded.
2
Dimensions
1,5
112 125
MS
8
35
00116774
MS Additional rocker extension

MS rocker extension
MS rocker extension 1
3
10
11
12
Rocker extension as a second rocker with connecting strip 13

for installation of a rocker positioned between the start and
end of the conveyor section. 14
▶▶ WI 2/X or WI 2/D rocker, see p. 8-143/8-145
16
MS rocker extension lWT = 400 3842524449
MS rocker extension lWT = 480 3842524450 18
MS rocker extension lWT = 640 3842524451
MS rocker extension lWT = 800 3842524452 19
MS rocker extension lWT = 1040; 1200 3842524453
20
Technical data
Material number 3842524449 3842524450 3842524451 3842524452 3842524453 21
Dimensions
Length of workpiece lWT mm 400 480 640 800 1040; 1200 22
pallet
Features
23
Monitoring range mm 430 510 670 830 1230
24

WT 2 stop
WT 2 stop
30
▶▶ Fixed stop in the transverse conveyor

▶▶ Installation location: ST 2 section and BS 2. belt section
▶▶ Not suitable for mounting on ST 2/…-H or BS 2/…-H
sections
The WT 2 stop is used as a fixed stop for workpiece pallets

entering a longitudinal section from a transverse section.
Delivery notes
▶▶ Including fastening material for installation between two ▶▶ Not assembled
ST 2 conveyor sections or BS 2 belt sections.
WT 2 stop 3842519717
Technical data
Load
Features
ESD Yes

WT 2 stop
Dimensions
1
16,5
2
12
3
29,5
36
4
5
105
7
36,5
7,5
14 78 9
00125246 10
00125246
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

WT 2 stop

Identification systems | TS 2plus 7.0 9-1

Identification systems
1
Identification systems 9-3 6
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

9-2 TS 2plus 7.0 | Identification systems

Identification systems | TS 2plus 7.0 9-3

Identification systems 1
Identification and data tag systems are used to control

numerous production and transport systems in assembly 6
technology applications.
7
Data related to objects is the basis for

8
▶▶ VE, VE 2/M, VE 2/L or VE 2/S stop gates
▶▶ M8x1 sensor with rated sensing range SN ≥ 2 mm, can 9
be installed flush
10
You can find our current range of identification and data tag
systems in the RFID systems catalog.
11
12
13
Catalog: 3842541003
14
www.boschrexroth.de/mediadirectory
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

9-4 TS 2plus 7.0 | Identification systems

MTpro planning software | TS 2plus 7.010-1
MTpro planning
1
software 3
MTpro planning software 10-3 6
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

10-2 TS 2plus 7.0 | MTpro planning software

MTpro planning software | TS 2plus 7.010-3
MTpro planning software 1
MTpro is a software program used for planning assembly Configuration and calculation
systems. It assists you from selection to configuration and 6
▶▶ Product configuration and generation of ordering
ordering of the Rexroth products. The program offers the information
following functions and full content in seven languages 7
▶▶ Issuing of order lists in user-specific presentations
(en/de/fr/es/it/ja/zh): ▶▶ Direct connection to Rexroth eShop
8
▶▶ Quick & Easy profile configuration and drafting
Layout Designer for planning and designing complete ▶▶ Other design and calculation programs
9
frames and conveyor systems
▶▶ Simple design using the drag & drop and snap functions CAD library
10
without a CAD system ▶▶ Configurable CAD models
▶▶ Design logic for automatic configuration and assembly ▶▶ Memories in standard formats
11
adaptation ▶▶ Direct integration into all common CAD systems
▶▶ Automatic order list generation of all small parts and
12
accessories
System requirements
▶▶ Export of 3D volume models
▶▶ Windows from version 7 onwards 13
▶▶ Library for saving and reusing your own modules and
▶▶ DVD-ROM drive
layouts
▶▶ At least 6 GB of free disk space hard disk space 14
▶▶ Adobe Reader from version 10 onwards
Product information
▶▶ Internet access for layout designer licensing and 15
▶▶ Technical data automatic updates
▶▶ Catalog data sheets
16
▶▶ Assembly instructions
▶▶ Spare parts lists and drawings
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Catalog: 3842539057
www.boschrexroth.de/mediadirectory 24

10-4 TS 2plus 7.0 | MTpro planning software

Technical data | TS 2plus 7.011-1

Technical data
1
System specifications 11-2 6
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

11-2 TS 2plus 7.0 | Technical data

System specifications
Application CE identification, responsibility
The Rexroth transfer systems all form a program of fine- Components that fall under the EC Machinery Directive are
tuned mechanical components that are used to convey, delivered with the corresponding declaration of
separate, and position workpiece pallets. With these incorporation. Overall responsibility for system safety
components, you can create almost any system layout (declaration of conformity, CE identification) lies with the
you need. system builder. The references in the assembly instructions
The systems are primarily used to convey workpieces and in the Instructions for Employees on Safety –
(on Rexroth workpiece pallets) to and from manual or 3842527147 – must be followed.
automatic work stations on an assembly line.
Media resistance
Planning
Our products are guaranteed to be resistant to numerous
Transfer system planning (the combination of components media common to manufacturing, such as water, mineral
into a modular system), setup, initial start up and oil, grease and detergents. Contact your Rexroth
maintenance should only be done by trained personnel. representative if you have any doubts about resistance to
Rexroth offers training courses for this. specific chemicals, e.g., test oil, doped oils, aggressive
detergents, solvents, or brake fluid.
Scope of delivery – small parts Avoid prolonged contact with highly reactive acidic or
alkaline materials.
The sensors, pneumatic valves, and electrical and
pneumatic installation material that are necessary for Contamination
operation are usually not included in the scope of delivery.
These parts are only preassembled if doing so guarantees Wear may increase dramatically if the system is
special functional safety or if installing them at a later point contaminated due to environmental factors, particularly
would require a disproportionate effort. with abrasive media such as sand and silicates, but also
Please note the references for the required flow control due to processes running on the transfer system (e.g.,
valves and check valves in the pneumatic switching plan welding beads, pumice dust, glass shards, shavings, or lost
(listed in the assembly and operation instructions) must be parts, etc.). In such cases, maintenance intervals must be
followed. substantially shortened.
Note
Functional safety
Examples Resistance to media and contamination does not mean that
Installation references, pneumatic switching plans and functional safety is guaranteed in every case.
typical function processes are described in the catalogs ▶▶ Liquids that thicken on evaporation and are highly
and assembly instructions. These must be followed when viscous or adhesive (sticky) could lead to a disruption
setting up and starting the initial operation of the system. in function.
▶▶ Media with lubricating properties may reduce the
driving power that is caused by friction if they are
transported on systems with belts or round belts.
▶▶ The chain lubricant used on conveyor chains can be
washed away with solvents or detergents.


Such cases require special attention when planning the Measures to reduce wear
3
system and adjusting the maintenance intervals.
The following measures reduce wear and the friction
4
Environmental sustainability, recycling caused by it:
▶▶ Switch off conveyor sections when the system is not
5
The materials used are environmentally friendly. running, e.g., during breaks, overnight, on the weekend.
They can be recycled or reused (components may have to ▶▶ Do not select conveyor section speeds that are higher
be processed and replaced). Recyclability is ensured by the 6
than those required for the particular function
selection of materials and the ability to take the ▶▶ Minimize the weight of the workpiece pallet – do not
components apart. 7
overload workpiece supports with material.
▶▶ Avoid unnecessary accumulation sections, e.g., by
Pneumatic connection data reducing the number of workpiece pallets 8
▶▶ Switch off accumulation sections carrying heavy
Oiled or non-oiled, filtered, dry compressed air. workpiece pallets if transport is not necessary. 9
Operating pressure 4 to 6 bar ▶▶ Very important: Avoid contamination by abrasive media
Performance data is for an operating pressure of 5 bar. or reduce contamination with regular cleaning 10
Maintenance Load specifications 11
The TS components require very little maintenance. Permitted loads apply for conveyor sections under the 12
Maintenance instructions are included in the condition that only workpiece pallets with the maximum
operating manual. total permitted weight have accumulated. 13
Higher loads are permitted if accumulation can be safely
Wear avoided. 14
Accumulation operation is not permitted on lift-transverse
Wear is caused by the basic principle of this system and units. 15
cannot be avoided. Design measures and appropriate
materials help ensure functional safety over the life of the Wear and conveyor speed 16
product. However, wear depends on the operating,
maintenance, and ambient conditions of the system and the Nominal data for the permitted workpiece pallet weight 17
location (resistance, contamination). describe operation at standard speeds and under normal
operating conditions. 18
Wear on the workpiece pallet wear pads and the conveyor
medium will not influence system function throughout the 19
service life.
20
Wear and higher/lower loads
21
Higher loads may lead to more wear and thus require,
among other measures, shorter maintenance intervals.
22
A linear decrease in wear can be calculated for lower loads
(half load = half the wear = twice the service life).
23
24


System specifications
Loading the workpiece pallet, combination of Transportation speed, Influence on wear
empty and loaded workpiece pallet
Wear on the conveyor medium, slide rails, workpiece pallet
When setting up and testing the modular units, the wear pads and the like is proportional to the conveying
workpieces pallets should not all have the same weight on speed. This means that, in comparison to the standard
the conveyor sections, i.e., full and empty pallets should all speed of 12 m/min, when running at 18 m/min the wear
come through the circuit. limit is already reached at 12/18 = 2/3 of the running time.
Extreme differences in weight may require special measures

to avoid functional disruptions. This applies, e.g., to the Transportation speed, dynamic influences
permitted accumulation length before stop gates, for the
function of dampers and damped stop gates, and also for When the conveying speed increases bumps when changing
accumulation in curves. directions and the rebound force on the stop gates also
increase. This may require longer damping periods or shock
Function is usually not limited if the weight ratio is 2:1
absorbers before the next movement. If accumulation roller
between heavy (loaded with a workpiece) and light
chains are the conveyor medium a return stop combined
workpiece pallets (empty).
with stop gates is recommended for operation at
higher speeds.
Loading the workpiece pallet, minimum weight
The minimum weight of the workpiece pallet is generally

not relevant. In special cases – depending on the marginal
conditions – an application-specific minimum weight may
be required for safe and continuous transport. This can
occur, for example, if switching elements have to be
manually operated (on the rocker), or if a lighter workpiece
pallet does not run smoothly when changing directions,
e.g., jumps out of the guide on the HQ. In such unusual
cases, additional weight should be added when designing
the workpiece pallet.
Overloading
Overloading the conveyor sections may damage the

conveyor medium and cause the motor and gears to
break down.
When overloading of pneumatic components occurs

function cannot be guaranteed.


Function plans 11-12 1
Motor data/motor connection 11-24 4
Transportation and nominal speeds vN 11-28

7
Compressed air consumption of the
TS 2plus units
8
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Function plans
Function plans
On the following pages, you can find proven fundamental Characters are used in the action blocks that deviate from
function plans for control tasks in transfer systems. DIN IEC 61131‑-3. They are explained in the following table.
Action block Explanation

S Storing
NS Non-storing
S Set
R Reset
NS T3 D Non-storing triggering of a time function (with runtime T), after which a switching function is triggered.
T3
?
S Y2.1 S
Simple VE 2 stop gates are used to stop workpiece pallets. The function plans are simplified accordingly if using stop
The position of the workpiece pallets is queried with gates with integrated sensors and internal switching logic.
separate sensors.
General abbreviations
WT = Workpiece pallet
VE = Stop gate
S… = Signaling device
Y… = Valve
Z… = Cylinder
LT = Longitudinal conveyor (main section)
QT = Transverse conveyor (adjacent section)
HQ = Lift transverse unit
DA = Damper
 = Start pulse after end of start-up
 = Release cyclic travel

Function plans
Function plans 1
3
Transfer to transverse section (TFE 1)
4
S5
5
S1 1 6
2
≥1 S2
S3 7
S5
Z1 S2 Z2 S3 1N1 NS Y1 (Z1) S
8
S2
00126959
1N2
9
S3
1N3 NS T3 D 10
T3
F
NS Y2 (Z2) S
S5
11
1N4
12
30069
13
S2 = WT after VE1 (Z1) 14

S3 = WT in position on HQ (Z2) (WI/M rocker)
T3 = Delaying time 100 … 200 ms 15
S5 = Enable main section 1
Y1 = Main section VE (Z1) 16
Y2 = Lifting cylinder HQ (Z2)
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Function plans
Function plans
Transfer to longitudinal section (TFE 2)
S8 Z3
1
2
≥1 S8
S7
Z4
1N1 NS Y4 (Z4) S
S7 S Y3 (Z3) S
00126932 S7
1N2
S7
S8
1N3 NS T8 D
F T8
S Y3 (Z3) R
S8
1N4
30069
S7 = WT after VE4 (Z4)

S8 = WT in position on HQ (WI/M rocker)
T8 = Delaying time 100 … 200 ms
Y3 = EQ lifting cylinder (Z3)
Y4 = Adjacent section VE (Z4)

Function plans
Function plans 1
3
Transverse conveyor (separating, outfeeding) (TFE 3)
4
S5 5
1
2
≥1 S2 6
A1 S3
S5 7
1N1 NS Y1 (Z1) S
Z1 S2 Z2 S3 8
00126934
S2
1N2 9
=1
S3 10
A1
1N3 NS T3 D
T3 11
F
NS Y2.1 (Z2) S
S5 12
1N4
13
S3
A1
1N5 S Y2.2 (Z2) S 14
S3
1N6 15
S3 16
1N7 S Y2.2 (Z2) R
17
30113 18
S2 = WT after VE1 (Z1) 19

S3 = WT in position on HQ
T3 = Delaying time 100 … 200 ms 20
S5 = Enable branch section
Y1 = Main section VE (Z1) 21
Y2 = Lifting cylinder HQ (Z2)
P10 = Priority main section
22
A1 = Identification system with straight-ahead signal
(0 = branching
23
1 = straight)
24

Function plans
Function plans
Transverse conveyor (separating, feeding) (TFE 4)
S8 Z3 Z5
1
2
≥1 S8
S7
S11
S11 S10 1N1
=1
Z4 S7
S7 S6
S6 S10
≥1 P10
00126936
1N2 NS Y4 (Z4) S
S Y3.1 (Z3) S
S P10 S
S7
1N3
S10
S11
S6
≥1 P10
1N6 NS Y5 (Z5) S
S P10 R
S Y3.2 (Z3) S
S11
1N7
S8
1N8
S8
1N9 S Y3.2 (Z3) R
S8
1N4 NS T8 D
F T8
S Y3 (Z3) R
S8
1N7
30114
T8 = Delaying time 100 … 200 ms

S6 = WT before VE4 (Z4)
S7 = WT after VE4 (enable branch section)
S8 = WT in position on HQ (WI/M rocker)
Y3 = HQ lifting cylinder (Z3)
Y4 = Adjacent section VE (Z4)
Y5 = Main section VE (Z5)
Y6 = VE in EQ (Z6)
P10 = Priority main section

Function plans
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Function plans
Function plans
EQ 2/TR transverse conveyor (separating, outfeeding) (TFE 5)
S8 Z3
Z1
1
2
≥1 S2
A1 S3
00108332 S2 Z2 S3 Z6 S4 S4
S8
1N1 NS Y1 (Z1) S
S2
1N2
=1
S3
S8
A1
1N3 NS T3 D
T3
F
S Y2.1 (Z2) S
S Y3.1 (Z3) S
S8
1N4 NS T8 D
T8
F
S Y3.1 (Z3) R
S Y2.1 (Z2) R
S8
1N5
A1
1N6 NS Y2.2 (Z2) S
S3
1N7
S4
S3
1N8
30115

Function plans
4
S1 = WT in position at VE1 (Z1)
5
S3 = WT in position on EQ Part 1
T3 = Switch-on delay 100 … 200 ms
6
S4 = Enable main section 1
7
S7 = WT after VE4
8
S8 = WT on EQ Part 2 (WI/M rocker)
Y2.1/2.2 = EQ lifting cylinder (Z2) 9
Y3.1/3.2 = EQ lifting cylinder (Z3)
A1 = Straight-ahead signal 10
(0 = branching
1 = straight) 11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Function plans
Function plans
EQ 2/TR transverse conveyor (feeding) (TFE 6)
S8 Z3 S11 Z5 S10
1
2
≥1 S1
S3
Z1 S2
1N5 NS Y1 (Z1) S
S2
1N6
S1 S2 Z2 S3
00126936
S3
1N7 NS T3 D
S8
S3
T3
S10
P10
1N8 NS Y2.1 (Z5) S
S P10 S
S Y3.1 (Z3) S
S8
1N9 NS T8 D
F T8
S Y3.2 (Z3) R
S8
1N10
1
2
≥1 S8
S10 0
S11
S3
≥1 P10
1N1 NS Y5 (Z5) S
S P10 R
S Y3.2 (Z3) S
S11
1N2
S8
1N3
S8
1N4 S Y3.2 (Z3) R
30116

Function plans
4
5
6
S8 = WT on EQ-part 2
7
8
Y3.1/3.2 = EQ lifting cylinder (Z3) 9
P10 = Priority 10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Function plans
Function plans
EQ 2/TR transverse conveyor (transfer) (TFE 7)
S8 Z3
Z1 1
2
≥1
S3
S2 Z2 S3 S2
00126936
1N1 NS Y1 (Z1) S
S2
1N2
S8
S3
1N3 NS T3 D
T3
F
NS Y2.1 (Z2) S
S Y3.1 (Z3) S
S8
1N4 NS T8 D
T8
F
S Y3.1 (Z3) R
30117

S8 = WT on EQ Part 2 Enable main section 1 (WI/M rocker)

Function plans
3
PE conveyor function unit
4
S5
Z3
5
S2 1 6
Z2 2
S3, S4 ≥1 S1
S2 7
S1 1N1 NS Y1 (Z1) S
Z1 8
S1
00126938
1N2
S2 9
1N3 NS T3 D
T3
? 10
S Y2.1 S
S4
S3 11
1N4 NS A1 S
A2 12
1N5 S Y2.1 R
NS Y2.2 S
13
S3
S4
1N6
14
A2
1N7 NS Y3 (Z3) S
15
S5
1N8 16
17
30118 18
S1 = WT after VE1 19
S2 = WT arrival
S3 = Bottom end lifting position 20
S4 = Top end lifting position
Y1 = Open VE1 (Z1)
Y2 = WT lift
22
Y3 = Open VE (Z3)
A1 = Start process
23
A2 = Process ended
24

Function plans
Function plans
HQ 2
– No HQ 2 position sensing
VE 2
– Stop gate remains open in joint standby position
General
– WT 2 cannot be detected from below by proximity switch
DA 2
– For TFE 2 and TFE 4 conveyor function units, damper
extension must be delayed. This ensures that the HQ 2 is
already in the upper position

Function plans
Function plans 1
3
Transfer to transverse section (TFE 1) function plan for HQ 2/C-H
4
Z1 S2 Z4 S3
5
S5 1
2
Z2 6
1
S2
S3 7
S4 S4
1N1 NS Y1 (Z1) 8
00012948.eps
NS Y4 (Z4)
S2
9
1N2
S3 10
1N3 NS T3 D
F
T3
11
NS Y2 (Z2)
S4 12
1N4 S Y3 (Z2)
13
S5
1N5 R Y3 (Z2)
14
00012949.eps
15
= Start pulse after end of start-up 16

= Enable cyclic travel
S3 = WT in position on HQ 2
S4 = Enable adjacent section, HQ 2 free 18
S5 = HQ 2 down
Y1 = Main section VE 2 (Z1) 19
Y2 = HQ 2 up (Z2)
Y3 = HQ 2 down (Z2) 20
Y4 = Extend DA 2 damper (Z4), stop position
Note: Central position of HQ 2 is centered by springs (without pressurization) 21
Note: Distance Z1–Z3 IWT +200 mm
22
23
24

Function plans
Function plans
Transfer to transverse section (TFE 2) function plan for HQ 2/C-H
S2
1
Z2 2
1
Z4 S2
S1 S3
Z1 S3
1N1 NS Y1 (Z1)
S Y2 (Z2)
00012964.eps
NS T D
T
F
NS Y4 (Z4)
S1
1N2
S1
S2
1N3 NS T2 D
T2
F
R Y2 (Z2)
NS Y3 (Z2)
S3
1N4
00012965.eps
= Start pulse
S1 = WT after VE 2
S3 = Enable main section, HQ 2 free
Y1 = Adjacent section VE 2 (Z1)
Y2 = HQ 2 up (Z2)
Y3 = HQ 2 down
Y4 = Extend DA 2 damper
Note: Distance Z1–Z3 bWT +200 mm

Function plans
Function plans 1
3
Outfeeding from longitudinal conveyor (TFE 3) function plan for HQ 2/C-H
4
Z4 S2 Z2
1
A1
2 5
1 S1
S2
S3
S4 6
A1
Z1 S1 S3
1N1 NS Y1 (Z1) 7
S4
NS Y4 (Z4)
S1
1N2 8
00012950.eps
1
S2 9
1N3 NS T2 D
T2
F
NS Y2 (Z2) 10
S4
1N4 S Y3 (Z2)
11
1N5 R Y3 (Z2)
12
S3
A1
1N6 NS Y3 (Z2) 13
S3
1N7 14
00012951.eps
15
= Start pulse 16
S4 = Enable adjacent section, HQ 2 free 18
S3 = Enable main section, HQ 2 free
S5 = HQ 2 down (Z2) 19
Y1 = Main section VE 2 (Z1)
Y2 = HQ 2 up (Z") 20
Y3 = HQ 2 down (Z2)
Y4 = Extend DA 2 damper 21
A1 = Straight-ahead signal
Note: Central position (WT 2 stop position) of HQ 2 is centered by springs 22
(without pressurization)
Note: Distance Z1–Z3 IWT +200 mm
23
Distance S2–S3 = min. 200 mm
24

Function plans
Function plans
Infeeding to longitudinal conveyor (TFE 4) function plan for HQ 2/C-H
S5 Z2 S6 Z3 Z4 S3 1
2
1 S3
S4
VE4/2
1N1
S2
VE 4/1 S4 1
Z1 S2
S1 S1
00012962.eps S5
1 P10
1N2 NS Y1 (Z1)
S Y3 (Z3)
S P10
NS T D
T
F
NS Y5 (Z5)
S2
1N3
S6
S5
S1
1 P10
1N4 NS Y2 (Z2)
R P10
S6
1N5
S3
1N6 NS T3 D
T3
F
R Y3 (Z3)
NS Y4 (Z3)
1
S4
1N7
00012963.eps

Function plans
4
= Start pulse after end of start-up
5
S1 = WT before VE 2
S2 = WT after VE 2
6
S4 = WT after VE 4
7
S5 = WT before VE 2
S6 = WT after VE 2
8
Y3 = HQ 2 up (Z3) 9
Y4 = HQ 4 down; not required
Y5 = Extend DA 2 damper (Z4) 10
P10 = Priority
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Motor data
Motor data
Electrical connection requirements:

Connection to a 3-phase, 5-wire system (L1, L2, L3, N, PE);
a connection plan is included in the terminal box.
All motors are equipped with a thermal contact*, which has
to be connected to an overload switch-off.
All of the motors have an IP 55 rating.
* Bi-metal thermal contact, tripping at 150 °C ± 5 °C
Motor types without Index b Motor types with Index b
Motor connection with plug (AT = S) and 3A metal industrial plug-in Motor connection with plug (AT = S) and 3A metal industrial plug-in
connector for motor types without Index b, e.g., 734 connector for motor types without Index b, e.g., 734b

Motor data
Motor data 1
3
Performance data
Note: Values are typical. Subject to change. See motor type plate for official data.
Please note the country assignment. 4
Voltage class A A B D
5
Circuit ∆ Y Y Y
Voltage U at f = 50 Hz 200 V ±10% 400 V ±10%
6
200 V ±10% 400 V +10...-12%
Voltage U at f = 60 Hz 220 V ±10% 400 V ±10% 460 V ±10% 575 V ±10%
7
220 V ±10% 400 V ±10% 460 V +10...-12% 575 V ±10%
Current consumption at rated power Power factor Power output at
8
Motor type IE3 IN (A) IN (A) IN (A) IN (A) cos ϕ (50Hz) (60Hz)
P (kW) P (kW)
524 x 0.65 0.35 0.32 0.24 0.6 0.09 0.1 9
614b – – – 0.49 – 0.56 0.12 0.14
624 x 1.15 0.65 0.55 0.45 0.66 0.18 0.22 10
634 x 1.65 0.9 0.85 0.65 0.6 0.25 0.29
644b – – – – 0.75 0.6 0.25 0.29 11
714b – 1.75 1 0.8 – 0.64 0.25 0.3
716b – 1.45 0.85 0.6 0.55 0.66 ... 0.68 0.18 0.22 12
716 x 1.3 0.75 0.6 0.62 0.68 0.18 0.22
734b – 2.3 1.35 0.95 0.95 0.72 ... 0.77 0.37 0.45 13
734 x 1.9 1.05 0.95 0.72 0.74 0.37 0.42
734a x 2.5 1.4 1.3 1 0.66 0.45 0.52 14
738b – 1.4 0.8 0.55 0.5 0.60 ... 0.63 0.12 0.14
744b – – – 1.4 – 0.77 0.55 0.68 15
814b – 3 1.75 – 1.27 0.68 ... 0.69 0.55 0.64
814 x 3.1 1.7 1.45 1.1 0.69 0.55 0.63 16
824 x 4.1 2.25 2 1.6 0.66 0.75 0.86
Suitable for continuous operation, start-stop operation with an Certification for the motor, cable and plug components:
17
operating time of up to 70% and frequency converter operation.
IE3 motors: CE, cURURS, CCC
Motors with Index b: CE/CCC (50 Hz), CE/cURUS (60 Hz)
18
< 40 11 Rated motor power

19
45 0.95 The ambient operating temperature TU influences the
50 0.90 rated power PN of the gear motors.
20
55 0.85
60 0.8 21
Rated motor power (0.37; 0.25; 0.12 kW)
1
22
23
24

Motor connection
Motor connection
Motor connection with cable/plug (AT = 1), circuit diagram
1 1 L1 1U1
2 2 L2 1V1
3 3 L3 1W1
4 4 TH1 1U2
5 5 TH2 1V2
PE PE
1) 2) PE
1W2
M
6x1,5mm2 3~
>
26827
1 Connection cable side

2 Motor side
The plug connection consists of UL components.
Connection list
3~ motor connection terminals Pin no. Code PE PE
U1 1 L1
1 2
V1 2 L2
W1 3 L3
TW1 4 Th1
1
TW2 5 Th2 2
PE PE 3 5
5 4 3 4
29430 29429
Motor side Connection cable side

Motor connection
Motor protection switch

1
Motor 50 Hz 60 Hz Motor protection switch
type
Rated output Voltage Rated output Voltage 2
∆ Y ∆ Y ∆ Y
(V) (V) (V) (V) (A) (A)
3
524 0.09 200 N/A 0.10 220 400 0.75 0.43
N/A 400 N/A 460 N/A 0.37
4
N/A N/A N/A 575 N/A 0.30
624 0.18 200 N/A 0.22 220 400 1.30 0.75
5
N/A 400 N/A 460 N/A 0.65
N/A N/A N/A 575 N/A 0.55
6
634 0.25 200 N/A 0.29 220 400 1.90 1.10
N/A 400 N/A 460 N/A 1.00
7
N/A N/A N/A 575 N/A 0.80
734 0.37 200 N/A 0.42 220 400 2.15 1.25
N/A 400 N/A 460 N/A 1.10
8
N/A N/A N/A 575 N/A 0.90
734a 0.45 200 N/A 0.52 220 400 2.75 1.60 9
N/A 400 N/A 460 N/A 1.40
N/A N/A N/A 575 N/A 1.15 10
814 0.55 200 N/A 0.63 220 400 3.30 1.95
N/A 400 N/A 460 N/A 1.70 11
N/A N/A N/A 575 N/A 1.30
824 0.75 200 N/A 0.86 220 400 4.40 2.55 12
N/A 400 N/A 460 N/A 2.25
N/A N/A N/A 575 N/A 1.90 13
716 0.18 200 N/A 0.22 220 400 1.50 0.85
N/A 400 N/A 460 N/A 0.70 14
N/A N/A N/A 575 N/A 0.60
15
Country applicability 16
Europe Switzerland USA Canada Brazil Australia New Zealand South China India
Korea
17
Line voltage (3x....) 400 V 400 V 480 V 480 V 220 V 400 V 400 V 220 V 380 V 415 V
575 V 380 V 415 V 415 V 380 V
440 V 440 V 18
Line voltage ±10% ±10% ±10% ±10% ±10% ±5% ±5% ±5%
tolerance 19
Line frequency 50 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 50 Hz
20
21
22
23
24

Transportation and nominal speeds vN
Modular unit Motor type Motor type

50 Hz 60 Hz
vN (m/min) v [m/min] v [m/min]
AS 2/B–150 18 18.5 734a 18.9 734

15 15.7 734 13.4 734
12 11.2 734 13.4 734
9 8.5 734 10.2 734
6 5.7 716 6.8 716
AS 2/B–250 18 18.5 824 18.9 824
15 15.7 824 15.7 824
12 10.9 824 11.1 814
9 9.2 814 8.9 734
6 5.9 734 5.9 716
AS 2/C–100 18 18.5 634 16.6 624
BS 2/C–100 15 13.9 624 13.3 624
CS/C 12 11.1 624 11.1 624
AS 2/R–300 9 9.2 624 8.3 624
BS 2/R–300 6 5.5 624 6.7 624
KU 2/90
KU 2/180
BS 2/C–H 18 16.8 744b1/814b2 15.8 734b
AS 2/C–400 15 13.2 734b 15.8 734b
BS 2/R–H 12 10.4 734b 12.5 734b
AS 2/R–1200 9 8.1 714b 9.8 714b
6 5.4 716b 6.5 716b
AS 2/C–700 18 16.8 824 17.2 824
AS 2/R–2200 15 14.4 824 14.3 824
12 11.9 824 12.0 824
9 8.4 814 8.1 734
6 5.4 734 6.5 734
AS 2/C–250 18 18.5 734b 17.5 734b
BS 2/C–250 15 14.6 734b 14.5 734b
AS 2/R–700 12 12.0 734b 11.5 734b
BS 2/R–700 9 9.6 734b 9.0 734b
6 5.9 734b 5.5 714b
BS 2 18 18.0 634 18.0 634
BS 2/M, BS 2/M 15 15.0 634 14.4 634
BS 2/T, BS 2/TE
CU 2/90 12 12.0 634 10.8 624
BS 2/K 9 9.0 624 8.7 624
EQ 2/T, EQ 2/TE 6 6.0 624 5.4 624
EQ 2/M
BS 2/130
vN  = nominal speed
v  = conveyor medium speed
1
For voltage class: B (see p. 11-25)
2
For voltage class: A, D (see p. 11-25)

Technical data| TS 2plus 7.011-29
Transportation and nominal speeds vN 1
3
Modular unit Motor type Motor type
50 Hz 60 Hz
vN (m/min) v [m/min] v [m/min] 4
HQ 2/U 18 15.8 524 19.0 524

5
15 13.2 524 15.8 524
12 10.6 524 12.7 524
6
9 8.3 524 10.0 524
6 5.7 524 6.8 524
7
KE 2 18 18.0 524 18.0 524
EQ 2/TR, EQ 2/TR-90 15 15.0 524 14.4 524
8
12 12.0 524 10.8 524
9 9.0 524 9.0 524
HQ 2/S, HQ2/U2 6 6.0 524 5.7 524
9
HQ 2/C‑H 18 18.5 634 16.6 624
15 13.9 624 13.3 624 10
12 11.1 624 11.1 624
9 9.2 624 8.3 624 11
6 5.5 624 6.7 624
HQ 2/U-H 18 16.7 624 20.4 624 12
15 16.7 624 15.3 624
12 12.5 624 10.2 624 13
9 8.4 624 7.6 624
6 6.3 624 6.1 624 14
v  = conveyor medium speed 15
Modular unit Motor type Motor type 16

50 Hz 50 Hz 60 Hz 60 Hz
vN (m/min) v [m/min] vT (m/min) v [m/min] vT (m/min)
17
BS 2/R–V–1200 18 16.8 42.0 744b1/814b2 – – –
AS 2/R–V–1200 15 13.2 33.0 734b 15.8 39.5 734b 18
12 10.4 26.0 734b 12.5 31.3 734b
9 8.1 20.3 714b 9.8 24.5 714b 19
6 5.4 13.5 716b 6.5 16.3 716b
AS 2/R–V–2200 18 16.8 42.0 824 17.2 43.0 824 20
15 14.4 36.0 824 14.3 35.8 824
12 11.9 29.8 824 12.0 30.0 824 21
9 8.4 21.0 814 8.1 20.3 734
6 5.4 13.5 734 6.5 16.3 734 22
v  = conveyor medium speed
vT  = max. transportation speed 23
1
For voltage class: B (see p. 11-25)
2
For voltage class: A, D (see p. 11-25)
24

Compressed air consumption of TS 2plus units
Compressed air consumption of TS 2plus units
Unit Type Rotation angle Diameter Lift Volume*

(°) d (mm) (mm) (cm3)
Block cylinder PE 2, HQ 2 (BG 1) — 50 25 59
EQ 2, HQ 2 (BG 2) — 2 x 50 25 118
HQ 2/U2
HQ 2/U-H — 2 x 50 25 118
— 3 x 50 25 177
— 4 x 50 25 236
HP 2 lift positioning unit — 63 80 249
125 390
175 546
225 701
275 856
325 1011
375 1166
425 1321
PE 2/X, PE 2/H positioning unit, — 4 x 63 33 103
PE 2/XP positioning unit BG 1 — 40 34 43
BG 2 — 50 34 67
HD 2 lift rotate unit — 50 40 201
— 50 90 452
90 80 125 628
180 80 180 905
HD 2/H lift rotate unit BG 1 rotating cylinder 90; 180 — — 146
BG 2, 3 rotating cylinder 90; 180 — — 283
BG 1 lifting cylinder 90 40 185 232.4
180 40 80 100.5
BG 2 lifting cylinder 90 63 185 576
180 63 80 249.4
BG 3 lifting cylinder 90 100 185 1452.9
180 100 80 628.3
Stop gate VE 2, VE 2/L, VE 2/M — 32 20 16
VE 2/X — 44 9 11
VE 2/D-60 — 34 8 5
VE 2/D-175 — 38 6 5
VE 2/D-200 — 50 10 16
VE 2/D-100H — 25 20 10
VE 2/D-250H — 40 24 30
DA 2/100H — 35 24 20
DA 2/250H, VA 2/250-H — 40 24 30
Damper DA 2/60 — 20 18 6
DA 2/100 — 35 35 34
VA 2 slide stop 3 842 528 808 — 32 20 16
3 842 191 721 — 20 17 5
*
Details on request
Material number overview | TS 2plus 7.0 12-1

Material number overview 1
2
0 830 100 433 7-61 3 842 338 755 5-40, 5-41 3 842 513 458 2-15, 2-20 3 842 525 860 7-53
0 842 090 030 2-9 3 842 338 756 5-40, 5-41 3 842 515 844 8-15, 8-16 3 842 525 861 7-53
0 842 090 032 2-9 3 842 338 757 5-40, 5-41 3 842 518 828 3-236, 3-237, 3 842 525 862 7-53 3
0 842 090 034 2-9 3 842 338 758 5-40, 5-41 4-40, 5-78 3 842 525 863 7-53
0 842 090 039 2-9 3 842 338 760 5-40, 5-41 3 842 519 717 8-148 3 842 525 864 7-53
0 842 090 041 2-9 3 842 338 761 5-40, 5-41 3 842 520 000 5-86, 5-87 3 842 525 865 7-53
0 842 090 043 2-9 3 842 338 762 5-40, 5-41 3 842 522 140 5-84 3 842 525 866 7-53
4
0 842 090 048 2-9 3 842 338 763 5-40, 5-41 3 842 522 141 5-84 3 842 525 867 7-53
0 842 090 050 2-9 3 842 338 764 5-40, 5-41 3 842 522 142 5-84 3 842 525 868 7-53
0 842 090 051 2-9 3 842 338 766 5-40, 5-41 3 842 522 143 5-84 3 842 525 869 7-53 5
0 842 090 080 2-9 3 842 338 767 5-40, 5-41 3 842 523 258 3-94, 3-164, 3 842 525 870 7-53
0 842 090 081 2-9 3 842 338 768 5-40, 5-41 3-213 3 842 525 998 2-18, 2-20
0 842 090 083 2-9 3 842 338 771 5-40, 5-41 3 842 523 381 2-27, 2-29 3 842 525 999 2-18, 2-20 6
0 842 090 086 2-9 3 842 338 773 5-40, 5-41 3 842 523 405 2-9 3 842 526 560 3-232, 6-30
0 842 090 088 2-9 3 842 338 775 5-40, 5-41 3 842 523 561 3-232 3 842 526 760 2-15, 2-21
0 842 601 001 7-5, 7-6 3 842 338 776 5-40, 5-41 3 842 523 918 3-183 3 842 526 761 2-15, 2-21 7
0 842 601 003 7-5, 7-6 3 842 338 777 5-40, 5-41 3 842 524 447 8-143, 8-144 3 842 526 762 2-15, 2-21
0 842 601 004 7-5, 7-6 3 842 338 779 5-40, 5-41 3 842 524 448 8-145, 8-146 3 842 526 763 2-15, 2-21
0 842 601 006 7-5, 7-6 3 842 338 781 5-40, 5-41 3 842 524 449 8-143, 8-144, 3 842 526 764 2-15, 2-21 8
0 842 900 300 8-6, 8-7 3 842 345 081 6-32 8-147 3 842 527 147 11-2
3 842 146 848 3-231, 6-28 3 842 345 100 5-54, 5-55 3 842 524 450 8-143, 8-144, 3 842 528 192 3-237, 5-78
3 842 168 600 8-98 3 842 345 101 5-54, 5-55 8-147 3 842 528 292 2-18, 2-21 9
3 842 168 820 8-96 3 842 345 102 5-54, 5-55 3 842 524 451 8-143, 8-144, 3 842 528 293 2-18, 2-21
3 842 168 830 8-90 3 842 345 105 5-54, 5-55 8-147 3 842 528 480 3-64, 3-132
3 842 168 840 8-102 3 842 345 106 5-54, 5-55 3 842 524 452 8-143, 8-144, 3 842 528 718 6-31 10
3 842 168 850 8-92 3 842 345 107 5-54, 5-55 8-147 3 842 528 746 3-40, 3-107,
3 842 174 301 2-15, 2-20 3 842 345 108 5-54, 5-55 3 842 524 453 8-143, 8-144, 3-176, 3-215
3 842 174 302 2-15, 2-20 3 842 345 110 5-54, 5-55 8-147 3 842 528 802 3-80, 3-81
11
3 842 174 303 2-15, 2-20 3 842 345 111 5-54, 5-55 3 842 524 594 2-27, 2-31 3 842 528 803 3-148
3 842 174 304 2-15, 2-20 3 842 345 112 5-54, 5-55 3 842 524 595 2-27, 2-31 3 842 528 806 3-82, 3-83
3 842 174 311 2-27, 2-29 3 842 345 113 5-54, 5-55 3 842 524 596 2-27, 2-31 3 842 528 807 3-150
3 842 174 313 2-27, 2-29 3 842 345 114 5-54, 5-55 3 842 524 597 2-27, 2-31 3 842 528 808 8-46, 8-47, 12
3 842 174 315 2-27, 2-29 3 842 345 116 5-54, 5-55 3 842 524 598 2-27, 2-31 11-30
3 842 174 321 2-27, 2-29 3 842 345 117 5-54, 5-55 3 842 524 599 2-27, 2-31 3 842 528 817 8-18, 8-19
3 842 174 323 2-27, 2-29 3 842 345 118 5-54, 5-55 3 842 524 600 2-27, 2-31 3 842 529 881 3-236, 4-40 13
3 842 174 325 2-27, 2-29 3 842 345 121 5-54, 5-55 3 842 524 601 2-27, 2-33 3 842 529 931 3-165
3 842 174 331 2-27, 2-29 3 842 345 123 5-54, 5-55 3 842 524 602 2-27, 2-31 3 842 529 933 3-97, 3-167
3 842 174 333 2-27, 2-29 3 842 345 125 5-54, 5-55 3 842 524 603 2-27, 2-31 3 842 530 417 3-187 14
3 842 174 334 2-27, 2-29 3 842 345 126 5-54, 5-55 3 842 524 604 2-27, 2-33 3 842 530 529 2-53
3 842 174 341 2-22 3 842 345 127 5-54, 5-55 3 842 524 605 2-27, 2-31 3 842 530 630 8-9, 8-10
3 842 174 375 2-27, 2-29 3 842 345 129 5-54, 5-55 3 842 524 606 2-27, 2-33 3 842 530 797 8-133 15
3 842 174 376 2-27, 2-29 3 842 345 131 5-54, 5-55 3 842 524 607 2-27, 2-33 3 842 530 864 3-185
3 842 174 378 2-27, 2-29 3 842 348 780 8-140 3 842 524 608 2-27, 2-33 3 842 530 871 3-236, 4-40
3 842 174 381 2-27, 2-29 3 842 348 781 8-140 3 842 524 609 2-27, 2-33 3 842 531 354 2-46 16
3 842 174 383 2-27, 2-29 3 842 348 782 8-140 3 842 524 614 2-22 3 842 531 610 8-12, 8-13
3 842 179 574 3-236, 4-40 3 842 348 783 8-140 3 842 524 615 2-22 3 842 531 696 8-40, 8-41
3 842 191 721 8-49, 8-50, 3 842 348 784 8-140 3 842 524 895 8-30, 8-31 3 842 532 151 8-136 17
11-30 3 842 348 786 8-140 3 842 525 110 3-236, 3-237, 3 842 532 409 7-34, 7-35
3 842 211 355 7-27, 7-32 3 842 348 788 8-140 4-40, 5-42, 3 842 532 410 7-34, 7-35
3 842 242 350 7-36, 7-37 3 842 352 171 2-6, 2-7 5-78 3 842 532 411 7-34, 7-35
18
3 842 242 351 7-36, 7-37 3 842 501 548 8-108, 8-109, 3 842 525 634 7-5, 7-6 3 842 532 412 7-34, 7-35
3 842 242 375 7-40 8-114 3 842 525 733 8-67, 8-68 3 842 532 608 3-37
3 842 242 376 7-40 3 842 504 706 7-9 3 842 525 734 8-71, 8-72 3 842 532 609 3-95, 3-96
3 842 242 377 7-40 3 842 504 707 7-9 3 842 525 803 2-25 3 842 532 630 2-6 19
3 842 242 378 7-40 3 842 504 708 7-9 3 842 525 804 2-25 3 842 532 675 3-39
3 842 242 390 7-43 3 842 504 710 7-9 3 842 525 805 2-25 3 842 532 676 3-168
3 842 242 391 7-43 3 842 504 711 7-9 3 842 525 846 2-23 3 842 532 679 3-43, 3-114 20
3 842 242 392 7-43 3 842 504 712 7-9 3 842 525 847 7-53 3 842 532 680 3-43, 3-114
3 842 242 395 7-43 3 842 504 713 7-9 3 842 525 848 7-53 3 842 532 695 3-31
3 842 242 396 7-43 3 842 504 714 7-9 3 842 525 849 7-53 3 842 532 696 3-35 21
3 842 242 397 7-43 3 842 504 715 7-9 3 842 525 850 7-53 3 842 532 697 3-33
3 842 315 101 3-48 3 842 504 716 7-9 3 842 525 851 7-53 3 842 532 777 3-112
3 842 315 106 3-47 3 842 504 717 7-9 3 842 525 852 7-53 3 842 532 778 3-181
3 842 319 500 5-86, 5-87 3 842 504 718 7-9 3 842 525 853 7-53 3 842 532 810 3-48
3 842 319 501 5-86, 5-87 3 842 504 719 7-9 3 842 525 854 7-53 3 842 532 812 2-24
3 842 328 196 5-38 3 842 508 933 7-12 3 842 525 855 7-53 3 842 532 822 3-18, 3-21,
3 842 328 197 5-38 3 842 510 157 7-34, 7-35 3 842 525 856 7-53 3-27
3 842 338 750 5-40, 5-41 3 842 510 158 7-34, 7-35 3 842 525 857 7-53 3 842 536 268 3-183
3 842 338 751 5-40, 5-41 3 842 510 159 7-34, 7-35 3 842 525 858 7-53 3 842 536 270 3-185
3 842 338 752 5-40, 5-41 3 842 510 160 7-34, 7-35 3 842 525 859 7-53 3 842 536 382 3-188

12-2 TS 2plus 7.0 | Material number overview
3 842 536 792 3-169 3 842 548 417 2-43 3 842 552 601 7-67, 7-70 3 842 995 000 3-211
3 842 536 793 3-99, 3-100 3 842 548 418 2-43 3 842 552 602 7-67, 7-70 3 842 996 320 3-231, 6-7
3 842 536 800 3-171 3 842 548 419 2-43 3 842 552 603 7-67, 7-70 3 842 996 321 6-9
3 842 536 801 3-102 3 842 548 420 2-43 3 842 552 604 7-67, 7-70 3 842 996 322 6-11
3 842 536 802 3-214 3 842 548 421 2-43 3 842 552 605 7-67, 7-70 3 842 996 323 6-14
3 842 536 803 3-208 3 842 548 422 2-43 3 842 552 606 7-67, 7-70 3 842 996 324 6-17
3 842 536 926 7-50 3 842 548 424 2-43 3 842 552 607 7-67, 7-70 3 842 996 325 6-19
3 842 536 930 7-46 3 842 548 425 2-43 3 842 552 609 7-67, 7-70 3 842 996 326 6-21
3 842 536 931 7-46 3 842 548 426 2-43 3 842 552 611 7-67, 7-70 3 842 996 327 6-23
3 842 536 932 7-48 3 842 548 439 2-43 3 842 552 612 7-67, 7-70 3 842 998 038 3-75
3 842 536 933 7-48 3 842 548 440 2-43 3 842 552 613 7-67, 7-70 3 842 998 039 3-78
3 842 536 960 7-24, 7-25 3 842 548 578 3-85, 3-153 3 842 552 614 7-67, 7-70 3 842 998 040 3-143
3 842 536 962 7-24, 7-25 3 842 548 585 8-75, 8-76 3 842 552 615 7-67, 7-70 3 842 998 041 3-146
3 842 536 974 7-22 3 842 548 644 8-79, 8-80 3 842 552 616 7-67, 7-70 3 842 998 052 3-137
3 842 536 975 7-26 3 842 548 684 2-27, 2-33 3 842 552 617 7-67, 7-70 3 842 998 053 3-69
3 842 536 977 7-24, 7-25 3 842 548 685 2-27, 2-33 3 842 552 618 7-68, 7-70 3 842 998 072 3-140
3 842 537 280 8-94 3 842 548 686 2-27, 2-33 3 842 552 619 7-68, 7-70 3 842 998 087 3-72
3 842 537 289 8-100 3 842 548 687 2-27, 2-33 3 842 552 620 7-68, 7-70 3 842 998 096 3-126
3 842 537 310 3-112 3 842 548 688 2-43 3 842 552 622 7-68, 7-70 3 842 998 098 4-25
3 842 537 319 3-181 3 842 548 689 2-43 3 842 552 624 7-68, 7-72 3 842 998 099 4-29
3 842 537 320 3-220 3 842 548 690 2-43 3 842 552 625 7-68, 7-72 3 842 998 113 5-34
3 842 537 353 3-90, 3-98 3 842 548 691 2-43 3 842 552 626 7-68, 7-72 3 842 998 114 5-49
3 842 537 615 3-188 3 842 548 692 2-43 3 842 552 627 7-68, 7-72 3 842 998 233 3-203
3 842 537 855 8-137 3 842 548 693 2-43 3 842 552 628 7-68, 7-72 3 842 998 234 3-206
3 842 537 888 3-105, 3-174 3 842 548 694 2-43 3 842 552 630 7-68, 7-72 3 842 998 238 3-129
3 842 537 889 3-106, 3-175 3 842 548 695 2-43 3 842 552 821 8-123 3 842 998 239 3-62
3 842 537 890 3-104, 3-173 3 842 548 696 2-43 3 842 553 184 8-123 3 842 998 277 3-53
3 842 538 064 5-86, 5-87 3 842 548 697 2-43 3 842 553 445 8-122 3 842 998 288 4-7
3 842 538 065 5-86, 5-87 3 842 548 698 2-43 3 842 553 447 8-121 3 842 998 289 5-12
3 842 538 245 5-86, 5-87 3 842 548 699 2-43 3 842 553 449 8-121 3 842 998 324 7-15
3 842 538 307 2-27, 2-33 3 842 548 862 6-33 3 842 553 450 8-121 3 842 998 492 3-197
3 842 538 308 2-27, 2-33 3 842 548 863 6-33 3 842 553 451 8-121 3 842 998 744 5-90, 5-91
3 842 538 309 2-27, 2-33 3 842 548 864 6-33 3 842 553 452 8-121 3 842 998 745 8-82, 8-83
3 842 538 310 2-27, 2-33 3 842 548 865 6-33 3 842 553 453 8-121 3 842 998 746 8-85, 8-86
3 842 538 311 2-27, 2-33 3 842 548 868 6-33 3 842 553 454 8-121 3 842 998 747 8-33, 8-34
3 842 538 312 2-27, 2-33 3 842 548 869 6-33 3 842 553 457 8-122 3 842 998 748 8-37, 8-38
3 842 538 346 2-27, 2-33 3 842 549 509 3-232 3 842 553 459 8-121 3 842 998 750 5-65
3 842 538 869 3-222 3 842 549 511 3-230 3 842 553 512 8-122 3 842 998 751 2-35
3 842 538 870 3-222 3 842 549 512 3-230 3 842 553 814 5-82 3 842 998 755 2-35
3 842 538 872 3-224 3 842 549 513 3-230 3 842 554 658 5-82 3 842 998 756 2-41
3 842 538 972 3-90, 3-98, 3 842 549 514 3-230 3 842 554 659 5-82 3 842 998 757 2-51
3-118 3 842 549 515 3-230 3 842 557 633 8-108, 8-109, 3 842 998 760 7-61, 7-62,
3 842 539 057 10-3 3 842 549 516 3-230 8-114 7-65
3 842 539 096 3-64, 3-132 3 842 549 517 3-230 3 842 557 983 8-62 3 842 998 761 7-61, 7-62,
3 842 539 357 3-225 3 842 549 696 8-42, 8-43 7-65
3 842 539 479 3-45 3 842 549 698 8-42, 8-43 3 842 558 657 3-18, 3-21, 3 842 998 762 7-61, 7-62
3 842 541 003 9-3 3 842 549 811 7-61, 8-110, 3-189 3 842 998 796 8-56, 8-57
3 842 542 550 3-13 8-111, 8-114 3 842 558 795 8-27 3 842 998 952 7-19
3 842 543 469 3-85, 3-153 3 842 549 812 8-110, 8-111, 3 842 559 001 8-52 3 842 999 000 7-57
3 842 543 482 3-85, 3-153 8-114 3 842 990 409 3-35 3 842 999 002 5-72
3 842 543 483 3-85, 3-153 3 842 549 813 8-110, 8-111, 3 842 990 570 3-232 3 842 999 083 3-19
3 842 543 484 3-85, 3-153 8-114 3 842 992 650 3-29 3 842 999 090 3-25
3 842 543 485 3-85, 3-153 3 842 549 814 8-108, 8-109, 3 842 992 811 3-45 3 842 999 190 3-19
3 842 543 486 3-85, 3-153 8-114 3 842 992 884 3-31 3 842 999 678 7-28
3 842 543 487 3-85, 3-153 3 842 992 903 3-33 3 842 999 715 4-22
3 842 545 974 8-55 3 842 551 226 3-116, 3-117, 3 842 993 052 3-111, 3-180, 3 842 999 716 3-7
3 842 547 003 1-18 4-34, 4-37 3-219, 5-92 3 842 999 717 3-10
3 842 547 770 8-21, 8-22 3 842 551 227 3-116, 3-117 3 842 993 259 3-37 3 842 999 720 3-22
3 842 547 785 8-24, 8-25 3 842 551 234 3-116, 3-117 3 842 993 324 6-25 3 842 999 721 3-22
3 842 548 405 2-43 3 842 993 325 6-25 3 842 999 722 5-43
3 842 548 407 2-43 3 842 551 761 8-112, 8-113, 3 842 994 635 3-42, 3-109, 3 842 999 723 5-46
3 842 548 408 2-43 8-114 3-178, 3-217, 3 842 999 725 4-16
3 842 548 409 2-43 3 842 552 593 7-67, 7-70 5-92 3 842 999 726 4-19
3 842 548 410 2-43 3 842 552 594 7-67, 7-70 3 842 994 889 3-156 3 842 999 727 4-10
3 842 548 411 2-43 3 842 552 595 7-67, 7-70 3 842 994 890 3-88 3 842 999 728 4-13
3 842 548 412 2-43 3 842 552 596 7-67, 7-70 3 842 994 907 3-159 3 842 999 743 5-76
3 842 548 413 2-43 3 842 552 597 7-67, 7-70 3 842 994 910 6-26 3 842 999 843 5-61
3 842 548 414 2-43 3 842 552 598 7-68, 7-72 3 842 994 927 3-29 3 842 999 888 5-29
3 842 548 415 2-43 3 842 552 599 7-68, 7-72 3 842 994 972 3-162 3 842 999 894 5-7
3 842 548 416 2-43 3 842 552 600 7-68, 7-72 3 842 994 973 3-92 3 842 999 895 5-16

Material number overview | TS 2plus 7.0 12-3

2
3 842 999 896 5-21
3 842 999 903 5-57
3 842 999 904 3-123 3
3 842 999 917 3-56
3 842 999 941 2-48
3 842 999 985 3-59
3 842 999 994 4-35
4
3 842 999 995 4-38
8 981 010 510 3-118
8 981 010 511 3-191 5
8 981 022 903 8-104
R912005717 8-127
R912005718 8-127 6
R912006050 8-127
R912006051 8-127
R912006052 8-127 7
R912006132 8-127
R912006133 8-127
R912006134 8-127 8
R912007257 8-127
R912007272 8-127
R912007273 8-127 9
R999000429 8-126
R999000430 8-126
R999001226 8-126 10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

12-4 TS 2plus 7.0 | Material number overview

Index | TS 2plus 7.0 13-1

Index 1
2
▶▶ A Components Drilling template for
Acceleration element 3-188 ––Belt 3-16 blocking bolts 3-118
Accumulation roller chain 3-120 ––Flat top chain 3-66 Drive module 3
––Chain breaker 3-191 ––PE 2/XX process force ––AS 2/B-150 3-18
––Master link 3-187 decoupler 7-44 ––AS 2/B-250 3-21
––With PA accumulation ––WT 2 2-12 ––AS 2/C-100 3-68 4
rollers 3-183 ––WT 2/H 2-38 ––AS 2/C-250 3-71
––With steel accumulation Compressed air consumption ––AS 2/C-400 3-74
rollers 3-185 of TS 2plus units 11-30 ––AS 2/C-700 3-77
5
Adapter plate kit Connection belt ––AS 2/R-1200 3-142
––ST 2/C-H 3-102 ––BS 2/C+R 3-64, 3-132 ––AS 2/R-2200 3-145 6
––ST 2/R-H 3-171 ––For HQ 2/O 5-38 ––AS 2/R-300 3-136
––ST 2/R-V 3-214 Connection cable for ––AS 2/R-700 3-139
Ambient conditions 1-12 frequency converter 8-122 ––AS 2/R-V-1200 3-202 7
Anvil plate 7-40 Connection kits ––AS 2/R-V-2200 3-205
Attachment kit for frequency ––For longitudinal conveyor 3-236
converter 8-122 ––For longitudinal conveyors 4-40 ▶▶ E 8
––For transverse conveyor 3-237, EFC frequency converter 8-126
▶▶ B 5-78 ––Option cards 8-127
9
Belt 3-4 Connection unit for frequency Electric transverse conveyor 5-4
––Belt assembly tool 3-48 converter 8-122 ––EQ 2/T 5-15
––Glue 3-47 Conveyor media 1-10 ––EQ 2/TE 5-20 10
––GT 2 belt 3-45 Conveyor medium ––EQ 2/TR 5-6
Belt section ––Accumulation roller chain 3-120 ––EQ 2/TR-90 5-11
––BS 2 3-6 ––Belt and toothed belt 3-4 Energy efficiency 1-19 11
––BS 2/130 5-75 ––Flat top chain 3-50
––BS 2/C-100 3-55 ––Vplus accumulation ▶▶ F
––BS 2/C-250 3-58 roller chain 3-222 Flat top chain 3-2, 3-50 12
––BS 2/C-H 3-61 Conveyor units ––Chain breaker 3-118
––BS 2/K 4-21 ––Accumulation roller chain 3-134 ––ESD plastic flat top chain 3-116
13
––BS 2/M 3-9 ––Belt 3-16 ––Master link 3-116
––BS 2/R-300 3-122 ––Flat top chain 3-66 ––Plastic flat top chain 3-116
––BS 2/R-700 3-125 ––Vplus accumulation Floor dowel 6-30 14
––BS 2/R-H 3-128 roller chain 3-200 Foundation bracket 6-28
––BS 2/R-V-1200 3-196 Cover rail for cable duct 3-94, 3-164, FP 2 guide profile set,
––BS 2/T 5-42 3-213 GP 2 glide profile 3-97, 3-167 15
––BS 2/TE 5-45 CU 2/90 curve 4-6 Frame module
Blocking bolts 3-90, 3-98 Curve 4-1 ––Reinforced 2-17
Bolts 2-25 ––BS 2/K belt section 4-21 ––Standard 2-14 16
Bracket caps 6-33 ––Connection kits for Frame workpiece pallet
longitudinal conveyor 4-40 ––WT 2/F 2-47
17
▶▶ C ––Curves 4-4 ––WT 2/F-H 2-50
Carrying plate 2-26, 2-42 ––Selection 4-2 Frequency converters 8-116
Chain breaker Cylinder switch, pneumatic 8-136 ––Selection guide 8-118 18
––For accumulation FU frequency converter 8-120
roller chain 3-191 ▶▶ D ––Attachment kit 8-122
––For flat-top chain belt 3-118 Damper 8-60 ––Communication module 8-121 19
––For Vplus accumulation ––DA 2/100-B 8-67 ––Connection cable 8-122
roller chain 3-225 ––DA 2/100-C 8-71 ––Connection unit 8-122
Choice of system 1-4 ––DA 2/100-E 8-75 ––Hand-held control panel 8-123 20
Clamping holder 8-55 ––DA 2/100-H 8-82 ––Power unit 8-121
Combination of conveyor media, ––DA 2/150-E 8-79 ––Switching/ 21
glide profiles and components 1-11 ––DA 2/250-H 8-85 potentiometer unit 8-123
Communication module for ––DA 2/60 8-62 Function plans 11-6
frequency converter 8-121 Data tag and identification 22
systems 1-18
Design ideas 1-16
Dowel pin 2-24 23
24

13-2 TS 2plus 7.0 | Index
▶▶ G Leg sets 6-1 ▶▶ P

Glide profile ––Bracket caps 6-33 PE 2/XX process
––GP 2, FP 2 set 3-97, 3-167 ––Flange nut 6-32 force decoupler 7-44
––GP 2/H-Kst 3-106, 3-175 ––Floor dowel 6-30 Planning software, MTpro 10-1
––GP 2/H-ST 3-105, 3-174 ––Foundation bracket 6-28 Pneumatic cylinder switch 8-136
––GP 2/ST, FP RK 3-168 ––Selection 6-2 Position sensor
Glue 3-47 ––SZ 2–ST 2 reinforcement 6-26 ––RA set 7-26
Guide profile ––SZ 2/… leg sets 6-4 ––SA cylinder 7-22
––FP 2, GP 2 set 3-97, 3-167 ––T-bolt 6-31 ––Stop gate 8-18
––FP 2/B 3-39 LG 2/H lift gate 3-226 Position sensor kit for PE 2 7-12
––FP 2/H-ST 3-104, 3-173 Lift positioning unit Positioning bushing 2-22
––FP SRK, GP 2 ST 3-168 ––HP 2 7-27 Positioning bushing kit
––HP 2/L 7-18 ––WT 2/F-H 2-53
▶▶ H Lift rotate unit ––WT 2/H 2-46
Hand-held control panel 8-123 ––HD 2 7-52 Positioning pin
Housing element ––HD 2/H 7-60 ––Flat-sided 7-43
––For HD 2/H 7-67 Lift transverse unit 5-26 ––Round 7-43
––For HP 2 7-34 ––HQ 2/C-H 5-71 Positioning unit
––For HP 2/L 7-24 ––HQ 2/O 5-33 ––PE 2 7-8
––SK 2 5-54 ––HQ 2/S 5-28 ––PE 2/H 7-56
––SK 2/B 5-40 ––HQ 2/T 5-48 ––PE 2/X 7-14
––HQ 2/U 5-56 ––PE 2/XP 7-36
▶▶ I ––HQ 2/U-H 5-64 Power unit for frequency
Identification and data tag ––HQ 2/U2 5-60 converter 8-121
systems 1-18 Longitudinal conveyor 3-1 Press-fit mandrel 2-23
Identification systems 9-1 ––Accumulation roller chain 3-120 Profile connector 3-40, 3-107,
Intermediate section with roller 5-82 ––Belt and toothed belt 3-4 3-176, 3-215
––Flat top chain 3-50
▶▶ K ––Selection 3-2 ▶▶ Q
KE curve LU 2 automatic QV 2 cross connector 3-41, 3-108,
––KE 2/180 4-12 lubrication unit 3-84, 3-152 3-177, 3-216
––KE 2/90 4-9 QV 2-H cross connector 3-110,
––KE 2/O-180 4-18 ▶▶ M 3-179, 3-218
––KE 2/O-90 4-15 M8 flange nut 6-32
Kit Maintenance section ▶▶ R
––WT 2/H 2-40 ––ST 2/...W 3-112 R912005717 8-127
Kit for lower end damping 7-32 ––ST 2/R-...-W 3-181 R912005718 8-127
KU curve ––ST 2/R-V-W 3-220 R912006050 8-127
––KU 2/180 4-28 Master link R912006051 8-127
––KU 2/90 4-24 ––For accumulation R912006052 8-127
KU curve arc roller chain 3-187 R912006132 8-127
––KU 2/O-... 4-32 ––For flat-top chain belt 3-116 R912006133 8-127
––KU 2/O-180 4-37 ––For Vplus accumulation R912006134 8-127
––KU 2/O-90 4-34 roller chain 3-224 R912007257 8-127
Material number overview 12-1 R912007272 8-127
▶▶ L Motor connection 11-26 R912007273 8-127
Lateral guide 7-50 Motor data 11-24, 11-25 R999000429 8-126
Layout planning 1-8 MS rocker extension 8-147 R999000430 8-126
Leg set MTpro planning software 10-1 R999001226 8-126
––HD 2/H 6-24 RA position sensor 7-26
––SZ 2 6-4, 6-6 ▶▶ N RB 2 roller track 3-27
––SZ 2/H 6-8 Nominal speed vN 11-28, 11-29 RB 2/UM 2 roller
––SZ 2/K-180 6-22 track set 3-189, 5-88
––SZ 2/K-90 6-20 ▶▶ O RE roller element 5-86
––SZ 2/T 6-16 Operating principle 1-3 Return stop
––SZ 2/T-H 6-18 ––Ambient conditions 1-12 ––VE 2/RS 8-40
––SZ 2/U 6-10 ––Choice of system 1-4 ––VE 2/RS-H 8-42
––SZ 2/U-H 6-13 ––Combination 1-11 ––VE 2/RS-H, pneumatic 8-42
––Conveyor media 1-10
––Layout planning 1-8
––Transported product 1-6
Option cards 8-127

Index | TS 2plus 7.0 13-3

2
Return unit Stop gate Transported product 1-6
––UM 2/B 3-24 ––VE 2 8-4, 8-6 Transverse conveyor 5-1
––UM 2/C-170 3-82 ––VE 2/D-175 8-27 ––BS 2 belt section 5-42, 5-45, 3
––UM 2/C-60 3-80 ––VE 2/D-200 8-30 5-75
––UM 2/R-170 3-150 ––VE 2/D-60 8-24 ––EQ 2 electric transverse
––UM 2/R-60 3-148 ––VE 2/D100-H 8-33 conveyor 5-4 4
––UM 2/R-V-170 3-208 ––VE 2/D250-H 8-37 ––HQ 2 lift transverse units 5-26
Rocker 8-131 ––VE 2/L 8-9 ––Intermediate section
––WI 2 8-139 ––VE 2/M 8-12 with roller 5-82 5
––WI 2/D 8-145 ––VE 2/S 8-15 ––RB 2 roller track 3-189, 5-88
––WI 2/X 8-143 ––VE 2/X 8-21 ––RE roller elements 5-86 6
––WI/M 8-133 Switch bracket 8-88 ––RS 2 roller section 5-84, 5-90
Roller sections 5-80 ––SH 2/EP 8-104 ––Selection 5-2
––RS 2 5-84 ––SH 2/S 8-90 ––SK 2 housing element 5-40, 5-54 7
––RS 2/H 5-90 ––SH 2/S-H 8-94 TS 2plus features 1-2
––SH 2/SF 8-102 TS 2plus system overview 0-3
▶▶ S ––SH 2/ST 8-92 Turret stop 8
Scraper 3-43, 3-114 ––SH 2/U 8-96 ––Position sensor set 7-26
Section ––SH 2/U-H 8-100
––ST 2/B, ST 2/B-100 3-28 ––SH 2/UV 8-98 ▶▶ V
9
––ST 2/C-100 3-87 Switching/potentiometer unit 8-123 Vplus accumulation roller chain
––ST 2/C-H 3-91 System specifications 11-2 ––Design 3-193 10
––ST 2/R-100 3-155 SZ 2–ST 2 reinforcement 6-26 ––Master link 3-224
––ST 2/R-100 ST 3-158 ––Vplus accumulation
––ST 2/R-H 3-161 ▶▶ T roller chain 3-192, 3-222 11
––ST 2/R-V 3-210 T-bolt 6-31 Vplus design 3-193
Section profile Technical data 11-1
––SP 2/B 3-31 ––Compressed air consumption ▶▶ W 12
––SP 2/B-100 3-37 of TS 2plus units 11-30 WI/M protective cover 8-137
––SP 2/B-50 3-33 ––Function plans 11-6 Workpiece pallet 2-1
13
––SP 2/BH 3-35 ––Motor connection 11-26 ––Bolts 2-25
––SP 2/C-100 3-95 ––Motor data 11-24, 11-25 ––Carrying plate 2-26, 2-42
––SP 2/C-H 3-99 ––System specifications 11-2 ––Dowel pin 2-24 14
––SP 2/R-100 3-165 ––Transportation and ––Positioning bushing 2-22
––SP 2/R-H 3-169 nominal speeds vN 11-28 ––Press-fit mandrel 2-23
Section, section profiles 3-86, 3-154 Tool ––Reinforced frame module 2-17 15
Selection ––Drilling template for ––Selection 2-2
––Conveyor media 3-2 blocking bolts 3-118 ––Standard frame module 2-14
––Curves 4-2 ––For accumulation ––WT 2 2-8 16
––Leg sets 6-2 roller chain 3-191 ––WT 2 components 2-12, 2-20
––Positioning units 7-2 ––For belt 3-48 ––WT 2/E 2-6
17
––Transportation controls 8-2 ––For flat-top chain belt 3-118 ––WT 2/F 2-47
––Transverse conveyors 5-2 ––Press-fit mandrel 2-23 ––WT 2/F-H 2-50
––Workpiece pallet 2-2 Toothed belt ––WT 2/F-H positioning 18
Sensors 8-106 ––BS 2 3-6 bushing kit 2-53
––M12 with M12x1 8-108 ––BS 2/C+R 3-64 ––WT 2/H 2-34
––M12 with M8x1 8-110 ––BS 2/M 3-9 ––WT 2/H components 2-38 19
––M8 with M8x1 8-112 ––Transmission drive 3-12 ––WT 2/H kit 2-40
Single-track CS/C section 3-52 Transition piece 7-48 ––WT 2/H positioning
Slide stop Transmission drive 3-12 bushing kit 2-46 20
––VA 2/50 8-46 Transportation and Workpiece pallet inner guide 7-5
––VA 2/50 – reversible 8-49 nominal speeds vN 11-28, 11-29 WT 2 stop 8-148
21
––VA 2/D-130 8-52 Transportation control 8-1
––VA 2/D-250 8-56 ––Damper 8-60
Spring element 7-46 ––Frequency converters 8-116 22
––Selection 8-2
––Sensors 8-106
––SH 2 switch brackets 8-88 23
––VA 2 slide stop 8-46
––VE 2 return stop 8-40
––VE 2/... stop gate 8-4
24
––WI/M, WI 2/… rockers 8-131

13-4 TS 2plus 7.0 | Notes

Bosch Rexroth AG
Postfach 30 02 07
70442 Stuttgart, Germany
www.boschrexroth.com
Find your local contact person here:

www.boschrexroth.com/contact
The data specified above only serves to describe the product.

No statements concerning a certain condition or suitability for a certain
application can be derived from our information.
R999000396 (2017-08) The information given does not release the user from the obligation of own
© Bosch Rexroth AG 2017 judgment and verification. It must be remembered that our products are subject to
Subject to modifications a natural process of wear and aging.

R999000396 TS2plus 7.0 2017-08 EN Media PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

R999000396 TS2plus 7.0 2017-08 EN Media PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

R999000396 TS2plus 7.0 2017-08 EN Media PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What are the main components of the TS 2plus transfer system?

What are the main components of the TS 2plus transfer system?

What are some of the conveyor media options described in the documentation?

What are some of the conveyor media options described in the documentation?

TS 2plus transfer system

Permissible load, sum of loads Toothed belt

Conveying level Plastic flat top chain

Unit with energy-efficient drive available Plastic accumulation roller chain

St Steel accumulation roller chain

Lateral separation Vplus Vplus accumulation roller chain

Central separation Duplex chain

EPA ESD-protected area Rounded belt

XX Specific section load/cm

%rH Suitable for use in dry rooms

XXX N Vertical process force

Packing unit = minimum order quantity (here: 10 items)

Delivery unit = delivery quantity (here: 16 items)

Bosch Rexroth AG, R999000396 (2017-08)

TS 2plus system overview

See page 3-6 See page 3-18 See page 3-24 See page 3-28

See page 3-55 See page 3-68 See page 3-80 See page 3-86

See page 3-122 See page 3-136 See page 3-148 See page 3-154

See page 4-6 See page 4-9 See page 4-24 See page 4-32

Bosch Rexroth AG, R999000396 (2017-08)

Bosch Rexroth AG, R999000396 (2017-08)

TS 2plus transfer system 1

Positioning and orientation 7

MTpro planning software 10

Material number overview 12

R999000396 (2017-08), Bosch Rexroth AG

Bosch Rexroth AG, R999000396 (2017-08)

Operating principle 1-3

Design ideas 1-16

Identification and data tag systems 1-18

Energy efficiency – Rexroth 4EE 1-19

R999000396 (2017-08), Bosch Rexroth AG

Bosch Rexroth AG, R999000396 (2017-08)

Diverse, sturdy, adaptable Special TS 2plus units

In a few steps for the best solution

 R999000396 (2017-08), Bosch Rexroth AG

Bosch Rexroth AG, R999000396 (2017-08)

The TS 1 transfer system is

In the automotive industry

The roller conveyor of the

 R999000396 (2017-08), Bosch Rexroth AG

The WT total weight is limited for each WT size so that the

Permissible gravity center position

When separating pallets or changing directions, it is

Bosch Rexroth AG, R999000396 (2017-08)

Available workpiece pallet (WT) dimensions

160 400 1200 mm

WT standard sizes (mm)

R999000396 (2017-08), Bosch Rexroth AG

▶ frequent product alterations

In cases like this, it is practical to transfer the workpiece

Bosch Rexroth AG, R999000396 (2017-08)

◀◀ Rectangular circuit ◀◀ U-shape

◀◀ Production line ◀◀ Parallel workplaces

* Our partners can

R999000396 (2017-08), Bosch Rexroth AG

R999000396 (2017-08), Bosch Rexroth AG

R999000396 (2017-08), Bosch Rexroth AG

R999000396 (2017-08), Bosch Rexroth AG

Efficient system layout Energy-efficient modules

R999000396 (2017-08), Bosch Rexroth AG

R999000396 (2017-08), Bosch Rexroth AG

R999000396 (2017-08), Bosch Rexroth AG

R999000396 (2017-08), Bosch Rexroth AG

R999000396 (2017-08), Bosch Rexroth AG